Second Line Well Control Handbook PDF

Program Directed by
Well Control Certification Committee (Drilling - Land) with members from:
Canadian Association of Petroleum Producers (CAPP)

Canadian Association of Oilwell Drilling Contractors (CAODC)
Alberta Energy Utilities Board (AEUB)
Petroleum Services Association of Canada (PSAC)
Small Explorers and Producers Association of Canada (SEPAC)
National Energy Board (NEB)
Saskatchewan Industry & Resources
Oil & Gas Commission, British Columbia
Energy Mines & Resources, Manitoba
DISCLAIMER
While every attempt has been made to ensure the accuracy and reliability of the contents of this
publication, Enform disclaims any liability/responsibility for its accuracy or for the loss or
damage howsoever occasioned resulting from the use of any of the information in this manual
or for the violation of any regulation with which this information may conflict.
© Copyright 2005 Enform
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system or transmitted, in any form or by any means, without the prior express permission of
the copyright owner.
Revised: October 2006

BACKGROUND TO THE DESIGNATION OF THE RIG TECHNICIAN TRADE
The Alberta government designated Rig Technician as a compulsory trade in October 2004. The trade will be fully
in place by June 2008. After June 2008, in order to work as a Motorhand, Derrickhand or Driller in Alberta, an
individual must be either a certified journeyman or a registered apprentice.
For several years prior, the drilling industry worked with Alberta Learning to explore the possibility of designating
drilling occupations as trades in Alberta. These discussions led to the formation of an industry committee of
employers (company management), and employees (drillers/rig managers). This committee will oversee the trade
and approve any modifications to the program for as long as the trade exists.
The specifics of the trade (ie. the course outline, the record book and the exams) have been developed and approved
by drillers and rig managers working in the field today.
The drilling industry believes establishing trades training will bring the following benefits to drilling rig
occupations:
• establish a career path and formalize a training program for motorhands, derrickhands and drillers;
• communicate to the public that rig employees are trained, knowledgeable tradespeople; and
• make the job site a safer place.
PROGRAM IMPLEMENTATION
How and When do Apprentices Register?

Beginning on June 1, 2005 anyone working as a motorhand, or beginning to train as a motorhand, can register as Rig
Technician Apprentices with Alberta Industry and Training. They will need to contact their employer to register.
Upon registration, they will receive an apprentice record book to keep track of their on-the-job training hours and
job skill development.
Timeline for Trades Training Implementation

A 3-year transition period to launch the program begins in June of 2005. Please note the following key dates:
June 1, 2005 Registration of all potential Level I (Motorhand) Apprentices begins
June 15, 2005 Level 1 (Motorhand) Prior Learning Assessment and Qualification Exams available
January 2006 Level 2 & 3 (Derrickhand & Driller) PLA & Qualification Exams available
March 2006 Level 1 (Motorhand) technical training available
June 2006 All working Motorhands are registered apprentices or in process of writing qualification
exam
July 2006 Level 2 (Derrickhand) technical training available
June 2007 All working Derrickhands are registered apprentices or in process of writing qualification
exam
July 2007 Level 3 (Driller) technical training available
June 2008 All Motorhands, Derrickhands and Drillers are registered apprentices or certified
journeymen
PROGRAM OPTIONS
Because the trade is compulsory, by 2008, the current workforce needs either
1. to register as apprentices (by writing a Prior Learning Assessment); or
2. to qualify as journeymen (by writing a Qualification Exam).
Individuals who are registering for the program take a Prior Learning Assessment to place them at the appropriate
level of training. They then begin accumulating on-the-job training hours and can register for the technical training
when it becomes available.
Individuals who do not wish to register as apprentices can apply to write a Qualification Exam to receive a
journeyman certificate at Level 1, Level 2 or Level 3. If they receive a journeyman certificate at Level 1 or Level 2
and do not apprentice at the next level, they cannot advance on the rig crew.
How do Qualification Exams Work?

If they pass the Qualification Exam they qualify as a certified Rig Technician and do not have to attend technical
training. But, if they qualify at Levels 1 or 2, they are limited in the positions they can work on the rig crew.
- If an individual passes the level 1 qualification exam, he is a journeyman Rig Technician Level 1 and is
certified to work only at the Motorhand position.
- If an individual passes the level 2 qualification exam, he is a journeyman Rig Technician Level 2 and is
certified to work at the Motorhand or Derrickhand positions.
- If an individual passes the level 3 qualification exam, he is a journeyman Rig Technician Level 3 and has
the equivalent of an apprentice who has completed the program.
Employees must have a minimum of experience to write the Qualification Exams.
To write Level 1 Qual., the employee must have 2250 hours rig work, 1000 of these hours working as a motorhand.
To write Level 2 Qual., the employee must have 4500 hours rig work, 1000 of these hours working as a derrickhand.
To write Level 3 Qual., the employee must have 6750 hours rig work, 1000 of these hours working as a driller.
Only hours worked as a motorhand, derrickhand or driller can count toward rig work hours.
How will apprenticeship training impact the way the rigs are crewed?
The Provincial Apprenticeship Committee structured the program so that apprenticeship training would have
minimal impact on how the rig is crewed. Some features of the trade that exemplify the flexibility of this program
with regards to crewing the rig are as follows:
1. A registered apprentice can work at any rig crew position as long as he is adequately supervised. So if, for
example, an apprentice completes the on-the-job training and technical training for Rig Technician Level 1
and is beginning his on-the-job training for Rig Technician Level 2, he may work as derrickhand or as a
motorhand, as per the discretion of the employer and the needs of the rig crew.
2. Because the rig crew is team-based and more senior positions supervise the junior positions, journeyman
supervision is not a requirement for ‘adequate supervision.’ In fact, apprentices at all levels of the Rig
Technician program are expected, as part of the competencies in the record book, to develop their
supervision skills during on-the-job training.
3. For a floorhand to enter the program and therefore be able to move up in the rig crew, the employer and
employee need only to register the employee as an apprentice with Alberta Advanced Education. After
registration, the employee can begin training in the next position and start logging on-the-job training
hours.
FURTHER QUESTIONS?
Please contact Cindy Soderstrom, Research Coordinator, Apprenticeship, or Nancy Malone, Manager, Economic
Analysis, at the CAODC, 403 264-4311 or Toll Free 1-888-266-4311.
More information about the Rig Technician Program can be found at www.caodc.ca.
More information about trade certification and programs, as well as links to registration forms, is available at the
Alberta Industry and Training website: www.tradescrets.org.
July 2005
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 COURSE INFORMATION

COURSE OUTLINE.................................................................................................. 1-1
COURSE TOPICS ..................................................................................................... 1-2
SLSWC CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS ...................................................... 1-7
EXAM GUIDELINES ............................................................................................... 1-9
SECOND LINE SUPERVISOR’S WELL CONTROL COURSE – Who’s Really
Running the Show?
CHAPTER 2 ACRONYMS AND LIST OF FORMULAS

ACRONYMS ............................................................................................................. 2-1
LIST OF FORMULAS .............................................................................................. 2-2
GAS EXPANSION FORMULA ............................................................................... 2-2
WELL CONTROL CALCULATIONS ..................................................................... 2-3
CONCURRENT METHOD ...................................................................................... 2-3
VOLUMETRIC METHOD ....................................................................................... 2-4
LEAK-OFF CALCULATIONS................................................................................. 2-4
FLUID LEVEL DROP WHILE PULLING DRY AND WET PIPE ........................ 2-4
PILL PUMPING CALCULATION........................................................................... 2-5
ACCUMULATOR CALCULATIONS ..................................................................... 2-5
SIZING FOR BACKUP NITROGEN SUPPLY ....................................................... 2-6
PUMP PRESSURES.................................................................................................. 2-7
KICK GRADIENT .................................................................................................... 2-7
STRIPPING AND SNUBBING CALCULATIONS................................................. 2-8
CHAPTER 3 PRESSURES
OUTCOME................................................................................................................ 3-1
OBJECTIVES ............................................................................................................ 3-1
OBJECTIVE ONE ..................................................................................................... 3-1
INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................... 3-1
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE (HP).......................................................................... 3-2
FORMATION PRESSURE (FP)............................................................................... 3-4
OBJECTIVE TWO .................................................................................................... 3-5
OBJECTIVE THREE ................................................................................................ 3-7
CIRCULATING PRESSURE LOSSES .................................................................... 3-7
REDUCED SPEED PUMP PRESSURE (RSPP)...................................................... 3-8
TRIPPING.................................................................................................................. 3-9
SWAB PRESSURE ................................................................................................... 3-9
i
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SURGE PRESSURE................................................................................................ 3-10

EFFECTIVE BOTTOM HOLE PRESSURE .......................................................... 3-11
APPLICATION OF PRESSURES .......................................................................... 3-11
OBJECTIVE FOUR................................................................................................. 3-14
SECONDARY PRESSURES .................................................................................. 3-14
GAS EXPANSION .................................................................................................. 3-15
OBJECTIVE FIVE .................................................................................................. 3-17
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CASING PRESSURE (MACP) ............................... 3-17
OBJECTIVE SIX..................................................................................................... 3-23
ACCUMULATOR SIZING..................................................................................... 3-23
OBJECTIVE SEVEN .............................................................................................. 3-31
CHAPTER 3 — EXERCISE ................................................................................... 3-35
CHAPTER 4 METHODS OF WELL CONTROL

OUTCOME................................................................................................................ 4-1
OBJECTIVES ............................................................................................................ 4-1
OBJECTIVE ONE ..................................................................................................... 4-1
INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................... 4-1
OBJECTIVE TWO .................................................................................................... 4-4
DRILLER’S METHOD ............................................................................................. 4-4
OBJECTIVE THREE .............................................................................................. 4-10
CONCURRENT METHOD .................................................................................... 4-14
LOW CHOKE METHOD ....................................................................................... 4-24
CIRCULATE AND WEIGHT METHOD............................................................... 4-27
MODIFIED LOW CHOKE METHOD ................................................................... 4-29
VOLUMETRIC METHOD ..................................................................................... 4-31
WAIT AND WEIGHT METHOD........................................................................... 4-40
OBJECTIVE FOUR................................................................................................. 4-46
EXCEEDING MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CASING PRESSURE (MACP) ....... 4-46
WELL CONTROL PLANNING CHECKLIST ...................................................... 4-48
OBJECTIVE FIVE .................................................................................................. 4-52
WELL CONTROL SELECTION............................................................................ 4-52
OBJECTIVE SIX..................................................................................................... 4-70
TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN USING THE DRILLER’S METHOD ................ 4-70
ii
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 5 UNUSUAL WELL CONTROL OPERATIONS

OUTCOME................................................................................................................ 5-1
OBJECTIVES ............................................................................................................ 5-1
OBJECTIVE ONE ..................................................................................................... 5-1
INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................... 5-1
OBJECTIVE TWO .................................................................................................... 5-6
EQUIPMENT CONSIDERATIONS......................................................................... 5-6
OBJECTIVE THREE ................................................................................................ 5-8
LOST CIRCULATION ............................................................................................. 5-8
BARITE PLUG........................................................................................................ 5-11
GUNK PLUGS ........................................................................................................ 5-13
OBJECTIVE FOUR................................................................................................. 5-15
LOCATING LOST CIRCULATION ZONE .......................................................... 5-15
OBJECTIVE FIVE .................................................................................................. 5-17
PLUGGED DRILL PIPE OR BIT ........................................................................... 5-17
HOLE IN DRILL STRING ..................................................................................... 5-18
STRIPPING & SNUBBING.................................................................................... 5-19
PUMP DOWN FOR REPAIRS ............................................................................... 5-28
DIVERTER SYSTEM ............................................................................................. 5-32
ROTATING HEAD ................................................................................................. 5-33
SHALLOW GAS FORMATIONS .......................................................................... 5-34
OBJECTIVE SIX..................................................................................................... 5-35
WELL CONTROL WHILE RUNNING CASING OR A LINER .......................... 5-35
WELL CONTROL DURING CEMENTING OPERATIONS ............................... 5-36
KICK BEHAVIOUR IN VARIOUS MUDS........................................................... 5-37
CHAPTER 6 UNDERBALANCED AND LATERAL DRILLING

OUTCOME................................................................................................................ 6-1
OBJECTIVES ............................................................................................................ 6-1
OBJECTIVE ONE ..................................................................................................... 6-1
INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................... 6-1
THEORY OF UNDERBALANCED DRILLING..................................................... 6-3
EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................ 6-4
OBJECTIVE TWO .................................................................................................. 6-10
WELL CONTROL................................................................................................... 6-10
TRIPPING PROCEDURES..................................................................................... 6-11
iii
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
OBJECTIVE THREE .............................................................................................. 6-12

LATERAL DRILLING WELL CONTROL ........................................................... 6-12
COILED TUBING OVERBALANCED DRILLING ............................................. 6-18
CHAPTER 7 CRITICAL SOUR WELLS

OUTCOME................................................................................................................ 7-1
OBJECTIVES ............................................................................................................ 7-1
OBJECTIVE ONE ..................................................................................................... 7-1
INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................... 7-1
OBJECTIVE TWO .................................................................................................... 7-3
EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................ 7-3
OBJECTIVE THREE .............................................................................................. 7-16
SUPERVISION AND TRAINING.......................................................................... 7-16
WELL CONTROL................................................................................................... 7-16
CHAPTER 8 TABLES
DRILL PIPE CAPACITIES AND DISPLACEMENTS ........................................... 8-1
HEAVI-WATE (DRILCO)........................................................................................ 8-1
DRILL COLLAR CAPACITIES AND DISPLACEMENTS ................................... 8-2
ANNULAR VOLUME DRILL PIPE AND OPEN HOLE (m3/m)........................... 8-4
ANNULAR VOLUME AND HEIGHT BETWEEN DRILL COLLARS
AND OPEN HOLE.................................................................................................... 8-5
ANNULAR VOLUME DRILL PIPE AND CASING (m3/m) (SI)......................... 8-14
HOLE CAPACITY .................................................................................................. 8-16
DIMENSIONS AND BURST PRESSURES OF CASING (kPa)........................... 8-22
ACCUMULATOR SIZES IN LITRES ................................................................... 8-24
VOLUME CONVERSIONS ................................................................................... 8-25
RAM TYPE BLOWOUT PREVENTERS ........................................................... 8-26
Hydril Company................................................................................................. 8-26
Cameron Iron Works........................................................................................ 8-27
NL Shaffer.......................................................................................................... 8-30
ANNULAR PREVENTERS.................................................................................... 8-31
Hydril Company................................................................................................. 8-31
Cameron Iron Works.......................................................................................... 8-32
NL Shaffer.......................................................................................................... 8-32
HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED VALVES......................................................... 8-33
iv
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Rockwell Manufacturing Co. (McEvoy)............................................................ 8-33

NL Shaffer.......................................................................................................... 8-34
DOUBLE ACTING DUPLEX MUD PUMP CAPACITIES PER CYCLE............ 8-35
TRIPLEX SINGLE ACTING MUD PUMP CAPACITIES PER CYCLE ............. 8-36
CHAPTER 9 CASE STUDIES

CASE STUDY 1 ........................................................................................................ 9-1
CASE STUDY 2 ........................................................................................................ 9-2
CASE STUDY 3 ........................................................................................................ 9-3
CASE STUDY 4 ........................................................................................................ 9-4
CASE STUDY 5 ........................................................................................................ 9-5
CASE STUDY 6 ........................................................................................................ 9-6
CASE STUDY 7 ........................................................................................................ 9-7
CASE STUDY 8 ...................................................................................................... 9-11
APPENDIX I CRITICAL SOUR WELLS

DEFINITIONS............................................................................................................ I-1
MANAGEMENT’S RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................................ I-2
APPENDIX II GAUGES AND SENDING UNITS

INTRODUCTION .....................................................................................................II-1
APPENDIX III LEAK-OFF TESTS

THEORY OF LEAK-OFF TESTS .......................................................................... III-1
TEST PROCEDURES ............................................................................................. III-1
TEST RESULTS...................................................................................................... III-2
LEAK-OFF TEST RESULTS ................................................................................. III-4
PRESSURE INTEGRITY TESTS (PIT) ................................................................. III-7
LEAK OFF TESTS................................................................................................ III-15
APPENDIX IV CAUSES OF KICKS AND SHUT-IN PROCEDURES

CAUSES OF KICKS ............................................................................................... IV-1
WARNING SIGNS OF KICKS............................................................................... IV-1
FLOWCHECK PROCEDURES.............................................................................. IV-2
PILL PUMPING PROCEDURES ........................................................................... IV-4
SHUT-IN PROCEDURES (Soft) ............................................................................ IV-7
v
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SHUT-IN PROCEDURES (Hard) ........................................................................... IV-8

TIMES TO CHECK FOR FLOW............................................................................ IV-8
COILED TUBING PROCEDURES...................................................................... IV-10
DIVERTER SYSTEM PROCEDURES ................................................................ IV-16
TOP DRIVE CONSIDERATIONS ....................................................................... IV-17
CREW TRAINING ASSESSMENT ..................................................................... IV-18
CONDUCTING THE INSPECTION .................................................................... IV-20
APPENDIX V
STANDARDS FOR WELLSITE SUPERVISION OF DRILLING, COMPLETION
AND WORKOVERS – IRP Vol. 7 - 2002
APPENDIX VI
EXERCISE KEYS
APPENDIX VII
RESOURCES – Regulatory Agencies Web Sites
vi
CHAPTER 1
COURSE INFORMATION
Chapter 1: Course Information
COURSE INFORMATION
COURSE OUTLINE
Prerequisite Skills
Candidates for this course are expected to possess the following:
¾ a current First Line Blowout Prevention Certificate or Second Line Well Control
Certificate or an accepted out-of-country Well Control Certificate (see page 1-7)
¾ knowledge of drilling and well control equipment
¾ knowledge of drilling operations
¾ knowledge of crew members duties, kick warning signs and shut-in procedures
¾ basic arithmetic skills (able to calculate longhand and use calculator)
¾ basic reading and writing skills
Goal
To be able to identify the concepts of well shut-in, well stabilization, and apply the concepts
of the first step of the Driller’s Method on the test well.
1-1 October 2006

COURSE TOPICS
Day One (Core Topics)
Pressures
¾ Circulation Pressure Losses
¾ Reduced-Speed Pump Pressure

¾ Swab Pressure
¾ Surge Pressure
¾ Effective Bottom-Hole Pressure
¾ Application of Pressures
¾ Secondary Pressures
¾ Gas Expansion
¾ Maximum Allowable Casing Pressure (MACP)/Leak-Off
¾ Kill Sheet
1-2 October 2006

Day Two (Core Topics)
Homework Review
Methods of Well Control
¾ Driller’s Method
¾ Low Choke Method
¾ Troubleshooting
¾ Exceeding Maximum Allowable Casing Pressure
¾ Positions/Responsibilities During Kick
¾ Well Control Selection
1-3 October 2006

Day Three (Core Topics - A.M.)
Homework Review
Methods of Well Control
¾ Concurrent Method
¾ Circulate and Weight Method
¾ Wait and Weight Method
¾ Volumetric Method
¾ Accumulator Sizing
Unusual Well Control Operations
¾ Introduction
¾ Equipment Consideration
¾ Lost Circulation
¾ Barite Plugs
¾ Gunk Plugs
¾ Locating Lost Circulation Zone
¾ Plugged Drill Pipe
¾ Hole in Drill String
¾ Stripping/Snubbing and Stripping Guidelines
¾ Pump Down for Repairs
¾ Use of a Diverter or Rotating Head
¾ Shallow Gas Formations
¾ Well Control While Running Casing
¾ Well Control During Cementing Operations
¾ Kick Behaviour in Various Muds
1-4 October 2006

Day Three (Optional Topics - P.M.)
¾ Underbalanced and Lateral Drilling

• Theory of Underbalanced Drilling
• Lateral Drilling Well Control
• Equipment
• Well Kill Procedures
• Tripping Procedures
¾ Critical Sour Wells

• Introduction
• Equipment
• Supervision and Training
• Well Control
¾ Case Studies
1-5 October 2006

Days Four & Five
Test Well or Exam
KICK #1 Demonstration kick, 1-2.5 m3, no problems

KICK #2 1-2.5 m3, only one - two problems during the circulation
Problems
Plugged Choke Lost Circulation

Washed out Choke Gauge Failure
Plugged Nozzle Pump Failure
Washed out Nozzle Option - Modified Low Choke
Bridging Option - Volumetric Bleed
Note: Each kick should take approximately one and a half to two hours to complete.
Students will rotate crew positions to cover as many well control problem situations
as possible within each group exercise.
Procedure
Injection 20 minutes
Stabilization 10 - 20 minutes
Circulating 40 - 60 minutes
Kick Review 20 - 30 minutes
90 - 130 minutes
1-6 October 2006

SECOND LINE SUPERVISOR’S WELL CONTROL CERTIFICATION

REQUIREMENTS
1. Second Line Supervisor’s Well Control (Test Well)
Duration Five Days
Repeat of Classroom 3/5 of course fee
Repeat of Test Well 2/5 of course fee
Validity Two Years
Initial certification and recertification must be on the test wells since Enform no longer
uses a well control simulator.
Prerequisites
Test Well (one of the following)
¾ valid FLSBOP
¾ valid SLSWC
¾ valid MMS (WellCAP)
¾ valid UK
¾ valid ODCAA
¾ valid IWCF
2. Second Line Supervisor’s Well Control (Refresher)

Duration Three Days
Validity Two Years
Prerequisites
Valid SLSWC (Test Well) and a minimum of 85% on previous written exam.
For recertification, a student possessing the above prerequisites may take the three-day
refresher course instead of the five-day SLSWC course. The course will consist of one day
class, one and a half on the test well, and one half day for the written exam. This is an
accelerated program, covering the same material as the five-day course but has additional test
well time. The certificate issued will be the same as the SLSWC.
1-7 October 2006

Note:
1. Full attendance in both the classroom and test well simulations is mandatory.
2. If the student achieves a grade of 60 to 69% on the exam, the exam must be re-written.
The passing grade is 70%.
3. If the student achieves a grade of below 60% on the exam, the classroom portion and
exam must be repeated.
4. If the student does not successfully complete the test well exercise, the hands-on
section must be repeated.
1-8 October 2006

EXAM GUIDELINES
First Line Supervisor’s Blowout Prevention (FLSBOP)

&
Second Line Supervisor’s Well Control (SLSWC)
¾ Students caught cheating (i.e., talking, copying, using extra notes, etc.) on the FLSBOP
Exam will receive a mark of zero and must retake the 4-day classroom course and pay
the fees in full.
¾ Students caught cheating (i.e., talking, copying, using extra notes, etc.) on the SLSWC
or Refresher Exam will receive a mark of zero and must take the 5-day course and pay
the fees in full.
¾ Enform will provide calculators for exams and all student materials must be left outside
the exam room.
Revised:
05/98
1-9 October 2006

Second Line Supervisors Well Control Course
- Who’s REALLY Running the Show?
The question is often posed, “Who is Enform to be telling the petroleum industry what well control training it
needs?” The answer is, “We don’t.” It’s the industry! Enform is a non-profit organization that is owned and
directed by the Upstream Petroleum Industry. All revenues are re-invested to provide quality services including
training programs, course development and world-class facilities.
Committee Formation
All Enform courses are initiated by a written request from one or more of the six industry trade associations (CAGC,
CAODC, CAPP, CEPA, PSAC and SEPAC). These initiatives are then steered by a Committee composed of
representatives, selected by the sponsoring association(s). In addition, the participation of pertinent government
or regulatory agencies is often requested by the industry. An Enform representative serves as a non-voting
secretary to the Committee. The Committee, and Enform, have an established mandate, structure and
responsibilities, as outlined below:
Committee Mandate
Industry and government cooperation provide accepted standards for well control training for Canadian drilling
operations. This cooperative endeavour establishes and maintains a Canadian Certification Standard recognized by
industry and governments to ensure that qualified personnel are available for well control operations.
Committee Structure
Each committee member (or designate) reports back to their respective association [i.e., Canadian Association of
Petroleum Producers (CAPP), Canadian Association of Oilwell Drilling Contractors (CAODC), Petroleum Services
Association of Canada (PSAC), Small Explorers and Producers Association of Canada (SEPAC), Alberta Energy and
Utilities Board (AEUB), National Energy Board (NEB), British Columbia Oil and Gas Commission (OGC),
Saskatchewan Industry and Resources (SIR), and Manitoba Energy, Mines and Resources (EMR)]. Each
representative has the responsibility to bring recommendations from their respective association to the Committee.
Responsibilities
The Committee is responsible for:
Identifying well control training needs, considering current and emerging technologies, and the specific
needs of the industry
Establishing minimum standards for course content, manuals and examinations
Establishing minimum standards for student evaluation and certification
Establishing minimum standards for instructor pre-requisites and certification
Establishing minimum standards for instructor training and auditing
Enform, utilizing the objectives and standards established by the Committee, is responsible for:
Developing the instructional design, course materials and examinations
Developing and implementing student evaluation systems
Developing instructor training and auditing processes
Providing instructor support and quality assurance
Sub-Committees may be formed to deal with course revisions, program standards or other issues, as deemed
necessary by the Committee.
Want to have a say? We welcome it! You can contact your industry association directly, and they will forward
comments through the association member. Alternatively provide your comments on the student evaluation form.
October 2006
CHAPTER 2
ACRONYMS AND
LIST OF FORMULAS
Chapter 2: Acronyms and List of Formulas
ACRONYMS AND LIST OF FORMULAS
ACRONYMS
Ann. Cap. = Annular Capacity
APL = Annular Pressure Loss
CP = Casing Pressure
CSG = Casing
DC = Drill Collar
DP = Drill Pipe
DPP = Drill Pipe Pressure
ESD = Emergency Shut Down
EBHP = Effective Bottom Hole Pressure
ECD = Equivalent Circulating Density
EMD = Equivalent Mud Density
FCP = Final Circulating Pressure
FP = Formation Pressure
HP = Hydrostatic Pressure
HCR = Hydraulic Control Remote Operated Valve (also known as HCV, ESD)
HCV = Hydraulic Control Remote Operated Valve (also known as HCR, ESD)
KMD = Kill Mud Density
kPa = Kilopascal
ICP = Initial Circulating Pressure
LOP = Leak Off Pressure
MD = Measured Depth
MPa = Megapascal
MR = Mixing Rate
MACP = Maximum Allowable Casing Pressure
MDI = Mud Density Increase
OMD = Original Mud Density
PO = Pump Output
PVT = Pit Volume Totalizer
RSPP = Reduced Speed Pump Pressure
SAPP = Sodium Acid Pyrophosphate (thinner/dispersant)
SICP = Shut-In Casing Pressure
SIDPP = Shut-In Drill Pipe Pressure
SPM = Strokes Per Minute
STKS = Strokes
TVD = True Vertical Depth
2-1 October 2006

LIST OF FORMULAS
Depth (m) = True Vertical Depth (TVD) (m)
HP (kPa) = Mud Density (kg/m3) × Depth (m) × 0.00981
or
= Gradient (kPa/m) × Depth (m)
Gradient (kPa/m) = Mud Density (kg/m3) × 0.00981
FP (kPa) = HP (kPa) + SIDPP (kPa)
Migration Rate (m/min) = Change in SICP Pressure (kPa) ÷ Mud Gradient (kPa/m) ÷ Time
Equivalent Circulating Density (kg/m3) = (APL (kPa) ÷ Depth (m) ÷ 0.00981) + Mud
Density (kg/m3)
Equivalent Mud Density (kg/m3) = Total Pressure (kPa) ÷ Depth (m) ÷ 0.00981
or
= BHP (kPa) ÷ Depth (m) ÷
0.00981
EBHP (kPa) (Trip Out) = HP (kPa) – Swab Pressure (kPa)
EBHP (kPa) (Trip In) = HP (kPa) + Surge Pressure (kPa)
GAS EXPANSION FORMULA

V1 × P1
V2 =
P2
where:
V1 = initial pit gain entering the wellbore (m3)
P1 = initial pressure acting on the influx (kPa) (Formation Pressure)
V2 = expanded volume of gas (m3)
P2 = pressure acting on the gas (kPa)
(a) HP above kick + CP (while circulating the kick)
(b) At the poor boy degasser = 100 kPa
2-2 October 2006

WELL CONTROL CALCULATIONS

Density Increase (kg/m3) = SIDPP (kPa) ÷ Depth(m) ÷ 0.00981
KMD (kg/m3) = Density Increase (kg/m3) + OMD (kg/m3)
4,250 × Density Increase (kg/m 3 )
Barite Required (kg/m3) =
4,250 − KMD (kg/m 3 )
or
2,760 × Density increase (kg/m3 )
Calcium Carbonate Required(kg/m3) =
2,760 - KMD (kg/m3 )
Total Barite Required (kg) = Barite Required (kg/m3) × Total Volume(m3)
or
Total Calcium Carbonate Required = Calcium Carbonate (kg/m3) × Total Volume(m3)
Number of Sacks of Barite = Total Barite Required (kg) ÷ 40 (kg/sack) or
Total Barite Required (kg) ÷ 25 kg/sack
or
Number of Sacks of Calcium Carbonate = Calcium Carbonate (kg/m3) ÷ 25 kg/sack
MR (sacks/min) = Number of sacks ÷ Reduced Circulating Time (mins.)
ICP (kPa) = RSPP (kPa) + SIDPP (kPa) + overkill (kPa)
⎡ RSPP (kPa) × KMD (kg/m 3 ) ⎤
FCP (kPa) = ⎢ ⎥ + overkill (kPa)
⎣ OMD (kg/m 3 ) ⎦
CONCURRENT METHOD
40 × Mix Rate × (4,250 - Original Denisty kg/m3 )
Density Increase (kg/m3) = or
(4,250 × PO m3 / min) + 40 × Mix Rate
25 × Mix Rate × (2,760 - OMD)
(2,760 × PO m3 /min) + 25 × Mix Rate
ICP (kPa) = RSPP (kPa) + SIDPP (kPa)
RSPP (kPa) × NMD (kg/m3 )
FCP (kPa) = + Remaining SIDPP (kPa)
OMD (kg/m3 )
Remaining SIDPP (kPa) = SIDPP (kPa) – (Density Increase (kg/m3) × depth (m) ×
0.00981)
(NMD is the New Mud Density)
2-3 October 2006

VOLUMETRIC METHOD
Pressure Increase (kPa) × Annular Capacity (m3 / m)
Volume to Bleed (m3) =
Mud Gradient (kPa/m)
Pressure Increase (kPa) = Increase in SICP (kPa)
LEAK-OFF CALCULATIONS
LOP (kPa) = Applied Surface Pressure (kPa) + HP at casing seat (kPa)
Leak-off Gradient (kPa/m) = LOP (kPa) ÷ Depth of casing (m)
Equivalent Mud Density (kg/m3) = Leak-off Gradient (kPa/m) ÷ 0.00981
MACP with increased mud density (kPa) = LOP at shoe (kPa) - New HP at casing shoe (kPa)
FLUID LEVEL DROP WHILE PULLING DRY AND WET PIPE

Pulling Dry Pipe (m) Length of pipe (m) × Displacement (m 3 / m)
=
Drop in fluid level Annular Capacity (m 3 /m) + Pipe Capacity (m 3 / m)
Pulling Wet Pipe (m) Length of pipe (m) × Wet Displacement (m 3 / m)

=
Drop in fluid level Annular Capacity (m 3 /m)
Wet Displacement (m3/m) = Displacement of Pipe (m3/m) + Capacity of Pipe (m3/m)

Loss of HP = Drop in level (m) × Density (kg/m3) × 0.00981
2-4 October 2006

PILL PUMPING CALCULATION

Length of Pill (m) = Pill Volume (m3 ) ÷ Drill Pipe Capacity (m3 / m)
Differential Pressure (kPa) = Length of Pill (m) × [ Pill Gradient (kPa/m) - Mud Gradient (kPa/m) ]
Pipe Empty (m) = Differential Pressure (kPa) ÷ Mud Gradient (kPa/m)

(after pill settles)
Recovery (m3) = Pipe Empty (m) × Drill Pipe Capacity (m3 /m)
or
⎡ Pill Density (kg/m3 ) ⎤

Recovery (m ) 3
= Volume of Pill (m ) × ⎢
3
3
- 1⎥
⎣ Mud Density (kg/m ) ⎦
ACCUMULATOR CALCULATIONS
1. Total Fluid Required (L)
= Litres to Close Annular Preventer + Litres to Close Pipe Ram Preventers + Litres
to Open Hydraulic Valve
Critical Sour
= Close Annular and open HCR and close, open, close one ram and shear pipe
2. Fluid Required (L) with 50% Safety Margin
= Total Fluid Required × 1.5
This value is to be used in Formula #3
Note: Safety Margin only used with Manufacturers’ specifications, not with EUB
calculations.
3. Accumulator Size (L)
⎡ Remaining Pressure (kPa) × Fluid Required (L) ⎤ ⎡ Pressure on Accumulator (kPa) ⎤

=⎢ ⎥ × ⎢ ⎥
⎣ Pressure on Accumulator (kPa) - Remaining Pressure (kPa) ⎦ ⎣ Precharge Pressure (kPa) ⎦
4. Bottles Required
Accumulator Size in Litres

=
Bottle Size
2-5 October 2006

NITROGEN BACKUP CALCULATIONS
1. Nitrogen Bottles Required = Total Fluid Required ÷ Usable Litres of Nitrogen
SIZING FOR BACKUP NITROGEN SUPPLY
Example Nitrogen Calculation:
Rig has two 42 litre nitrogen bottles available:

• Bottle 1@ 17.5 MPa
• Bottle 2 @ 14.0 MPa
17.5 MPa + 14.0 MPa
Average bottle pressure = 15.75 MPa
2 bottles
Refer to Figure 3-4
TOTAL USABLE FLUID = 2 × 36.0 litres 72.0 litres
Rig has 21 MPa BOP stack — components to be considered:
• 254 mm Hydril GK-900 Annular BOP - closing volume required 28.1 litres
• 254 mm Hydril MPL Pipe Rams* - closing volume required 12.5 litres
• 101.6 mm Cameron HCR Hydraulic Valve - opening volume required 2.3 litres
TOTAL CLOSING / OPENING VOLUME REQUIRED 42.9 litres
Nitrogen volume is acceptable since 72.0 litres available but only 42.9 litres are required for
active BOP components.
* If two sets of pipe rams are required or in use, the closing volume for each set must be
included in the calculations.
Note: See Page 8.24 and 8.25 for Accumulator bottle volumes
2-6 October 2006

PUMP PRESSURES
2
⎛ SPM 2 ⎞
P2 = P1 × ⎜ ⎟
⎝ SPM1 ⎠
P2 = new pump pressure (kPa)
P1 = original pump pressure (kPa)
SPM2 = increased pump speed (strokes/min)
SPM1 = original pump speed (strokes/min)
2
⎛Q ⎞
P2 = P1 × ⎜ 2 ⎟
⎝ Q1 ⎠
P2 = new pump pressure (kPa)

P1 = original pump pressure (kPa)
Q2 = increased flow rate (m3/m)
Q1 = original flow rate (m3/m)
Kick Gradient
Pit Gain (m3 )
Length of Kick (m) =
Annular Volume (m3 /m)
Appropriate drill string component (drill collars, HWDP or drill pipe)
⎡ SICP (kPa) - SIDPP (kPa) ⎤

Gradient of Kick (kPa/m) = Gradient of Mud (kPa/m) - ⎢ ⎥
⎣ Length of Kick (m) ⎦
Gas Gradient 1.35 kPa/m - 2.70 kPa/m

Oil Gradient 5.80 kPa/m - 8.15 kPa/m
Water Gradient 9.80 kPa/m - 11.5 kPa/m
2-7 October 2006

STRIPPING AND SNUBBING CALCULATIONS

1. 1,000 mm = 1 metre
2. Area (m2) = 0.785 × Tool Joint Diameter × Tool Joint Diameter
where: Tool Joint Diameter = metres
0.785 = constant
3. Wellbore Force (daN) = Pressure × Area × 100

where: Pressure = SICP (kPa)
Area = m2
100 = constant
4. Total Force Acting on String (daN) = Friction Force in BOP + Wellbore Force
5. Length of Pipe to Snub (m) = Total force (daN) ÷ Mass (kg/m) ÷ 0.981
2-8 October 2006

CHAPTER 3
PRESSURES
Chapter 3: Pressures
PRESSURES
OUTCOME
Control down hole pressures using primary and secondary methods of well control.
OBJECTIVES
At the end of this chapter, students will be able to:
1. Explain primary pressures associated with drilling operations.
2. Apply the formula and associated variables to calculate the primary pressures
associated with drilling operations.
3. Explain secondary pressures associated with drilling operations.
4. Apply the formula and associated variables to calculate secondary pressures
associated with drilling operations.
5. Explain how factors affect maximum allowable casing pressure.
6. Explain accumulator design, sizing and the applicable regulatory requirements.
7. Perform the calculations for the minimum accumulator size requirements for a
specified BOP stack.
OBJECTIVE ONE
Explain primary pressures associated with drilling operations.
INTRODUCTION
Drilling requires the cooperation of numerous companies sharing one goal - the drilling of a
well in a safe and efficient manner. It is in the interest of all parties involved to acknowledge
potential well control problems and institute the appropriate measures in accordance with
good oilfield practices to prevent well control operational problems. The commitment to
safety begins with the planning of the well and should be maintained with the same intensity
throughout the drilling operation. The basic rule of well control is to keep bottom hole
pressure above formation pressure to avoid kicks (or secondary kicks).
3-1 October 2006

HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE (HP)
Hydrostatic pressure is the pressure exerted solely by the column of drilling fluid in a static
column. Two variables that directly influence the magnitude of the pressure are density and
depth — depth being true vertical depth and not measured depth. The formula is expressed
as follows:
HP (kPa) = Depth (m) × Density (kg/m3) × 0.00981
Example
Depth = 3250 m
Mud Density = 1280 kg/m3
HP = 3250 m × 1280 kg/m3 × 0.00981
HP = 40,810 kPa
If the measured depth was 3250 m but the TVD was 3120 m, then HP would be
calculated as follows:
HP = 3120 m × 1280 kg/m3 × 0.00981

HP = 39,177 kPa
HP alone is a single concept, but it is directly influenced by the actual drilling operation. The
drilled cuttings being circulated can increase the annular mud density 20 to 30 kg/m3 above
suction density. This variable by itself introduces the following considerations:
1. The increased hydrostatic pressure in the annulus could be the controlling factor of
formation pressure. If a slow drilling interval is penetrated and the annular mud
density lowered, the influx could be considerably off bottom before it is detected. It
should also be considered that the kicking zone may not be on bottom, unlike usually
assumed.
2. The fact that two hydrostatic pressures exist within the same wellbore should not
influence the magnitude and validity of the shut-in drill pipe pressure when the drill
string is affixed with a ported float or no float.
3. A large percentage of all kicks are between 20 and 30 kg/m3, an equivalent density
increase, which is present in the annulus but not in, the drill string.
3-2 October 2006

Example
Total Depth = 1800 m
Mud Density at Suction = 1100 kg/m3
Annulus Mud Density = 1130 kg/m3
FP = 19,600 kPa
HP Inside Drill String
= Mud Density × Depth × 0.00981
= 1100 kg/m3 × 1800 m × 0.00981 = 19,424 kPa
HP Inside Annulus
= Mud Density × Depth × 0.00981
= 1130 kg/m3 × 1800m × 0.00981 = 19,954 kPa
Hydrostatic Pressure inside Drill String 19,424 kPa

Hydrostatic Pressure inside Annulus 19,954 kPa
Formation Pressure (Given Pressure) 19,600 kPa
During a slow drilling period, the well would begin to feed in as the annular mud density is
reduced.
3-3 October 2006

FORMATION PRESSURE (FP)
Formation pressure is defined as the pressure of a fluid within the pore spaces of the
formation rock. The deeper the formation, the greater the pressure that will normally be
associated with it. In addition to the depth of the formation, this pressure is caused by the
density of the fluid in the underground permeable rocks and is generally influenced by the
porosity and permeability of the rock. Porosity is the amount of space within the rock that
contains fluids, and the permeability is the extent to which fluid movement occurs.
The variables in conjunction with the formation type, sandstone, shale, etc. will influence the
size of the influx, but in general, will not require special consideration when selecting the
method of well control. As in any general rule, there are exceptions.
Waterfloods
With the emphasis on secondary recovery, formation pressures are continually increasing.
Penetration of a waterflood zone can present influxes of salt water and gas. In a well control
operation, one must direct additional concerns towards the mud contamination that results
and the ever-present danger of hydrogen sulphide. Other concerns are the increased amounts
of carbon dioxide and their effects upon surface equipment. One must exercise caution in
other areas of pressure support such as steam flooding, miscible flood, gas flood, fire flood,
etc.
High Pressure — Low Volume Reservoirs
These zones are as common in shallow drilling as in foothills drilling. Shallow wells
penetrating the Belly River and Milk River zones are frequently found to initiate well control
operations. The variables of porosity and permeability influence the warning signs and the
circulation of the hydrocarbon influx. In general, the zones exhibit small amounts of gas
associated with high surface pressures. The volume of gas is sufficient to cause serious well
control problems but may not be producible over an extended time period.
When foothills wells penetrate a fracture, they may be forced to circulate similar influxes.
As the zones are often penetrated at deeper depths, the amount of gas corresponds to a larger
volume at surface.
3-4 October 2006

OBJECTIVE TWO
Apply the formula and associated variables to calculate the primary pressures associated
with drilling operations.
FP is calculated as the total sum of HP and the SIDPP.
FP (kPa) = HP (kPa) + SIDPP (kPa)
The validity of the SIDPP should be verified prior to the completion of any calculations. The
essential components of any SIDPP used to calculate formation pressure require the
following conditions:
• The drill string must be on bottom.

• The drill string must be full.
• The drill string must be full of a known density fluid.
If all three of the above criteria are not present, the inaccurate value of the shut-in drill pipe
pressure results in inaccurate calculations.
3-5 October 2006

Example
Depth = 1810 m
RECORDED PRESSURES
TIME SIDPP SICP
0420 SI SI
0421 400 1800
0422 600 2400
0423 700 2500
0424 500 2500
0425 400 2500
0426 400 2600
Problem
Upon shut-in, the SIDPP increased to 700 kPa and then decreased to 400 kPa, indicating a
downhole blowout. The supervisor must now consider the following:
1. The 700 kPa SIDPP value was more than one formation could withstand as
evidenced by the decreasing values of the next reading.
2. The reduction in SIDPP to 400 kPa indicates an underground flow may exist.
3-6 October 2006

OBJECTIVE THREE
Explain secondary pressures associated with drilling operations.
CIRCULATING PRESSURE LOSSES
In addition to HP, the Annular Pressure Loss (APL) incurred while circulating provides an
additional overbalance. APL is the friction that develops from the drilling fluid passing
between the drill string and the wellbore. It is referred to as a loss of pressure, or friction
pressure.
In terms of hydraulics: It is known as the partial dissipation of pressures throughout

the circulating system.
In a field application: It is an additional pressure exerted upon the formation.
The magnitude of the annular pressure loss is dependent upon the following variables:
• mud density
• viscosity and plastic viscosity
• gel strength
• yield point
• depth
• annular clearance
• rate of circulation
The Effective Bottom Hole Pressure (EBHP) exerted during the drilling operation is equal
to the sum of the hydrostatic pressure and the annular pressure loss.
In reference to density: Be aware that cuttings have an effect on density.
It is important to note the effects of an annular pressure loss are related more to deeper
drilling than to shallow operations. At shallow depths of 1000 to 1200 metres, with mud
densities currently used, the annular pressure loss may only be 100 to 200 kPa, which has a
negligible effect in these cases.
3-7 October 2006

REDUCED SPEED PUMP PRESSURE (RSPP)
Reduced Speed Pump Pressures (RSPP) are a basic element in any well control operation.
It is the minimum amount of pump pressure required to overcome the system pressure losses
in order to circulate at a reduced rate, usually at half normal operating speed.
Good drilling practices recommend that reduced speed pump pressure be taken and recorded
in the tour book at least once per tour, or more frequently if the drilling parameters change,
such as
• after every 150 metres of new hole,

• after a drill string change,
• after a nozzle size change.
The pressure recorded is influenced by the rheological properties of the drilling fluid as well
as the equipment’s physical dimensions. Conventional rigs select a reduced circulating rate
above the stall speed of the engine whereas electric rigs are capable of circulating at
extremely low pump speeds in an emergency.
Winter operations present problems associated with the pressure transmission throughout the
hydraulic lines in the hydraulic system and their response to different temperatures. It is not
uncommon to record a higher reduced speed pump pressure during mid-day than the pressure
during the evening, even with the same drilling parameters.
3-8 October 2006

TRIPPING
Over 80% of all kicks taken are during tripping operations, hence the need to keep accurate
trip sheets.
EUB Directive 036, Section 11.3.1

“... a 10-minute flow check shall be conducted and recorded in the drilling log book at the
following stages during trips:
(1) Trip-out
(a) After pulling the first 5 percent of the drill string (measured depth) from the
well.
(b) At the mid-point depth (measured depth) of the wellbore.
(c) Prior to pulling the last stand of drill pipe and the drill collars from the well;
and
(d) After all of the drill string is pulled out of the well.
(2) Trip-in
(a) After running in the drill collars and the first stand of drill pipe; and
(b) At approximately mid-point depth (measured depth) of the wellbore.
SWAB PRESSURE
The movement of the drill string when tripping out of the hole induces a pressure reduction
referred to as the “swab pressure”.
The effective bottom hole pressure during the trip out is equal to the hydrostatic pressure less
the “swab pressure”.
Factors affecting “swab pressures” are
• hoisting speed
• hole clearance (i.e. DST packers, core barrels)
• mud properties (viscosity, plastic viscosity, gel strength, yield point)
• balled-up bit
• nozzle sizes
3-9 October 2006

“Swab pressures” are transmitted throughout the wellbore regardless of the drill string’s
depth. Faster hoisting speeds with the drill collars inside the surface casing can induce kicks
that may have to be controlled with a partial string in the wellbore, or with the string
completely removed from the wellbore.
Personnel must be aware that the use of high mud densities and viscosities has the potential
to induce a kick during a trip. Verification of any potential circumstance resulting from
“swab pressure” can be confirmed during a dummy trip.
BHP (kPa) = HP (kPa) - Swab Pressure (kPa)
SURGE PRESSURE
“Pressure surges” are induced throughout the wellbore during the trip in. When estimated
values of surge and swab pressures accompany the drilling program the respective pressures
are often equal in magnitude.
In practice, the surge pressure is usually greater than the swab pressure due to the fact the
drill string is run in the hole faster than it was hoisted.
A problem associated with large surge pressures is the loss of circulation in the wellbore.
Lost circulation can develop as a result of the total of the hydrostatic and surge pressure
being in excess of what a weaker zone can withstand.
BHP (kPa) = HP (kPa) + Surge Pressure (kPa)
3-10 October 2006

EFFECTIVE BOTTOM HOLE PRESSURE
From the previous discussion, it is evident the pressure exerted on the bottom of the well is
dependent upon the hydrostatic pressure plus or minus the secondary pressure associated
with the operation in progress.
In areas where wellbore is a major concern it is normal to express the effects of pressures
associated with the operation in progress as an Equivalent Density.
The Equivalent Circulating Density (Dynamic) [ECD] or Equivalent Mud Density

(Static) [EMD] is the total pressure effect expressed as a density.
Equivalent mud densities usually consider annular pressures such as a Shut-In Casing
Pressure (SICP), whereas, the equivalent circulating density utilizes the annular pressure
loss inclusive of the mud density acting at the wellbore’s weakest point while circulating.
APPLICATION OF PRESSURES
The effects of the pressures previously discussed can often be present concurrently within
one wellbore, with the combined net effect requiring the implementation of well control
procedures.
A typical example is the Eaglesham area where the target zone is the Wabamun zone. This
zone is the producing zone, but is characterized by lost circulation and therefore requires
special attention. On trips out, the hole will often take the correct amount of fill-up to
compensate for the displacement of the drill string. Upon returning the new bit to bottom,
the hole has substantial fill and, at times, appears to be bridged. It is also common that upon
breaking circulation the well becomes pressured almost immediately.
The correct fill-up volume on the trip out can be attributed to the bridging of the Wabamun
zone. Swab pressures, which are kept to a minimum, are often sufficient to induce a bridge,
explaining the correct fill up volumes recorded on the trip out with a lost circulation zone
exposed.
3-11 October 2006

During the trip in, it has been noticed that a considerable difference in fluid levels exists
between the annulus and the drill string. The annulus fluid level remains close to surface and
the fluid level inside the drill string is very low until the pipe is filled, indicating the fluid
levels are not equalizing. An appropriate flow check time (with no float in the string) does
not equalize fluid levels. The difference in fluid levels often result from gasified mud
reducing the effective hydrostatic pressure in the annulus. Upon returning to bottom and
breaking circulation the expanding gas volumes necessitate the well to be shut-in almost
immediately.
3-12 October 2006

Example
Depth = 1925 m
APL = 300 kPa
Swab Pressure = 400 kPa
Surge Pressure = 700 kPa
Operation Effective EBHP ECD or EMD

Drilling EBHP = HP + APL 1116 kg/m3
= 20,773 + 300
= 21,073 kPa
Pump Off EBHP = HP 1100 kg/m3
= 20,773 kPa
Trip Out EBHP = HP – Swab Press 1079 kg/m3
= 20,773 – 400
= 20,373 kPa
Trip In EBHP = HP + Surge Press 1137 kg/m3
= 20,773 + 700
= 21,473 kPa
Although the density of the drilling fluid is 1100 kg/m3, bottom hole pressure during
different operations indicates the effective density ranges from 1079 kg/m3 up to 1137
kg/m3. This range of densities, in conjunction with the lost circulation, requires special
attention during all facets of the drilling operation.
3-13 October 2006

OBJECTIVE FOUR
Apply the formula and associated variables to calculate secondary pressures associated
with drilling operations.
SECONDARY PRESSURES
Pressure Inversion
When a pit gain has been detected and the well is shut-in, pressures must be monitored to
establish the correct stabilized shut-in drill pipe and casing pressures. Any pressure increase
beyond the point of stabilization signals the beginning of a pressure inversion.
As the gas influx migrates upwards without expanding, formation pressure is transmitted
throughout the wellbore. The migrating gas influx must be controlled to avoid excessive
pressures and permit the gas to expand accordingly. Failure to implement proper well control
procedures will result in the following pressures:
DPP CP Bottom Hole Pressure
Well Shut-In
SIDPP SICP HP + SIDPP
(gas on bottom)
Gas-to-Surface
New BHP - HPDP FP FP + HPAnn
(pressure inversion)
Under field conditions with surface casing set, a pressure inversion will usually induce
formation breakdown on the upper zones due to the excessive pressures. The breakdown of
wellbore integrity produces an underground blowout, establishing an uncontrolled flow from
the kicking zone into the zone or zones accepting fluid.
3-14 October 2006

Example of Pressure Inversion
The following summarized results were determined from the Nisku test well,
comparing 3.0 m3 and 4.0 m3 gas kicks.
Depth = 900 m
Density = 1070 kg/m3
HP = 9447 kPa
FP = 9873 kPa
PRESSURE SUMMARY
Pit Gain (m3) 3.0 4.0
SIDPP (kPa) 426 426
SICP (kPa) 1225 1460
GAS AT SURFACE
Theoretical Observed Theoretical Observed
DPP (kPa) 5,661 5,661 5,783 5,786
CP (kPa) 9,873 6,596 9,873 6,957
BHP (kPa) 15,108 11,747 15,230 12,091
GAS EXPANSION
The circulation of a gas influx will be accompanied by an increased gain in tank volume due
to expansion. Calculation of expanded gas volumes is not a requirement on well control
operations, but is presented as a basic understanding of the operation.
According to Boyle’s Law, which neglects the effects of temperature, absolute pressure is
used to calculate the expanded volume of gas at different depths.
V1 × P1
Boyle’s Law: V2 =
P2
Where: P1 = the initial pressure of the gas (FP)

V1 = the initial volume of the influx (pit gain)
P2 = the pressure acting on the influx (HP of mud above the gas plus
circulating CP)
3-15 October 2006

Example
Depth = 1800 m
SIDPP = 600 kPa
SICP = 1600 kPa
Pit Gain = 4.0 m3
1. Calculated volume of gas at 600 m when the casing pressure is 2600 kPa.
P1 = FP
= [Depth × Density × 0.00981] + SIDPP
= [1800 m × 1100 kg/m3 × 0.00981] + 600 kPa
= 20,024 kPa
P2 = HP Above Gas + CP
= [Depth × Density × 0.00981] + CP
= [600 m × 1100 kg/m3 × 0.00981] + 2600 kPa
= 6475 kPa + 2600 kPa
= 9075 kPa
P × V1
V2 = 1
P2
20,024 kPa × 4.0 m3
V2 =
9075 kPa
3
V2 = 8.8 m
2. Calculated volume of gas when it reaches the choke with a CP of 3500 kPa.
P1 = 20,024 kPa
V1 = 4.0 m3
P2 = 3500 kPa
20,024 kPa × 4.0 m 3
V2 =
3500 kPa
V2 = 22.9 m3
3. Calculated volume of gas when it reaches the poor-boy degasser at atmospheric pressure
of 100 kPa.
P1 = 20,024 kPa
V1 = 4.0 m3
P2 = 100 kPa
20,024 kPa × 4.0 m 3
V2 =
100 kPa
V2 = 801 m3
3-16 October 2006

OBJECTIVE FIVE
Explain how factors affect maximum allowable casing pressure.
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CASING PRESSURE (MACP)
The maximum allowable casing pressure (MACP) is determined by leak-off tests conducted
in the open hole section immediately below the casing shoe. It is the maximum casing
pressure that can be applied at surface without rupturing the casing seat.
A leak-off test is determined by the combination of the hydrostatic pressure of the fluid in the
hole and applied surface pressure. (Refer to Appendix III for test procedure.)
The maximum allowable casing pressure is based on the weakest formation in the wellbore;
therefore, penetration of a lost circulation zone will greatly alter or negate any previously
established pressures.
Leak-Off Test
Leak-off tests are conducted to determine the fracture pressure of the open hole section
immediately below the casing seat. The results of the test provide the maximum pressure the
casing seat can withstand and subsequently, the maximum allowable casing pressure that
could be applied at surface without rupturing the casing seat.
Each well drilled does not require a leak-off test under the statutory regulations. The
requirements for running a leak-off test are specified on the drilling licence application,
although some operators may elect to exceed these requirements when drilling in an
unfamiliar area.
Main reasons for leak-off tests are:

1. To establish integrity of cement job.
2. To establish the integrity of the formation below the casing shoe.
3. To determine the MACP.
4. To determine the maximum density that can be applied in the well.
(When MACP = 0 kPa)
3-17 October 2006

Theory of Leak-Off Tests
The fracture pressure, which is the combined total of the hydrostatic and surface applied
pressures, is the pressure required to rupture the open hole section. The resultant fractures
can be vertical or horizontal in direction although industry usually concludes vertical
fractures are most dominant. A vertical fracture on a shallow surface casing provides the
greatest potential danger associated with well control operations, should the fracture
propagate to surface.
Test Procedures
Subsequent to the casing and all surface control equipment securing a pressure test, the
casing shoe is drilled out exposing 5 to 10 metres of open hole. The hole is circulated clean
and the bit is hoisted into the casing.
The testing unit must be equipped with a recorder capable of accurately recording the applied
surface pressure correlating to the cumulative volume pumped. At this time, a high pressure,
low volume pump is rigged up, the annular preventer and manifold closed and pumping is
commenced.
Procedure
1. Pump slowly at a constant rate of 4 to 8 litres per minute depending upon the casing
setting depth.
2. Record the surface applied pressure correlating to a specific incremental volume
pumped.
3. Plot the graph-correlating surface applied pressure versus volume pumped.
4. The point where the pressure plot deviates from a straight line is the surface pressure
to reach leak-off. Pumping should be terminated to avoid possible propagation of
fracture.
3-18 October 2006

Test Results
Figure 3-1 is a plot of a leak-off test conducted on a 10-metre open hole section below the
surface casing seat. The following data can be extrapolated from the test.
Test Data:
Surface Casing = 212 m

Surface Applied Pressure = 1200 kPa (from graph, Figure 3-1)
LOP = Applied Surface Pressure + Hydrostatic

= 1200 kPa + (212 m × 1000 kg/m3 × 0.00981)
= 3280 kPa
Leak-Off Gradient = LOP ÷ Casing Depth

= 3280 kPa ÷ 212 m
= 15.47 kPa/m
Equivalent Mud Density = Leak-Off Gradient ÷ 0.00981

= 15.47 kPa/m ÷ 0.00981
= 1577 kg/m3
MACP = LOP - HP
= 3280 kPa - 2080 kPa
= 1200 kPa
3-19 October 2006

APPLIED SURFACE
PRESSURE TO
REACH LEAK-OFF
Figure 3-1 Refer to Appendix III for additional details and procedures on Leak-off
Tests
3-20 October 2006

MACP TABLE
MUD DENSITY (kg/m3) MACP (kPa)
1100 2520
1150 2350
1200 2180
1250 2000
1300 1835
MACP GRAPH
3000
2500
2000
1500
1100 1200 1300
Mud Density (kg/m3)
Factors Affecting Maximum Allowable Casing Pressure
The MACP is based on the weakest component in the wellbore.
Note: Penetration of a lost circulation zone considerably lowers maximum allowable

casing pressure than indicated by the leak-off test conducted at the casing seat.
Example:
While drilling at 900 m with a mud density of 1140 kg/m3 partial lost circulation occurs. The
driller cuts back on pump rate to reduce the annular pressure loss and ultimately has to reduce
the mud density to 1100 kg/m3 to regain 100 percent circulation.
3-21 October 2006

As drilling continues, the weakest component in the wellbore now becomes the loss zone at
900 m. This zone is only subjected to the annular pressure loss and the ECD generated by
the return density in the wellbore.
The integrity of the wellbore can be checked by doing a dynamic leak-off test before entering
the zone of interest. The operator can circulate through a wide open choke, at the reduced
pump speed that will be used in the event of a kick and slowly close the choke to observe the
response on the drill pipe pressure gauge. As long as the wellbore integrity is there, the
casing and drill pipe pressure both increase equally. If returns are lost again, there is no
further increase in the drill pipe pressure.
The highest shut in drill pipe pressure that could be held in the event of a kick would be the
difference in the reduced speed pump pressure and the observed pressure while doing the
integrity test.
In the event a kick situation should develop and the well is shut in, the drill pipe pressure is
the first pressure test the loss zone will be subjected to. As long as the wellbore integrity is
there the well should be able to withstand the shut in pressure. If the loss zone starts to take
fluid, the drill pipe pressure will increase and then drop down to a lower level as underground
flow gets initiated.
Example
Leak-Off Gradient = 18 kPa/m
¾ Lost Circulation Zone 900 m

• Mud Density lowered to 1100 kg/m3 and circulation regained.
Analysis
The previously established leak-off gradients of 18 kPa/m was at the casing shoe. A new
leak-off gradient was established at 900 m.
= 1100 kg/m3 × 0.00981
= 10.79 kPa/m
Therefore the MACP with 1100 kg/m3 in the hole = 0 (zero).
3-22 October 2006

In the event a kick situation should develop, the first problem to be addressed is the
inaccuracy of the shut in casing and drill pipe pressure.
z Circulating the well with the conventional Driller's Method may permit an additional
gas influx as the circulating pressures are based upon unstabilized pressures.
z As well, further losses of fluid will be incurred at the lost circulation zone during the
circulation resulting in a considerably underbalanced situation and a continual influx of
gas.
z As the gas is circulated above the lost circulation zone, the pressure acting on the zone
from the upper section of the wellbore will be substantially reduced as a result of the
density difference between gas and mud.
OBJECTIVE SIX
Explain accumulator design, sizing and the applicable regulatory requirements.
ACCUMULATOR SIZING
Accumulator Design and Sizing
In determining the design, size and fluid requirements for a particular accumulator
application, the following points should be considered.
z The accumulator should have the ability to function the necessary BOP components
and volumes as per regulatory standards without requiring recharge.
Note: Based on not allowing the accumulator pressure to fall below 8400 kPa.
z The precharge pressure must be appropriate to the operating pressure, as per

manufacturer’s specifications.
3-23 October 2006

3-24 October 2006

Excerpts of Various Provincial Government Regulations

Alberta EUB Directive 036
Accumulator
System (6.1) The accumulator system must meet the following requirements:
¾ For class I wells, it must be capable of providing,
without recharging, hydraulic fluid of sufficient
volume and pressure to open the hydraulically
operated valve (HCR) on the diverter line, close the
annular preventer on drill pipe/coiled tubing, and
retain a minimum pressure of 8400 kPa on the
accumulator system.
¾ For well classes II, III, and IV, it must be capable of
providing, without recharging, hydraulic fluid of
sufficient volume and pressure to open the HCR on
the bleed-off line, close the annular preventer on drill
pipe/coiled tubing, close one ram preventer, and retain
a minimum pressure of 8400 kPa on the accumulator
system. (See Section 6.1.1 if additional BOP
equipment has been installed and is in use.)
¾ For well classes V and VI, it must be capable of
Tables 2 & 3
the bleed-off line, close the annular preventer on the
drill pipe/coiled tubing, close two ram preventers, and
retain a minimum pressure of 8400 kPa on the
accumulator system.
¾ For critical sour wells, it must be capable of
the bleed-off line, close the annular preventer on the
drill pipe/coiled tubing, close, open, and close one ram
preventer, and if blind/shear rams are installed,
provide sufficient volume and pressure to shear the
drill pipe/coiled tubing, and retain on the accumulator
system a minimum pressure of 8400 kPa or the
minimum pressure required to shear the drill
pipe/coiled tubing, whichever is greater (sizing
calculations required; see Section 6.5).
3-25 October 2006

Additional BOP Equipment If additional BOP equipment has been installed and is in use,
(6.1.1) there must be sufficient usable hydraulic fluid available to close
the additional BOP component(s) and meet the requirements of
Section 6.1.
All Additional BOP equipment that is not in service must be

locked out, have the control handles removed, or have the lines
disconnected.
Recording Accumulator Determine and record the accumulator system’s make, number
Specifications of bottles, capacity, design pressure, and operating pressure
(upstream of any regulators). The operating conditions of the
accumulator must not be changed prior to conducting the BOP
mechanical test or the accumulator sizing calculations.
Accumulator specifications should be available at each rig and
this includes specifications for “homemade” models. Operators
and/or contractors should be encouraged to complete a BOP
Data sheet [similar to Worksheet No. 1 on page 47 (reference
EUB Directive 036)].
• Reminder: One US gal has been subtracted from the
nominal size of each accumulator bottle to
account for displacement of bladder or
float assembly
[See Table No. 2 on page 46 for accumulator
specifications (reference EUB Directive 036)].
• Reminder: Accumulators are sized in US gals. Use
the following for conversions:
US gals x 3.785 = litres
3-26 October 2006

Manitoba
The same regulations as prescribed by the Alberta Energy and Utilities Board in Alberta.
Saskatchewan
(0-2 Reg 1: Oil & Gas Conservation, 1985, Part X - Drilling and Servicing Blowout Prevention)
(5) If fluid under pressure is used to operate blowout preventers, the operator shall use an
accumulator system:
(a) of sufficient pressure and capacity to:
i) effect full closure of the annular preventer and to open the hydraulically
operated valve on the bleed-off line; or
ii) simultaneously close the annular preventer and one element of the ram-type
preventer if the valve on the bleed-off line is not hydraulically operated;
and at the same time retain a pressure of 8400 kilopascals at the pressure source and
recover within five minutes the accumulator pressure drop following the effecting of
the activity described in subclause (i) or (ii);
(b) that is connected to a nitrogen emergency source of not less than 12,500
kilopascals, and with nitrogen containers having pressure gauges installed or
readily available for installation, capable of opening the hydraulically operated
valve on the bleed-off line, and closing both the annular preventer and one
element of the ram-type preventer.
3-27 October 2006

British Columbia (B.C. Reg. 336/98 - Controls 22)
(5) All blowout preventers must be hydraulically operated and connected to an

accumulator system.
(6) The accumulator system required by subsection (5) must be:
(a) installed and operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications,

(b) connected to the blowout preventers with lines of equivalent working pressure to
the system, and within 5 m of the well the lines must be of steel construction unless
completely sheathed with adequate fire resistant sleeving,
(c) capable of providing, without recharging, fluid of sufficient volume and pressure to
close the annular preventer, close a ram preventer, open the hydraulically operated
valve and retain a pressure of 8400 kPa on the accumulator system,
(d) recharged by a pressure controlled pump capable of recovering within 5 minutes the
accumulator pressure drop resulting from the operation in paragraph (c),
(e) capable of closing any ram type preventer within 30 seconds,
(f) capable of closing the annular preventer within 60 seconds, and
(g) equipped with readily accessible fittings and gauge to determine the precharge
pressure of each nitrogen container.
(7) If nitrogen cylinders are used as an emergency pressure source, sufficient useable
nitrogen must be available at a minimum pressure of 8400 kPa to fully close the annular
preventer and pipe rams and open the hydraulically operated valve.
3-28 October 2006

Figure 3-3 Usable Accumulator Fluid Volume Above 8400 kPa (Drawing credit: Ken Caldwell)
Pressures (Precharge and Operating)
z No accumulator bottle should be operated at a pressure higher than its rated

working pressure.
z The accumulator system must be capable of closing each ram preventer within 30
seconds.
z As well, closing times must not exceed 60 seconds for annular preventers smaller
than 350 mm, and 90 seconds for larger size annular preventers.
z After closure, a minimum final pressure of 8400 kPa is required to ensure that the
preventers will be held closed.
z At least 50 percent of the original fluid should remain as a reserve after closing the
BOP’s.
Note: Wellbore pressure assists Annular Preventers like the Hydril GK & GX models.
The Cameron DL and the Shaffer Annulars are not wellbore pressure assist.
3-29 October 2006

Reasons for the 50 percent reserve recommended by the manufacturer are:
z Fluid in the “close” lines tends to flow back into the reservoir tanks on accumulator
units.
(a) This is because the accumulators are normally located at a lower position than the
preventer stacks at a point 30 to 50 metres from the wellbore, and the four-way
valves on the accumulator units are placed in the “open or closed” position until an
emergency calls for shutting in the well.
z Most four-way valves lose some of their fluid capacity due to “interflow” when the
valves move from “open” to “close”. The 50 percent reserve usually compensates
for this.
z Frequently, there is fluid loss through the packing of the preventer units.
Procedure to Determine the Total Fluid Requirements for an Accumulator System
1. Record the size, type, operating pressure and volume for each pipe ram, annular, and
opening volume for the HCR.
2. Find the total amount of hydraulic fluid required to operate all of the above-referenced
preventers, then multiply this total volume by 1.5.
• This will provide the 50 percent safety margin required.
3. Using the formula below, calculate the accumulator size required.
Remaining Pressure x Fluid Required Operating Pressure
Size = ×
Operating Pressure − Remaining Pressure Precharge Pressure
4. To determine the number of accumulator bottles required, divide the size of each
bottle into the total accumulator size calculated above.
Note: Refer to the manufacturer’s specifications for specific accumulator bottles
being used.
3-30 October 2006

OBJECTIVE SEVEN
Perform the calculations for the minimum accumulator size requirements for a specified
BOP stack.
Example #1
Based on the information below, determine accumulator sizing and number of bottles
required to close the annular and ram preventers, and open the hydraulic control valve.
BOP Stack Hydril GK Annular Preventer

254 mm × 21,000 kPa
Shaffer LWS Ram Preventer
254 mm × 34,000 kPa
NL Shaffer DB Hydraulic Control Valve
76 mm × 34,000 kPa
Accumulator Operating Pressure = 21,000 kPa
Precharge pressure = 7000 kPa
Bottle size: = 37.85 L
Required remaining pressure = 8400 kPa
Step #1
Determine fluid volume requirements to function the BOP components based on

manufacturer’s specifications.
Volume to close: Annular Preventer 28.12 L

Ram Preventer 11.28 L
Volume to open: HCR 1.1 L
Total volume: 40.5 L
Add 50% safety factor: 40.5 L × 1.5 = 60.75 L
Therefore, 60.75 L of hydraulic fluid is required to close the annular and ram preventers, and
open the hydraulic control valve.
3-31 October 2006

Step #2
Determine the accumulator size:
⎡ Remaining Pressure x Fluid Required ⎤ ⎡ Operating Pressure ⎤

Size = ⎢ ⎥ × ⎢ ⎥
⎣ Operating Pressure − Remaining Pressure ⎦ ⎣ Precharge Pressure ⎦
⎡ 8400 kPa x 60.75 L ⎤ ⎡ 21,000 kPa ⎤
= ⎢ ⎥ × ⎢ ⎥
⎣ 21,000 kPa − 8400 kPa ⎦ ⎣ 7000 kPa ⎦
510,804 kPa × L
= ×3
12,600 kPa
= 40.5 L × 3
= 121.5 L
Therefore, the minimum accumulator size required is 121.5 L
Note: An alternate method is to refer to Figure 3-3. Based on a 21,000 kPa system and
precharge pressure of 7000 kPa, the usable fluid is 50 percent of the accumulator
capacity. Therefore, if 60.75 L of fluid is required, the minimum capacity must
be 2 × 60.75 L = 121.5 L.
Step #3
Determine the number of bottles required by dividing the required accumulator size by the
bottle size and subtracting 3.79 L for each bottle to account for the bladder displacement.
Therefore each 37.85 L bottle will hold 37.85 L - 3.79 L = 34.06 L.
121.5 L
No. Bottles Required =
34.06 L/Bottle
= 4 Bottles
Therefore, four 37.85 L bottles are required.
Note: See Page 8-24 and 8-25 for accumulator bottle volumes.
3-32 October 2006

Backup Nitrogen Requirements
¾ Sufficient usable * nitrogen must be available to fully close the annular preventer and
pipe rams and open the hydraulic valve (and retain a minimum pressure of 8,400
kPa).
• If two sets of pipe rams are required or in use, there must be additional usable
nitrogen available to close the extra set of rams.
Nitrogen Calculations
1. Provided all bottles are the same size, plot the combined average pressure on vertical axis
and draw horizontal line across to appropriate bottle size
2. Plot perpendicular line down to horizontal axis. Read “Equivalent Litres of Usable
Nitrogen” from Figure 3-4.
3. Multiply the usable nitrogen volume by the number of bottles in service to determine the
total usable volume available.
4. For example, determine the total fluid volume required to close the annular preventer and
pipe rams, and open the hydraulic valve.
z Compare this volume with the volume of usable nitrogen calculated earlier.
5. The back-up nitrogen supply is considered adequate if the volume calculated is equal to or
greater than the fluid volume required to close the BOP components.
Note: Fifty percent safety factor is not required for the backup nitrogen volume
requirements.
Recording Nitrogen Particulars

z Determine and record the number of nitrogen bottles in service, their capacity, and their
combined average pressure (record each bottle's capacity and pressure if bottles not the
same size).
Note: Refer to EUB Directive 036
z See Tables 2 and 3 (Page 3-24) for standard bottle sizes.
*
Usable fluid is defined as the number of litres of stored nitrogen to effect closure and maintain a
system pressure of 8400 kPa or greater.
3-33 October 2006

Figure 3-4 Usable nitrogen fluid volume above 8400 kPa (Drawing credit: Ken Caldwell)
Example #2
Determine the number of back-up nitrogen bottles required for the BOP stack in Example #1.
From previous example, the total fluid required to close the annular preventer and ram
preventer, and open the HCR was 40.5 L (without the 50% safety factor).
From Figure 3-4, using 42 litre bottles, assuming the average charged pressure is 15,750 kPa:
z one bottle equivalent of usable fluid equals 36 litres;

z therefore, 2 bottles would be required since one would not be sufficient.
z Nitrogen bottles required = Total Fluid Required ÷ Usable litres of Nitrogen.
3-34 October 2006

CHAPTER 3 — EXERCISE
1. Calculate the hydrostatic pressures at 1600 metres using the following mud densities.
Mud Density Hydrostatic Pressure
1070 kg/m3 __________________ kPa
1200 kg/m3 __________________ kPa
1450 kg/m3 __________________ kPa
1800 kg/m3 __________________ kPa
2. Calculate the formation pressure using the following information.

Depth = 1265 m
SIDPP = 300 kPa
SICP = 900 kPa
3. Calculate the gradients of the following mud densities.

Mud Density Gradient
1070 kg/m3 __________________ kPa/m
1300 kg/m3 __________________ kPa/m
1500 kg/m3 __________________ kPa/m
1850 kg/m3 __________________ kPa/m
3-35 October 2006

4. Calculate the mud density required to overbalance the formation pressure by 400 kPa.
Depth = 750 m
SIDPP = 400 kPa
SICP = 800 kPa
5. Calculate the ECD or EMD using the following information.

Depth = 1450 m
APL = 300 kPa
OPERATION EFFECTIVE BHP ECD or EMD

DRILLING
PUMP OFF
TRIPPING OUT
TRIPPING IN
3-36 October 2006

6. Calculate the volume of gas given the following conditions.

Depth = 1650 m
SIDPP = 500 kPa
SICP = 1400 kPa
Pit Gain = 2.5 m3
z Gas at 750 metres and the casing pressure is 2200 kPa.
z Gas at the choke and the casing pressure is 3000 kPa.
z Gas is at the poor-boy degasser.
7. Calculate the minimum accumulator size required, according to EUB Regulations, for
the following BOP stack.

Precharge Pressure = 7000 kPa
Annular Preventer 254 mm (21,000 kPa) Hydril GK

Pipe Ram 254 mm (21,000 kPa) Hydril Type V
Blind Ram 254 mm (21,000 kPa) Hydril Type V
HCR Valve 102 mm (21,000 kPa) Shaffer Type DB
8. How many accumulator bottles would be required for the above accumulator (bottle
size is 37.9 L)?
3-37 October 2006

CHAPTER 4
METHODS OF
WELL CONTROL
Chapter 4: Methods of Well Control
METHODS OF WELL CONTROL
OUTCOME
Control down hole pressures using primary and secondary methods of well control.
OBJECTIVES
1. Define primary, secondary and tertiary levels of well control.
2. Describe the secondary methods of well control.
3. Complete well control kill sheets for four secondary methods (Driller’s,
Concurrent, Volumetric, and Wait and Weight) of well control.
4. Perform the calculation used to determine the allowable amount of MACP that can
be exceeded.
5. Differentiate the advantages and disadvantages associated with each of the
secondary methods of well control.
6. Explain troubleshooting methods when using the driller’s method of well control.
OBJECTIVE ONE
Define primary, secondary and tertiary levels of well control.
INTRODUCTION
The drilling industry in Canada encounters a wide range of depths, mud densities and
associated downhole problems. The supervisor must be aware of the extreme variations,
which influence all methods of well control and their direct application to specific
operations. Further, supervisors and drilling crews must be aware of the mechanics of well
control.
4-1 October 2006

The following is a brief overview of the three levels of well control.
z Primary Control
Primary well control is the proper use of hydrostatic head to overbalance the
formation and prevent unwanted formation fluids from entering the wellbore. Since,
by definition, a kick is a sufficient entry of formation fluids into the wellbore to
warrant shutting in the well, primary control simply is the prevention of unnecessary
kicks.
The advantages of well control at this level are self-evident.
z Secondary Control
Secondary well control is the proper use of equipment to control the well in the event
primary control is lost.
When primary control is lost, a kick that is not adequately controlled can escalate
rapidly to a blowout, which is an uncontrolled flow of formation fluids to the surface,
the exception being an underground blowout.
z Tertiary Control
Tertiary well control is the proper use of equipment and hydrostatic head to regain
control of the well once a blowout has occurred.
Supervisors should effectively eliminate the tertiary form of well control by practising
and implementing the principles of the primary form of well control throughout the
drilling operations and being totally familiar with the secondary form of well control.
The following methods of well control involve both the primary and secondary forms of
control.
The primary method of well control is to maintain a constant bottom hole pressure to avoid
a further influx of formation fluids.
It is imperative that supervisors fully understand and can implement the principles and
mechanics of secondary methods of well control.
4-2 October 2006

The following is a list of well control methods involved in secondary well control.
z Driller’s Method
z Concurrent Method
z Low Choke Method
z Circulate and Weight
z Modified Low Choke
z Volumetric Method/Top Kill
z Wait and Weight Method
The method of well control depends on company policies, equipment availability, material
availability, drill string position, casing depth, size and type of influx, and pressure integrity
of the wellbore.
4-3 October 2006

OBJECTIVE TWO
Describe the secondary methods of well control.
DRILLER’S METHOD
In the Driller’s Method, the kick is circulated out of the hole using the existing mud density.
The original mud density is then raised to the required kill density and circulated back to
surface.
Two complete circulations are required, as a minimum, for this method. They are normally
referred to as Step # 1 and Step #2 of the Driller’s Method.
Since this method deals with the removal of the kick and the addition of kill density mud
separately, it is generally considered to be the simplest of well control methods, and requires
the fewest calculations.
However, this results in the well being circulated under pressure for a relatively long time,
with an increased possibility of choke problems. Also, the annular pressures during the first
circulation are generally higher than those produced in other well control methods.
Considerations and Observations
z Very high annular pressures may arise when killing a gas kick.
z The annular pressure will reach a maximum pressure when the gas arrives at
surface.
Overkill
z Overkill, which is the increased pressure, added to the circulating system when
initiating circulation, compensates for erratic choke adjustments and reduces the
possibility of secondary influxes.
z The amount of overkill must be determined by the operator of the well, as this
is a discretionary value.
z The amount of overkill incorporated into the system will vary depending upon the
variance between shut-in casing pressure and maximum allowable casing pressure
and wellbore integrity.
4-4 October 2006

z The wellsite supervisor, representing the oil company/operator, is responsible for

calculating the amount of overkill trapped within the system prior to commencing
the circulation.
z Excessive overkill used in the circulation could force the circulating casing pressure
to approach the maximum allowable casing pressure and interfere with future
decisions affecting the continuation of the well control operation. Conversely,
insufficient overkill can develop into an underbalanced situation, permitting a
continual influx for the remainder of the circulation.
When is Driller’s Method Used?
z Step #1 of the Driller’s Method is generally used when no weight material is

available on site, or when the kick is due to swab effects and does not require a
density increase to control the well.
z It is also used to remove gas kicks where high migration rates can cause higher
surface pressures.
z It can be used in wells being drilled with mud motors where the initial SIDPP does
not register due to the BHA. After the kick is circulated out the CP settles at SIDPP
and OK. The SICP (after overkill is bled off is the SIDPP). This value can be used
to increase the mud density to kill mud density.
z It can be used in HPHT wells, to minimize the non circulation time.
z The Driller’s Method, Step #1, involves circulating the gas influx out of the
wellbore without increasing mud density, while preventing any further influx from
entering the wellbore. The well can be circulated under control until such time as
kill mud is prepared to proceed with Step #2.
Preview of Driller’s Method of Well Control
z The well is shut in after the influx is identified.

z The stabilized Shut-in Drill Pipe Pressure (SIDPP), Shut-In Casing Pressures
(SICP) and Pit Gain are recorded. Calculations are completed using information
from the Data Sheets and Well Control Kill Sheets (example on pages 4-10).
z The kick is immediately circulated out of the hole.
z When the first circulation is completed, the well is shut in again.
z The mud density is increased to kill mud density.
4-5 October 2006

z The well is circulated a second time with the kill mud density.
z The first circulation (step #1) of the Driller’s Method circulates the original mud
density bottoms-up to remove the influx.
z The second circulation (step # 2) is used to circulate kill density mud throughout
the wellbore to control formation pressure.
Procedure for Driller’s Method
First Circulation (Step #1)
When the well has been shut-in and the pressures have stabilized, record Shut In, Drill Pipe
Pressure, Shut-In Casing Pressure, and Pit Gain.
1. Check alignment of manifold.

2. Crack open choke, initiate flow.
3. Bring pump to reduced speed, hold SICP plus overkill* constant until the drill pipe
pressure stabilizes. Do not exceed MACP. Record stabilized DPP.
4. Maintain constant drill pipe pressure (barring any problems) until the invading fluid is
out of the well, or bottoms-up has been reached, whichever comes later.
5. Stop the pump, holding casing pressure constant while closing the choke (trapping
overkill).
6. Verify accuracy of SIDPP by bleeding off trapped overkill.
7. Read and record SIDPP and SICP.
Note: Additional circulations may be required to remove all of the influx from
the wellbore.
*
The amount of overkill is at the discretion of the operator.
4-6 October 2006

Second Circulation (Step # 2)
1. Crack open choke, to initiate flow.

2. Bring pump to reduced speed, keeping SICP plus overkill* (if required) constant until
kill density mud reaches the bit.**
3. After kill density mud reaches the bit, maintain DPP at FCP. ***
4. When kill density mud reaches surface, stop the pump and close choke.
5. SIDPP and SICP should be equal. Bleed off the overkill if used.
While performing the first circulation of the Driller’s Method, keep the following
considerations in mind:
z Complete the calculations using a Well Control Kill Sheet (page 4-10).
z Any pressure which is trapped while stopping the pump and closing the well, and
which is above the stabilized shut-in pressures, can be used as part of an overkill.
z The ever-present problem of lost circulation cannot be detected readily if overkill is
added immediately or starting of circulation.
Note: In Western Canadian drilling operations, Step #2 is applied by increasing the

mud density while circulating the kill mud downhole. Use of Concurrent
Method density increase formula can be used to determine the resultant density
increase as the new mud density is circulated downhole.
**
The ICP should equal the RSPP + SIDPP + Overkill.
**
FCP = [RSPP × KMD ÷ OMD] + Overkill (if required)
4-7 October 2006

Verifying Wellbore Integrity
1. Maintain SICP constant while bringing pump to the reduced speed.

2. Record the circulating DPP (which should be close to the RSPP + SIDPP)
value.
3. After pressure stabilizes, add the desired overkill to the SICP (in one gauge
increments).
4. The amount of overkill should transmit to the circulating DPP (should equal
RSPP + SIDPP + OVERKILL).
z In the event the overkill does not transmit to the circulating DPP, there is a
strong indication lost circulation is present.
z When the choke is opened, give special attention to the poor-boy degasser.
− If, as is the case with many shallow wells, gas is to surface upon shut-in,
opening the choke too wide could displace the fluid from the poor-boy
degasser.
z If gas is near or at surface, reduce the amount of time spent on casing
pressure prior to switching to drill pipe pressure (2 - 5 minutes or possibly
less).
z When bottoms-up time has elapsed, the supervisor should confirm the
influx has been completely circulated out prior to shutting in the well.
4-8 October 2006

Indications to Verify That the Influx Has Been Circulated Out
z the casing pressure after the annulus has been circulated should be equal to the
original shut-in drill pipe pressure plus the overkill.
z bottoms-up time has expired.
− In most cases, the influx will take longer to be circulated out before this
time is reached due to the slippage of gas.
z tank volumes return to normal.

− This is difficult to monitor, considering the volumes of fluid transferred
during circulation to the poor-boy degasser tank.
z flare will not remain lit.

− If a second kick occurred and is separated from the first kick by a
considerable volume of fluid, this sign could be misleading.
z sounds in the manifold of uncontaminated mud are heard.

z there are no further increases in pressure as the circulating DPP is maintained with
the choke in a fixed position.
The following should be noted while performing the second circulation of the Driller’s
Method:
z Hold the SICP + Overkill constant until the kill mud reaches the bit. ICP should
equal RSPP + SIDPP + OVERKILL (Read and believe the number.)
z After the kill mud reaches the bit, hold the DPP constant until the kill mud is at
surface. When kill mud is circulated through the bit, the RSPP increases by the
ratio of:
KMD
OMD
KMD
FCP should equal RSPP × + Overkill
OMD
Note: For a well that is 2170 m deep, these are examples of gauge pressure readings that
can be anticipated during the first circulation (Figure 4-1) and the second circulation
(Figure 4-2) when using the Driller’s Method.
4-9 October 2006

OBJECTIVE THREE
Complete well control kill sheets for four secondary methods (Driller’s, Concurrent,
Volumetric, and Wait and Weight) of well control.
Example of Driller’s Method

SECOND LINE SUPERVISORS’ WELL CONTROL DATA SHEET
DEPTH 2170 m
CASING 244.5 mm 53.57 kg/m J-55
CASING SEAT 360 m
BOP RATING 34,000 kPa
HOLE SIZE 222 mm
DRILL PIPE SIZE 114 mm 24.7 kg/m IF
MUD DENSITY 1120 kg/m3
PUMP SIZE 127 mm × 254 mm
PUMP REDUCED SPEED 60 SPM @ 2800 kPa
MUD TANKS TOTAL 70 m3
SIDPP 600 kPa
SICP 1400 kPa
PIT GAIN 3.0 m3
LEAK-OFF GRADIENT 18.8 kPa/m
OVERKILL 400 kPa
4-10 October 2006

WELL CONTROL KILL SHEET - DRILLER’S METHOD
Well Total Depth 2,170 m Casing Depth 360 m Date:

PUMP DATA
Pump Bore Dia 127 mm × Stroke Length 254 mm RSPP 2800 kPa
Pump Output 0.00965 m3/stroke × 60 SPMReduced = 0.58 m3/min
VOLUME & DISPLACEMENT TIME
Length (m) Capacity (m3/m) Volume (m3) Minutes(R) Strokes
Drill Pipe 2170 0.0074 16 28 1680
OH Annulus 1810 0.0285 52 90 5400
Casing Annulus 360 0.03 11 19 1140
Mud Tanks 70 121 7260
Pre-Mix Tanks
TOTAL 149 258 15,480
CALCULATIONS
MACP with Original Mud Density
Fracture Pressure = Depth of Casing 360 m × Leak-Off Gradient 18.8 kPa/m = 6768 kPa
3
HP = Depth of Casing 360 m × Original Mud 1120 kg/m × 0.00981 = 3955 kPa
MACP = Fracture Pressure 6768 kPa - HP 3955 kPa = 2813 kPa
Density Increase = SIDPP 600 kPa ÷ Depth 2170 m ÷ 0.00981 = 30 kg/m3
Kill Mud = Density Increase 30 kg/m3 + Original Density 1120 kg/m3 = 1150 kg/m3
4250 x Density Increase 30 kg/m 3
Barite Required = = 41 kg/m3
4250 − Kill Mud 1150 kg/m 3
Total Barite = Barite Required 41 kg/m3 × Volume 149 m3 = 6109 kg

Number of Sacks = Total Barite 6109 kg ÷ 40 kg/sack = 153 sacks
MR = Number of Sacks 153 sacks ÷ Minutes(R) 258 Minutes = 0.6 Sacks/min
ICP = RSPP 2800 kPa + SIDPP 600 kPa + OK 400 kPa = 3800 kPa
⎡ RSPP 2800 kPa x Kill Mud 1150 kg/m 3 ⎤

FCP = ⎢ ⎥ + OK 400 kPa = 3275 kPa
⎣⎢ Original Mud 1120 kg/m 3 ⎦⎥
Maximum Allowable Casing Pressure

Fracture Pressure = Depth of casing 360 m × Leak-off Gradient 18.8 kPa/m = 6768 kPa
HP = Depth of casing 360 m × Kill Mud 1150 kg/m3 × 0.00981 = 4061 kPa
Maximum Allowable Casing Pressure with Kill Mud (MACP) 2707 kPa
Note: Density increase does not include a trip margin. The use of a trip margin and/or
overkill is at the discretion of the operator.
4-11 October 2006

DRILLER’S METHOD STEP ONE
KICK DATA
Figure 4-1
SIDPP 600 kPa WELL DEPTH 2170 m RSPP 2800 kPa @ 60 spm
3
SICP 1400 kPa ORIGINAL MUD 1120 kg/m3 Overkill 400 kPa PIT GAIN 3.0 m
600 1400 3800 1800 3800 Given 3800 1000 1000 1000 600 600
4-12
CP = Given
SICP = SIDPP
SIDPP = SIDPP
CP = SICP + OK
SIDPP = 600 kPa

SICP = 1400 kPa
CP = SIDPP + OK
SICP = SIDPP + OK
SIDPP = SIDPP + OK
ICP = RSPP + SIDPP + OK

Well Shut In Pump Started Circulation Invading Fluid is Pump Stopped Overkill Bled Off to
Pressures Stabilized RSPP Established Continues with Gas Circulated from the Well Shut In Confirm Original
Overkill Built In to Surface Annnulus Trapping Overkill SIDPP
Tank Gain to Zero
October 2006
DRILLER’S METHOD STEP TWO
KICK DATA
Figure 4-2
3 3
SICP 600 kPa ORIGINAL MUD 1120 kg/m Overkill 400 kPa KILL MUD 1150 kg/m
600 600 3800 1000 3275 1000 0 600 3275 1000 0 0

4-13
SICP = 0
SIDPP = 0
SIDPP = 0
SICP = SIDPP
SICP = 600 kPa

SIDPP = 600 kPa
CP = SIDPP + OK
CP = SIDPP + OK
CP = SIDPP + OK

FCP = (RSPP x KMD/OMD) + OK
Well Shut In after Pump Started Kill Mud Density Pump Stopped Circulation Wellbore Displaced
Step 1 after OK @RSPP(OK) Reaches the Bit OK Bled Off Resumed with OK with Kill Mud
Bled off Established Kill Mud @Bit Pump Stopped
OK Built In OK & Trapped
Pressure Bled Off
October 2006
CONCURRENT METHOD
The concurrent method has been used extensively to regain control of kicking zones. The
method incorporates simultaneously, circulating out the influx with mixing of weight
material.
Advantages associated with the method include the following:
z Circulating time can be reduced by eliminating an initial circulation with original mud
density.
z The addition of weight material substantially reduces the problem of reaching the
maximum allowable casing pressure without gas to surface affecting the increased
density mud circulated to the annulus during the initial stages of the well control
operation.
Requirements for proper implementation of the Concurrent Method include:
z having a sufficient supply of weight material on location.

z the rig crew must be large enough to maintain the mixing rate and monitor the rig
during the operation.
z estimate of total barite or calcium carbonate sacks needed to increase the density of
entire system.
z establish the number of sacks needed per circulation (based on the density increase
per circulation).
4-14 October 2006

Procedure for the Concurrent Method of Well Control
Note: The mud viscosity must be sufficient to support the addition of weight material.
1. Ensure that all the kick data have been recorded.

2. Prepare a drill pipe pressure versus surface-to-bit time schedule in accordance with
the Well Control Data Sheet. Example on Figure 4-3.
3. Crack open the choke and initiate flow.
4. Start the pump and bring speed up gradually to the reduced speed.
5. Keep the CP constant until the circulating DPP stabilizes at the pre-calculated ICP.
6. Mix barite as per the pre-determined mixing rate.
7. Maintain the circulating DPP in accordance to the DPP schedule until the increased
density mud reaches the bit, not exceeding the MACP.
8. At this point, keep the circulating DPP constant (FCP) until the increased density mud
reaches surface.
9. Keep the circulating DPP constant until the mud in the tanks has been raised to a
uniform density.
Note: The density can now be raised by the remaining underbalance amount.
Example Using Well Control Kill Sheet (Page 4-17)
1. Divide the surface-to-bit time (33 minutes) into 11 equal increments of 3 minutes
each.
2. Divide the surface-to-bit pump strokes into 11 equal increments to correspond to the
time increments (3 min × 30 spm = 90 strokes).
3. Plot the Initial Circulating Pressure at zero time and the FCP at 33 minutes (Page 4-
19). Connect the two points with a straight line. This is the pressure profile to be
followed as the kill mud is circulated to the bit.
4. The FCP is to be maintained until kill mud is at surface.
4-15 October 2006

z A mixing rate of one sack per minute can be a starting point.

z Drill pipe pressure schedules may have to be adjusted in the event of a plugged nozzle
or plugged choke.
z If the MACP is reached without gas to surface, the casing pressure should be
maintained at the MACP until gas reaches surface.
− At this point, the increased density mud should be circulated into the annulus
and will assist in controlling formation pressure and reducing the volume of
a second influx.
Calculations
Pre-determined mixing rate = 1.0 sack per minute (based on the rig’s mixing capacity,
manpower and mud supplies).
1. The density increase corresponding to this pre-determined mixing rate is calculated as

follows:
40 (MR (sacks/minute)) (4250 − Original Density (kg/m3 ))
Density Increase =
(4250 × PO m3 /min) + 40 (MR (sacks/minute))
where: MR = mixing rate, sacks/minute

PO = pump output, m3/min.
2. ICP (kPa) = RSPP (kPa) + SIDPP (kPa)
RSPP (kPa) × Kill Mud Density (kg/m3 )

3. FCP (kPa) = + remaining SIDPP (kPa)
Original Density (kg/m3 )
4. SIDPP (kPa) (Remaining) = SIDPP (kPa)  Change in Hydrostatic Pressure (kPa)
4-16 October 2006

Example of Concurrent Method

DEPTH 2170 m
CASING 273 mm O.D., 60.27 kg/m, J-55
CASING SEAT 960 m
HOLE SIZE 222 mm
PIPE SIZE 114 mm O.D., 24.7 kg/m -IF
DRILL COLLARS 196 m of 171 mm O.D. × 73 mm I.D.
PUMP SIZE 127 mm × 406 mm Duplex
PUMP FULL SPEED 60 spm. 11,750 kPa
PUMP REDUCED SPEED 30 spm. 3300 kPa
MUD TANKS VOLUME 90 m3
SIDPP 1800 kPa
SICP 3500 kPa
PIT GAIN 2.5 m3
FORMATION LEAK-OFF PRESSURE 18 kPa/m
GRADIENT
4-17 October 2006

WELL CONTROL KILL SHEET - CONCURRENT METHOD

(First Circulation)
Well Total Depth 2170 m Casing Depth 960 m Date:

PUMP DATA
Pump Output 0.01644 m3/stroke 30 SPMReduced = 0.4932 m3/min
Drill Pipe 2170 0.0074 16 33 977
OH Annulus 1210 0.0285 34.5 70 2098
Casing Annulus 960 0.0409 39.3 79 2388
Mud Tanks 90 182 5474
TOTAL 179.8 364 10,920
CALCULATIONS
Fracture Pressure = Depth of casing 960 m × Leak-off Gradient 18 kPa/m = 17,280 kPa
HP = Depth of casing 960 m × Original Mud 1250 kg/m3 × 0.00981 = 11,772 kPa
MACP = Fracture Pressure 17,280 kPa - HP 11,772 kPa = 5508 kPa
(40 x MR 1 sack/min) x (4250 − OMD 1250 kg/m 3 )
Increase this circ. = = 57 kg/m3
(4250 x PO 0.4932 m3/min + (40 x MR) 1 sack/min
New Mud Density = OMD 1250 kg/m3 + MDI 57 kg/m3 = 1307 kg/m3
Remaining Density Increase = Density Increase 85 kg/m3 - Increase this circ. 57 kg/m3 = 28 kg/m3
Remaining SIDPP = Remaining Density Increase 28 kg/m3 x Depth 2170 m x 0.00981 = 596 kPa
ICP = RSPP 3300 kPa + SIDPP 1800 kPa = 5100 kPa
3
3300 kPa x New Mud Density 1307 kg/m
FCP = + Remaining SIDPP 596 kPa = 4046 kPa
Original Mud Density 1250 kg/m 3

3
HP = Casing Depth 960 m × New Mud 1307 kg/m × 0.00981 = 12,308 kPa
Maximum Allowable Casing Pressure this circulation (MACP) 4972 kPa
MR Mixing Rate PO Pump Output
OMD Original Mud Density MDI Mud Density Increase
4-18 October 2006

WELL KILL SHEET — CONCURRENT METHOD

(First Circulation)
Maximum Allowable Casing Pressure This Circulation (MACP) 4972 kPa

Strokes to Bit From Pre-recorded Information STROKES 977
Circulating Rate Strokes Per Minute 30 spm
ICP 5100 kPa
FCP 4046 kPa
Figure 4-3
4-19 October 2006

CONCURRENT METHOD
Figure 4-4
KICK DATA
SIDPP 1800 kPa SICP 3500 kPa RSPP 3300 kPa

3 3
OVERKILL 0 kPa KILL MUD 1307 kg/m ORIGINAL MUD 1250 kg/m DEPTH 2170 m
1800 3500 5100 3500 4046 Given 596 Given 4046 3600 596 596
DP CSG DP CSG DP CSG DP CSG DP CSG DP CSG
4-20
CP = SICP
CP = Given
CP = Given
SICP = Given
SICP = FP - HP
SIDPP = FP - HP
SICP = 3500 kPa

SIDPP = 1800 kPa
ICP = RSPP + SIDPP
SIDPP = FP - HP in DP
FCP = RSPP x KMD/OMD + SIDPP
Note: Kill mud density not sufficient to kill well in one circulation.
FCP = (RSPP x KMD/OMD) + SIDPP Remaining
Well Shut In Pump Started Kill Mud Density Pump Stopped Circulation Kill Mud In Well
RSPP Reaches Bit Kill Mud At Bit Resumed At Pump Stopped
Established Reduced Speed Well Secured
October 2006

(Second Circulation)

PUMP DATA
Pump Output 0.01644 m3/stroke 30 SPMReduced = 0.4932 m3/min
Drill Pipe 2170 0.0074 16 33 977
OH Annulus 1210 0.0285 34.5 70 2098
Casing Annulus 960 0.0409 39.3 79 2388
Mud Tanks 90 182 5474
TOTAL 179.8 364 10,920
CALCULATIONS
Barite Required = 28 kg/m3
Total Barite = 28 kg/m3 × Volume 180 m3 = 5040 kg

MR = Number of Sacks 126 sacks ÷ Minutes 364 Minutes = 0.346 sacks/min
ICP = FCP from First Circulation = 4046 kPa
3
3300 × New Mud Density 1335 kg/m
FCP = 3
= 3525 kPa
Original Mud Density 1250 kg/m

3
HP = Casing Depth 960 m × Kill Mud 1335 kg/m × 0.00981 = 12,572 kPa
4-21 October 2006


(Second Circulation)

ICP 4046 kPa
FCP 3525 kPa
5200
5100
5000
4900
4800
4700
DRILL PIPE PRESSURE (kPa)
4600
4500
4400
4300
4200
4100
4000
3900
3800
3700
3600
3500
3400
3300
3200
ICP 4046 3994 3942 3890 3838 3786 3734 3682 3630 3578 3525
Strokes 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
Time 0 10 20 30
4-22 October 2006

CONCURRENT METHOD STEP TWO
KICK DATA

3 3
Overkill 0 kPa KILL MUD 1335 kg/m ORIGINAL MUD 1307 kg/m DEPTH 2170 m
596 596 4046 596 3525 596 0 596 3525 596 0 0

4-23
CP = SIDPP
CP = Given
SICP = Given
SICP = FP - HP
SIDPP = FP - HP
SICP = 59 kPa
SIDPP = 96 kPa
CP = SIDPP + OK
ICP = RSPP + SIDPP

FCP = (RSPP x KMD/OMD) + SIDPP

FCP = (RSPP x KMD/OMD) + SIDPP
Pressure Bled Off
October 2006
LOW CHOKE METHOD
This well control method is often used in shallow drilling operations where a minimum of
surface casing has been set.
The method is basically a way of outrunning a kick by attempting to load the annulus with
barite faster than the well can flow.
Without an adequate supply of barite on location, the Low Choke Method cannot be used.
An alternate method is the Modified Low Choke method. (Refer to page 4-29)
Unable to Shut In the Well
Example
The following is an example of where the shut-in casing pressure exceeds the MACP.
Total Depth = 900 m
Leak-Off Gradient = 18.1 kPa/m
MACP = 1400 kPa
SIDPP = 600 kPa*
SICP = 1600 kPa*
Pit Gain = 2.7 m3
The use of the Low Choke Method ensures that the pressure at the surface casing shoe does
not exceed the posted maximum allowable. Alternate well control procedures must be
considered prior to exceeding the MACP.
*
Pressure not stabilized
4-24 October 2006

Procedure for the Low Choke Method of Well Control
1. Ensure that all the kick data (DPP, CP, tank volumes, pit gain and time) have been
recorded.
2. Do not exceed the MACP.
3. Start the pump at or near the drilling rate.
4. Mix barite at two sacks per minute, or as fast as possible.
5. Make one circulation of the hole while holding casing pressure at the MACP using
choke adjustment.
6. After first circulation, continue circulating for one more circulation (with no barite
additions, after the entire mud system has a uniform density), to condition mud then
stop the pump and attempt to shut-in the well without exceeding MACP.
Note: See Situation #2 on page 4-47 for procedure on Low Choke Method with no
fluid in the hole.
7. Numerous circulations may have to be completed before pressures are reduced or an
alternate method of well control can be used.
Prior to using this method of well control, there are several considerations a supervisor must
take into account.
4-25 October 2006

z Salvage as much returning drilling fluid as possible.

z Many shallow rigs have no barite on location, which requires the immediate dispatch
of barite to the location in order to use the Low Choke Method.
z Without the addition of barite, each successive circulation permits an additional influx
to the wellbore, and eventually, the entire annulus will be displaced with gas.
z Sump fluid can be a ready source of fluid to allow circulation to continue; however,
without the addition of barite, the entire annulus will eventually be displaced with
gas.
z Gunning the solids from the bottom of the mud tanks does not provide sufficient
density increase.
z Gunning also creates an inherent risk of plugging the discharge screen.
z A mixing rate of two sacks per minute equates to almost 4,800 kg of barite per hour,
which is difficult to sustain on a cut and dump mixing system.
− Blender and pump units are usually brought to the location.
z Four man rig crews make it almost impossible to sustain the required mixing rate and
still monitor the rig during the circulation.
z A sufficient gel strength must be present in the mud system prior to mixing large
quantities of barite. Without adequate suspension, the majority of barite will settle to
the bottom of the mud tanks.
z Plugging can occur through the nozzle as most shallow rigs do not normally run kelly
screens.
−If a bit without jets cannot be run, then sometimes blowing the jets out with a
charge must be considered.
z The outrunning of the kick can require numerous circulations, which may cause
severe erosion of the surface lines and manifold.
z A major consideration is whether the poor-boy degasser can adequately degas the
drilling fluid. If it is unable to adequately degas, the drilling fluid circulating gasified
mud will reduce the effect of mixing barite.
z The degasser normally is not used on the low choke method until the well is nearly
dead.
z The presence of a lost circulation zone could result in additional losses of drilling
fluid and severely impede the loading of the annulus with barite.
4-26 October 2006

CIRCULATE AND WEIGHT METHOD
There is an alternative well control method to the Driller’s or Wait and Weight Method of
well control. That alternative uses some of the steps from both the Driller’s and Wait and
Weight methods, and combines them. This combination results in what is recognized as the
Circulate and Weight Method of well control.
As the name suggests, this method allows for the circulation of the well before and during
the period that the kill density mud is being mixed.
Procedure for the Circulate and Weight Method of Well Control
1. Record all kick data (SIDPP, SICP, Pit Gain), and calculate the kill density mud
requirements and drill pipe displacement schedule.
2. Crack open the choke to initiate flow.
3. Bring the pump up to the reduced speed, while using the choke to maintain the casing
pressure equal to the SICP.
4. Ensure that DPP and ICP are nearly the same. If they are substantially different,
investigate.
5. Circulate the original density mud at the reduced speed, holding DPP constant until
the influx is removed or until kill density mud is available.
6. Without stopping the pumps, change the suction lines to pump from kill density mud
tank.
7. While maintaining the drill pipe displacement according to the kill sheet, displace the
drill string with kill density mud.
8. When kill density mud reaches the bit, maintain FCP until kill density reaches the
surface.
4-27 October 2006

z A decision must be made relative to the time at which the kill density mud is
introduced to the circulation process. This decision is based on factors such as
− mud availability, and
− influx position relative to the casing seat and arrival of the gas to surface.
z Must have the personnel resources available to allow for

− maintaining circulation while the calculations are being prepared, and
− mixing kill density mud.
4-28 October 2006

MODIFIED LOW CHOKE METHOD
The Modified Low Choke Method can be used in a situation where there is no barite
available and the initial shut-in casing pressure is very near the maximum allowable. This
method combines the Low Choke Method (without addition of barite) and Step #1 of the
Driller’s Method, but allows a second smaller kick to enter the wellbore.
Note: This method is usually the only option available if the well is to be kept under control
without circulating kill mud.
Procedure for the Modified Low Choke Method of Well Control
1. Ensure that kill data have been recorded.

2. Open the choke and bring pump up to 80 percent of the drilling pump rate.
3. Adjust the choke to hold casing pressure at maximum allowable.
(MACP - SICP = Overkill in the System)
4. Read and record the circulating DPP.

Note: As the circulation continues, with CP being held constant at the maximum
allowable, the circulating DPP will decrease and eventually a second influx
will enter the wellbore.
5. After the gas reaches surface, close the choke to maintain the casing pressure at
maximum allowable. This allows the drill pipe circulating pressure to return to the
pressure noted in step 4.
6. Hold drill pipe constant until all the influx is circulated out of hole.
Note: If CP threatens to exceed maximum allowable, repeat step 3 to facilitate
bringing the second kick to surface.
4-29 October 2006

z The operation can be successful with a 200 kPa differential between the shut-in
casing pressure and MACP at depths of 1,000 metres.
z The usual pump output required is 80% of the drilling rate.
z Increased pump rates (80% of the drilling rate) will not assist in significantly
increasing the bottom hole pressure since most of the pressure loss is inside the drill
pipe and through the nozzles. The major advantage is that drilling fluid is displaced
quickly - thereby shortening the influx time of the second kick.
z The greatest advantage in running at a faster rate is that the formation underbalance
will last for a shorter period of time. The initial kick will be circulated out sooner;
therefore, the second kick will be smaller.
z Pit gains should be monitored as closely as possible. After gas reaches surface and
the pit gain starts to decrease, pit gain should level off at a value less than the original
pit gain.
z The volume of the second influx will be noticeable after the pit gain has levelled off.
z Salvage as much returning drilling fluid as possible.
4-30 October 2006

VOLUMETRIC METHOD
The Volumetric Method can be applied when an influx cannot be circulated out of the
wellbore using conventional well control methods.
Situations where the Volumetric Method can be applied are:
z drill pipe out of the hole,

z the drill pipe or bit are plugged,
z the pumps are down,
z drill pipe off bottom (trip out) swabbed kick,
z washout in drill pipe (close to surface) kick in well.
The principle of this method is to allow the gas influx to rise and expand by bleeding off
preset volumes of drilling fluid through the choke. The gas influx will migrate on its own,
but unless it’s allowed to expand, it will bring bottom-hole pressure to surface and/or fracture
the weakest formation. Gas can be bled off in increments once it is at surface, but it must be
replaced with a volume of drilling fluid with an equivalent hydrostatic pressure. This is
known as Top Kill. The Volumetric Method requires very accurate mud measurements. The
basis of control is the hydrostatic pressure exerted by a specified volume of mud and casing
pressure being held at surface.
Procedure for the Volumetric Method of Well Control
1. Record pressure and tank volume initially and throughout the operation.
2. Calculate the pressure equivalent exerted by 0.5 m3 of drilling fluid in the hole or
annulus, whichever is the case.
3. Allow the CP to increase 200 – 400 kPa above the initial SICP as the overkill pressure.
4. As CP increases slowly bleed off the pressure equivalent of 0.5 m3 of drilling fluid in the
hole while maintaining casing pressure constant (calculated in step 2).
5. Continue to bleed off fluid in increments until gas to surface.
6. When gas reaches surface, Top Kill operations should commence.
4-31 October 2006

4-32 October 2006

Instructions to Use the Kill Sheet for the Volumetric Method
1. Fill in all data on the left hand side of the kill sheet.
The overkill and pressure increase values will be a constant while using this kill sheet.
2. Calculate the volume to bleed using the formula in the lower left corner.
This will be a constant volume to bleed and enter this value in each step from # 1 to #7.
3. Wait to get a stabilized SICP and (SIDPP if applicable).
4. Enter all data in the lower left corner, SICP, Overkill, Pressure Increase and the Sum of
the Pressures.
The information for the kill sheet can now be completed with the exception of the time as
this value will constantly change as the gas migrates further up the well.
5. Wait until the SICP builds up to the total amount and also record that time.
6. After the pressure reaches the total, then go to step #1 to start the bleed off while holding
the SICP constant at the total until reaching the volume to bleed plus the starting volume
(cumulative volume).
7. After reaching the cumulative volume, record the time on the right side of this value.
8. Close the choke and allow the SICP to increase by the constant increment until the SICP
reaches that value at step #2 as well as the time above that box.
By recording the time at each stage of the bleed off for both the cumulative volume and
end of the pressure build up, a gas migration rate can be calculated using the formula in
the lower right hand corner of the kill sheet.
9. After the pressure build up reaches the value at step #2, then start to bleed off again
holding the SICP constant until the cumulative volume reaches the new value.
4-33 October 2006

10. Close the choke and allow the SICP to increase by the constant increment until the SICP
reaches that value at step #3 as well as the time above that box.
Continue with each step, bleeding off volume and allow the pressure to build up to
compensate for the loss of hydrostatic pressure of the fluid column until there is gas to
surface.
When the kill sheet is full, then start a blank sheet and enter the old valves from step #7
into step #1 of the new sheet and continue.
Never allow the SICP to drop below the value plus the overkill or another kick will enter
the wellbore.
Prepare for top kill and follow the same sequence of events by pumping in the same
volumes, allow the fluid to fall, then bleed off the pressure increment for the volume of
fluid that was pumped into the well.
4-34 October 2006

4-35 October 2006

Procedure for Top Kill
1. Pump a measured amount of drilling fluid into the hole and allow the drilling fluid to
settle.
2. Bleed off CP equivalent to the HP of the fluid pumped into the well.
3. Repeat this procedure until the pressure is reduced to zero.
The Top Kill procedure can be very time-consuming, and alternative methods of killing the
well may be considered, such as:
z stripping back to bottom (if kick was taken),

z coil tubing units (if out of the hole),
z blowing jets in the bit, and
z perforating the drill string
z There must be gas-to-surface or at least a gas cap that, when bled off, will create a
void space to be replaced with the mud in the well.
z The density used should be the original mud densities the well was under control prior
to the hoisting of the drill string.
z Many top kills cause bridges to form in the annulus. This is always a concern.
− The formation of a bridge can cause a misleading pressure reading
because, although the upper section of the well is under control, a
substantial pressure build-up or an underground flow may be beneath the
bridge.
4-36 October 2006

Overkill
Overkill is the increased pressure added to the circulating system upon initiating circulation.
z This additional pressure compensates for erratic choke adjustments and reduces the
possibility of secondary influxes.
z The amount of overkill incorporated into the system will vary depending depth and
the variance between SICP and MACP.
Trapping Overkill
During the circulation of an influx, it may become necessary to discontinue pumping and
shut in the well to evaluate potential problems.
z The choke operator can always increase the amount of overkill within the system by
closing the choke quickly as the pump is stopped.
z The additional overkill built into the system is part of the RSPP.
z The wellsite supervisor is responsible for calculating the amount of overkill
trapped within the system prior to commencing the circulation.
z Excessive overkill used in the circulation could force the circulating casing pressure
to approach the MACP and interfere with future decisions affecting the continuance
of the well control operation.
z Conversely, insufficient overkill can develop into an imbalance, permitting a
continual influx for the remainder of the circulation.
4-37 October 2006

Example of Overkill

RSPP = 3000 kPa
SIDPP = 500 kPa
SICP = 1200 kPa
Pit Gain = 3.0 m3
Circulation commenced at 13:40 hours with 600 kPa overkill.

CIRCULATING DPP CIRCULATING CP PIT GAIN
TIME (kPa) (kPa) (m3)
13:45 4100 1800 2.8
13:50 4100 2000 3.0
13:55 4100 2200 3.2
14:00 4200 2400 3.6
14:05 4000 2400 3.6
14:10 4100 2600 4.2
14:15 4100 3000 4.8
14:20 4100 3200 5.4
At 14:20 hours a problem developed, and the well was shut in as quickly as possible.
Shut-in pressures stabilized as shown below:

SIDPP = 1400 kPa
Pit Gain = 5.4 m3
SICP = 3200 kPa
z Overkill cannot be determined from the casing pressure gauge since the pressure
of 3200 kPa represents an increase in gas volume from 3.0 m3 to 5.4 m3.
z The SIDPP with a full column of drilling fluid inside the drill string provides an
accurate indication of the amount of trapped overkill.
z Any stabilized pressure above the initial shut-in DPP of 500 kPa represents
overkill.
In this example, there is 900 kPa overkill trapped in both sides of the circulating system.
Bleed of the excess overkill initially to continue circulation with a desired overkill of 600
kPa.
4-38 October 2006

Procedure to Bleed Off Overkill
1. Gradually open the choke.

2. Decrease the DPP from 1400 kPa down to 1100 kPa (SIDPP + Overkill).
3. Close the choke to record SIDPP and SICP.
4. Open choke and initiate circulation holding the SICP (recorded in step 3) constant for
the appropriate time frame, and then revert to the circulating DPP.
Example of Loss of Overkill

RSPP = 3000 kPa
SIDPP = 500 kPa
SICP = 1200 kPa
Pit Gain = 3.0 m3
Overkill = 600 kPa
CIRCULATING DPP CIRCULATING CP PIT GAIN
13:45 4100 1800 2.8
13:50 4100 2000 3.0
13:55 4600 1500 3.1
14:00 7000 1300 3.4
14:05 7000 1500 3.6
14:10 7000 1600 4.0
The loss of overkill developed when
z the choke operator over-compensated for the plugged nozzle which occurred at
13:55 hours;
z the circulating drill pipe pressure continued to increase and the casing pressure
was reduced to 1300 kPa; and
z the choke operator re-established the last casing pressure of 1500 kPa, which
was not accurate.
If the circulation is continued, an additional influx will occur for the duration of the
bottoms-up time.
4-39 October 2006

WAIT AND WEIGHT METHOD
This method was designed to impose minimum wellbore pressures during the simultaneous
circulation of both the invading fluid and kill density mud. The method is associated with
operations encountering extreme bottom hole pressures and/or large concentrations of
hydrogen sulphide — two variables that significantly increase the risk of well control
operation.
Procedure for the Wait and Weight Method of Well Control
Ensure:
• all well control data are available,
• all calculations are completed, and
• adequate kill mud density fluid is mixed to displace the well.
1. Crack open choke and initiate flow.

2. Start pump and gradually establish the reduced pump speed. Adjust the choke to
maintain constant casing pressure, and read and record DPP. This is the ICP.
3. With choke adjustments, maintain the DPP at the previously calculated values on the
DPP schedule. (Figure 4-5).
4. When the drill string has been displaced with KMD, maintain the final drill pipe
circulating pressure at a constant until kill mud reaches surface.
5. Stop the pump and close the choke.
6. Bleed off trapped pressure gradually to ensure the well is under control.
Note: When doing the wait and weight, it is suggested to re-establish the ICP after
starting to circulate as the mud properties have probably changed.
4-40 October 2006

z Circulate the kill mud according to a previously calculated DPP schedule.

z An adequate supply of mud including barite (bulk, if possible) is necessary.
z Keep the mixing time to a minimum since the gas is continually migrating upwards,
increasing wellbore pressures.
z During extended shut-in periods it is possible for the pipe to stick.
z Any pressure increase above the stabilized shut-in drill pipe should be bled off prior
to commencing circulation.
z Circulating time required to regain control is substantially reduced.
4-41 October 2006

Example of the Wait and Weight Method

DEPTH 2600 m
CASING 273 mm O.D., 60.27 kg/m, J-55
CASING SEAT 1060 m
HOLE SIZE 222 mm
PIPE SIZE 114 mm O.D., 24.7 kg/m -IF
DRILL COLLARS 196 m of 171 mm O.D. × 73 mm I.D.
PUMP SIZE 127 mm × 406 mm Duplex
PUMP FULL SPEED 60 spm 11,750 kPa
PUMP REDUCED SPEED 30 spm 3300 kPa
SIDPP 1800 kPa
SICP 3500 kPa
PIT GAIN 2.5 m3
FORMATION LEAK-OFF PRESSURE
GRADIENT 18 kPa/m
4-42 October 2006

WELL CONTROL KILL SHEET

WAIT & WEIGHT METHOD

PUMP DATA
Pump Bore Diameter 127 mm × Stroke Length 406 mm RSPP 3300 kPa
Pump Output 0.01644 m3/stroke x 30 SPMReduced = 0.4932 m3/min
Drill Pipe 2600 0.0074 19.2 39 1170
OH Annulus 1540 0.0285 43.9 89 2670
Casing Annulus 1060 0.0409 43.4 88 2640
Mud Tanks 140 283 8515
TOTAL 246.5 499 14995
CALCULATIONS
3
HP = Depth of casing 1060 m × Original Mud 1250 kg/m × 0.00981 = 12,998 kPa
Density Increase = SIDPP 1800 kPa ÷ depth 2600 m ÷ 0.00981 = 70 kg/m3
4250 − Kill Mud 1320 kg/m 3
Total Barite = Barite Required 102 kg/m3 × Volume 246.5 m3 = 25,143 kg

Number of Sacks = Total Barite 25,143 kg ÷ 40 kg/sack = 628 Sacks
RSPP 3300 kPa x Kill Mud 1320 kg/m 3
FCP = = 3485 kPa
Original Mud 1250 kg/m 3

3
HP = Casing Depth 1060 m × Kill Mud 1320 kg/m × 0.00981 = 13,726 kPa
4-43 October 2006

KILL SHEET WAIT & WEIGHT METHOD
Maximum Allowable Casing Pressure With Kill Mud (MACP) 5354 kPa
ICP 5100 kPa
FCP 3485 kPa
Figure 4-5
4-44 October 2006

KICK DATA
Figure 4-6
3 3
1800 3500 5100 3500 3485 3700 0 3700 3485 3700 0 0

CP
4-45
CP = Given
CP = Given
CP = SICP
= Given
SICP = FP - HP
SIDPP = FP - HP
SIDPP = 1800 kPa

SICP = 3500 kPa
DPP = FP - HP in DP
DPP = RSPP + SIDPP

FCP = RSPP x KMD/OMD
FCP = RSPP x KMD / OMD
NOTE: Casing pressures are difficult to predict once circulation has begun. The above pressures are for illustration only.
October 2006
OBJECTIVE FOUR
Perform the calculation used to determine the allowable amount of MACP that can be
exceeded.
EXCEEDING MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CASING PRESSURE (MACP)
Exceeding the calculated MACP is a concern in all types of well control but is more
commonly associated with shallow well control (i.e., drilling depth of 2000 metres or less,
and shallow casing seats).
Calculating “the Amount that MACP can be Exceeded By and When” after a Second
Kick Has Entered the Well
How to Calculate, the Amount that You can Exceed the MACP By and When,
The shorter setting depths of surface casing present a much greater hazard in the event of a
ruptured casing seat. Most operators do not wish to exceed the posted MACP because of the
potential dangers involved with regaining control, which, in many cases, necessitates the
drilling of a relief well.
In such circumstances when shallow surface casing strings are used, the following three
situations must be considered:
Situation # 1
With a shallow casing string, small differential between SICP and MACP, and
SUFFICIENT barite on location, consider the following:
z The Low Choke, Concurrent, or Circulate and Weight methods of well control may
be implemented.
z The circulation of additional barite in the annulus will provide an immediate increase
in HP.
z If the CP threatens to exceed the posted MACP, the choke operator should maintain
the CP at MACP until gas reaches surface, the second choke or gut line may need to
be utilized.
z During this time, the circulating DPP should be monitored to provide an indication of
the possibility of a second influx.
z Monitor pit gain/loss.
4-46 October 2006

Situation # 2
With a shallow surface casing, small differential between SICP and MACP, and NO barite
on location, consider the following”
z The Modified Low Choke Method is one option available to the operator.
z As previously discussed, the choke operator has the only option of maintaining the CP
at the posted MACP to avoid a breakdown at the casing seat.
z If a decreasing pit gain can be achieved after the initial circulation, additional
circulations should be successful in regaining control.
z If the pit gains following the first and second circulation are progressively larger, the
annulus will eventually become displaced to a full column of gas.
z After determining the annulus is completely displaced to gas, the following steps
may be implemented:
1. Stop pumping.
2. Calculate the new MACP with gas to surface.
MACP = Depth of CSG (m) × Leak-Off Gradient (kPa/m)
3. Adjust the choke to the new MACP and re-direct all gas to the flare pit.
4. Shut down all non-essential equipment to reduce the fire hazard.
5. The kill procedure will require a blender, pumper, additional crews and ample
supplies of kill fluid material.
Situation #3
With surface casing set at 350 - 460 metres, small differential between SICP and MACP, and
with NO barite on location, consider the following:
z When the gas influx is up inside the casing, the MACP can be exceeded since the HP
of the gas is considered minimal, and increased CP is required to compensate for the
loss in hydrostatic while maintaining constant BHP.
4-47 October 2006

WELL CONTROL PLANNING CHECKLIST
The following checklist may be used to improve well control planning. The wellsite supervisor
should determine who will carry out the assigned tasks.
Checklist — Equipment & Data Check

Y
E N
S O
Manifold valves and chokes arranged
Pressures recorded Hydraulic choke SIDPP______ SICP______kPa
Manifold shack SIDPP______ SICP______kPa
Recorded pressures are stabilized Three readings on casing within 200 kPa
Manifold leaking
Flare is lit
Check BOP's for leaks
Check cellar for leaks
Mud supplies ( ) gel ( ) barite ( ) caustic ( ) other
Potential H2S safety Head count of crew on location
Chain of command established
ADDITIONAL RESPONSIBILITIES
Evacuate all non-essential personnel to safe
location
Assumed leak-off gradient Monitor cellar for possible leaks in event of a poor
cement job.
Check centrifugal pumps
Check main rig pump ( ) Air pressure ( ) Temperature ( ) Lubricators
Air compressor
Accumulator Accumulator pressure kPa
Accumulator pumps Leaking Yes ( ) No ( )
Boiler ( ) Circulating pumps ( ) Sufficient water
Pipe rams closed
Tool joint locked
Pipe rams locked
Notification of regulatory authority
4-48 October 2006

Y
E N
S O
PHONE NUMBERS
Medical attention ( _______ )
Air-lift helicopter company ( _______ )
RCMP ( _______ )
Operator’s representative Office ( _______ )
Home ( _______ )
All crew members are informed of their
positions and responsibilities
Emergency safety plan has been presented to
all personnel
All personnel accounted for
Y
E N
S O
DRILLER’S CONSOLE DRILLER’S CONSOLE
Monitor pump controls & standpipe pressure
Pop valve set at kPa Maximum standpipe pressure
RSPP kPa Minimum standpipe pressure
Actual reduced pump speed SPM
Deviated hole — reciprocate drill string Check regulator pressure on annular preventer
Check BOP’s leaks — during circulation With gas to surface
Bottoms-up time Calculated mins. Actual mins.
Bottoms-up stroke Calculated mins. Actual mins.
Calculated circulating drill pipe press. + + = kPa
Actual circulating drill pipe press kPa
OTHER OTHER
4-49 October 2006

Y
E N
S O
MUD TANKS MUD TANKS
Total volume m3
Sufficient volume to circulate bottoms-up
Sufficient volume of fluid In poor-boy degasser tank
Vacuum degasser Centrifugal pump on
DURING CIRCULATION DURING CIRCULATION

Tanks gasified
Condensate contamination Colour Identification
( ) Light green ( ) Light brown ( ) Clear
Oil contamination
Tanks foaming
Sufficient volume Ensure tanks don’t overflow
Manifold lines from poor-boy degasser
leaking
Mud supplies on location Ordered by supervisor
H2S detection Monitored by
Special caution with GTS
Crews mask up
Buddy system in place
Remote choke or manifold available
Shut down all auxiliary equipment Especially electrical which is not explosion
proof
Y
E N
S O
MANIFOLD SHACK MANIFOLD SHACK
Read and record casing pressure If hydraulic choke is used
Read and record drill pipe pressure If hydraulic choke is used
Confirm flare is lit
Check valves are properly aligned
Check valves for leaks ( ) With fluid to surface
( ) With gas to surface
Check wind direction
4-50 October 2006

Y
E N
S O
Check for sound of fluid movement in No sound indicates ( ) choke is plugged
manifold ( ) annular is bridged
Notify the supervisor ( ) Yes ( ) No
SPECIAL NOTES Telephone system is used
Communication with rig is essential ( ) Yes ( ) No
If telephone is NOT used Personnel supervising manifold shack should
maintain visual contact standing by the door
4-51 October 2006

OBJECTIVE FIVE
Differentiate the advantages and disadvantages associated with each of the secondary
methods of well control.
WELL CONTROL SELECTION
Advantages and Disadvantages of Well Control Methods
Driller’s Method
ADVANTAGES DISADVANTAGES
z Simplest to teach and understand z Higher casing shoe pressure (gas
z Very few calculations kick)
z In case of saltwater, the contaminant z Higher annular pressure (gas kick)
is moved out quickly to prevent sand z Takes two circulations
settling around drilling assembly. z Maximum time for the well to be
z Minimum waiting time under pressure
z Can start the kill immediately z Longest “on-choke” time
z Minimum information required
z Trapped pressures above the
stabilized shut-in pressures can be
used as part of overkill.
z Can verify accuracy of SIDPP after
first circulation
z Overkill can be used throughout the
circulation until KMD reaches the bit
on the second circulation.
z Accuracy of the KDM can be verified
by discontinuing the circulation with
the drill string displaced and shutting
in the well.
z If pressure is pre-recorded,
adjustments can be made at this time
to reduce total circulation time.
4-52 October 2006

Concurrent Method
z Minimum waiting time for non- z Calculations are a little more
circulating time complicated.
z Kill can start as soon as Shut-In z Requires more “on choke” circulating
Pressures are established. time
z Allows large increases in mud weight z Higher casing and casing seat
(underbalanced drilling) to be made pressure than Wait and Weight
smoothly without affecting mud Method
properties z Proper implementation necessitates
z Mud condition (viscosity and gels) having the required amount of barite
can be maintained along with mud materials available on location.
weight. z Crew must be large enough to
z Less CP than Driller's Method maintain the mixing rate and monitor
z Can be easily switched to the Wait the rig during operations.
and Weight Method z Complicates calculating bottom hole
z Addition of barite reduces the HP because of two or more mud
problem of reaching the maximum densities in the drill string at the same
CP without gas to surface. time
4-53 October 2006

Low Choke Method

z Well control method is frequently z Shallow rigs rarely carry a sufficient
good for shallow drilling operations. amount of barite on location to use
z Gas can be redirected from rig. this method.
z Gunning of solids increases the risk
of discharge screen plugging.
z Gunning bottom of tanks does not
sufficiently improve density.
z Mixing rate is difficult to maintain
on a cut- and-dump mud system.
z Four-man crews make it impossible
to maintain mixing rate.
z A sufficient gel strength must be
present.
z Without adequate suspension, the
majority of barite will settle to the
bottom of the mud tanks.
z Improperly mixed barite can plug
discharge screens on the rig pump.
z Plugging can occur through the
nozzle as most shallow rigs do not
run Kelly screens.
z The outrunning of the kick can
require numerous circulations, which
may cause severe erosion of the
surface lines and manifold.
z A major consideration is whether the
poor-boy degasser can adequately
degas the drilling fluid.
z If it is unable to adequately degas,
the drilling fluid, which is circulating
gasified mud, will reduce the effect
of mixing barite.
z The presence of a lost-circulation
zone could result in additional losses
of drilling fluid and severely impede
the loading of the annular with
barite.
4-54 October 2006

Circulate and Weight Method
z Reduces the possibility of stuck pipe z Requires as many calculations as the
z Reduces possibility of plugged Wait and Weight Method
circulation path while the well is shut in z Requires more personnel to complete all
z If gas migrates during shut-in, it the tasks at the same time including
eliminates the use of the Volumetric − circulating
Method. − preparing calculations
z A known density is in the drill pipe − kill density mud
before kill density mud is calculated.
z Minimizes kill time because kill density
can be made available quickly
z Simplifies pump start-up
z Unless gas reaches surface before
enough KMD is pumped, the mud
minimizes both casing shoe and surface
pressures.
z Helps eliminate errors in
− incorrect RSPP
− lack of SIDPP because of float
Modified Low Choke Method
z The benefit of running at a faster rate is
that the underbalance of the formation
will last for a shorter period of time.
Volumetric Method
z This is a versatile well control method. z Very difficult especially in remote areas
z Designed for controlling kicks with the where perforating the drill string
drill string removed from the wellbore. requires considerable time for
z Successfully implemented when rig perforators to arrive on location and rig
personnel have been unable to circulate up.
influx because of plugged nozzles. z If viscosity is too high, it will impede
z Considerably successful in wellbores the fall of the barite after it is pumped
with lost circulation in upper sections, down the annulus.
which cannot withstand the wellbore z Top kills can cause bridges to form in
pressures associated with conventional the annulus.
circulating.
4-55 October 2006

Wait and Weight Method
z Lowest surface circulating casing z Requires the longest non-circulating
pressure. time while mixing kill density mud.
z Lowest surface circulating casing z Gas migration
seat pressure. z Pipe could stick due to settling of
z Lowest surface circulating wellbore sand, shale, anhydrite or salt while
pressure. not circulating.
z Lowest surface circulating pressures z Requires more calculations.
z Less lost circulation problems (if z If large increases in mud density are
excessive overkill is not used). required, it is difficult to complete
z Killed with one circulation. the weighting up in one stage
z Less equipment stress
4-56 October 2006

Figure 4-7
4-57 October 2006

DRILLER’S METHOD STEP #1
DRILL PIPE PRESSURE CASING PRESSURE PIT GAIN

STROKES (kPa) (kPa) (m3)
0 426 1250 3.00
100 5527 1325 2.80
200 5527 1350 2.80
300 5527 1394 2.81
400 5527 1369 2.80
500 5527 1418 2.92
600 5527 1469 3.07
700 5527 1486 3.16
800 5527 1544 3.16
900 5527 1586 3.16
1000 5527 1636 3.54
1100 5527 1679 3.71
1200 5527 1729 3.93
1300 5527 1812 4.17
1400 5527 1813 4.17
1450 5527 1863 4.56 GTS
1500 5527 1896 4.86
1600 5527 1981 5.21
1700 5527 2031 5.21
1800 5527 2098 5.71
1900 5527 2149 5.84
2000 5527 2207 5.94
2100 5527 2191 6.10
2200 5527 2249 6.10
2300 5527 2291 6.00
2400 5527 2324 6.01
2500 5527 2073 5.84
2600 5527 1889 5.01
2700 5527 1813 4.58
2800 5527 1712 4.38
2900 5527 1737 4.38
3000 5527 1796 4.38
3100 5527 1585 3.95
4-58 October 2006


3200 5527 1267 3.16
3300 5527 1091 2.65
3400 5527 1125 2.19
3500 5527 1015 1.81
3600 5527 788 1.00
3700 5527 755 0.74
3800 5527 663 0.20
3900 5527 636 0.20
4000 5527 622 0.11
4100 5527 646 0.10
4200 5527 612 0.10
4300 5527 604 0.10
4400 5527 604 0.00
4500 5527 5987 0.00
SHUT-IN 587 587 0.00
SIDPP 426 kPa

SICP 1250 kPa
Mud Density 1070 kg/m3
Original Volume 57.07 m3
Pit Gain 3.0 m3
Circulating DPP 5527 kPa
HP 9447 kPa
FP 9873 kPa
4-59 October 2006

Figure 4-8
Figure 4-9
4-60 October 2006

Figure 4-10
4-61 October 2006


0 426 1242 2.95
100 5610 1450 3.16
200 5610 1484 3.16
300 5610 1401 3.06
400 5610 1552 3.16
500 5610 1527 3.15
600 5610 1451 3.15
700 5610 1652 3.36
800 5610 1686 3.53
900 5610 1744 3.82
1000 5610 1761 3.92
1100 5610 1804 3.16
1200 5610 1879 3.16
1300 5610 1946 4.67
1400 5610 1972 4.99
1500 5610 2005 5.21
1575 5610 2189 5.53 GTS
1600 5610 2139 5.59
1700 5610 2231 5.93
1800 5610 2265 6.10
1900 5610 2315 6.10
2000 5610 2349 6.60
2100 5610 2382 6.75
2200 5610 2467 6.64
2300 5610 2525 6.84
2400 5610 2459 6.63
2500 5610 2282 5.89
2600 5610 2122 5.72
2700 5610 2114 5.72
2800 5610 2057 5.72
2900 5610 1981 5.42
3000 5610 1887 4.90
4-62 October 2006


3100 5610 1678 3.95
3200 5610 1560 3.16
3300 5610 1451 3.16
3400 5610 1501 3.05
3500 5610 1358 2.69
3600 5610 1174 2.05
3700 5610 964 1.21
3800 5610 907 0.73
3900 5610 713 0.58
4000 5610 687 0.01
4100 5610 721 0.11
4200 5610 696 0.11
4300 5610 704 0.01
4400 5610 704 0.01
4500 5610 704 0.01
SIDPP 426 kPa

SICP 1242 kPa
I.P. 8.9 mPa
Mud Density 1070 kg/m3
Original Tank Volume 57.07 m3
SI Tank Volume 60.02 m3
Pit Gain 2.95 m3
Gas Injection 17:07:37
Well SI 17:21:17
Stab 17:24:40
HP 9447 kPa
FP 9873 kPa
RSPP (100) 5184 kPa
Circulating DPP 5610 kPa
4-63 October 2006

Figure 4-11
4-64 October 2006

Figure 4-12
Figure 4-13
4-65 October 2006

VOLUMETRIC METHOD
DRILL PIPE CASING

DELTA PRESSURE PRESSURE PIT GAIN
TIME TIME (kPa) (kPa) OPERATION (m3)
12:10:15 0.00 426 1259 Stabilized 3.03
12:16:08 6.00 635 1469 First Bleed-Off 3.03
12:38:22 22.23 426 1485 Shut-In #1 3.78
12:42:00 3.63 627 1687 Second Bleed-Off 3.78
12:52:43 10.72 443 1704 Shut-In #2 4.23
12:55:32 2.82 627 1871 Third Bleed-Off 4.24
12:57:25 1.88 544 1855 Shut-In #3 4.84
12:58:43 1.30 627 1930 Fourth Bleed-Off 4.84
13:00:28 1.75 552 1880 Gas-to-Surface 4.84
13:07:23 6.92 485 1955 Gas-to-Surface 5.19
13:09:50 2.45 477 1964 Gas-to-Surface 5.28
13:12:37 2.22 477 1997 Gas-to-Surface 5.62
13:15:20 2.28 477 2006 Gas-to-Surface 5.8
13:19:06 3.90 443 2014 Gas-to-Surface 5.81
13:26:37 7.52 460 2056 Gas-to-Surface 5.81
13:32:49 6.20 452 2106 Gas-to-Surface 5.98
13:33:22 0.82 435 2081 Gas-to-Surface 5.96
13:34:11 0.82 426 2081 Gas-to-Surface 5.98
13:36:04 1.88 426 2073 Gas-to-Surface 5.97
Figure 4-14
4-66 October 2006

Figure 4-15
4-67 October 2006

Figure 4-16
4-68 October 2006

Figure 4-17
4-69 October 2006

OBJECTIVE SIX
Explain troubleshooting methods when using the driller’s method of well control.
TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN USING THE DRILLER’S METHOD
During the circulation of the well using the first circulation of the Driller's Method, it is the
circulating DPP that controls the bottom-hole pressure. Good field practice dictates both the
DPP and CP should be monitored and recorded at reasonable time intervals.
It is a common problem that those who operate the chokes have a tendency to monitor only
the DPP. A proper evaluation of any well control problem requires a comparison of the
circulating pressures to identify the actual problem and to re-establish the correct circulating
DPP.
There are considerable differences between deep rig and shallow rig well control that affect
decisions to re-establish the circulating DPP on-the-fly or to shut in the well for a complete
assessment.
The most important point to remember is
z not to continue to circulate if there is a reasonable doubt of the validity of the

circulating DPP.
The stress, associated costs, and potential risks are considerable, and in many cases, the
overkill should be trapped by shutting in the well. This will give the supervisory personnel
sufficient stress-free time to make a rational decision after properly evaluating the recorded
information.
Plugged Nozzle
The plugging of a nozzle will result in a substantial increase in the circulating DPP. If the
choke operator opens the choke while attempting to maintain DPP at the same pressure value
prior to the nozzle plugging, the CP will be reduced. The result will be a reduction in the
bottom hole pressure. A reduction in the bottom hole pressure will allow a second influx to
enter the wellbore.
4-70 October 2006

The solution to the problem of reduced bottom hole pressure from a plugged bit nozzle in the
Driller’ Method is to do the following:
1. Shut down and re-establish the pressures. If a second kick has entered the well, the
SIDPP will be the only reliable shut-in pressure.
2. When pressures have stabilized, crack open the choke and start the pump at the
reduced rate. Keep the CP constant until CP and DPP have been stabilized. Then
switch to holding the new DPP constant.
Example of a Plugged Nozzle
SIDPP = 600 kPa

SICP = 2200 kPa
RSPP = 3000 kPa
Overkill = 600 kPa
TIME CIRCULATING CIRCULATING

DPP CP
(kPa) (kPa)
2130 4000 2600
2132 4200 2800
2134 4200 2800
2136 4200 2800
2138 5400 2800 Plug Nozzle
2140 4600 2000 Over Compensation
2142 5400 2800 Re-establish
2144 5400 2900
4-71 October 2006

Unplugged Nozzle
If the bit nozzle becomes unplugged, and the choke operator closes the choke in an attempt
to maintain a constant DPP, the circulating pressure will increase. This causes higher
annular and bottom hole pressures.
The solution to the problem of higher annular and bottom hole pressures from unplugging the
bit nozzle in the Driller’s Method is to do the following:
1. Maintain the CP constant at the value prior to the bit unplugging.

2. Record the DPP, and maintain this new pressure until the influx has been circulated
out of the wellbore.
Bridges
Bridging in the annulus is a common problem encountered during both conventional well
control operations and on blowouts. The relative positions of the bridge (above or below the
gas influx) can influence the warning signs at surface.
If the bridge occurs with kick below, the warning signs will indicate that
z DPP will slowly increase due to the compressibility of the gas,

z CP will decrease, and
z pump speed will begin to decrease.
Partial circulation and migration of gas may occur and cause pressure fluctuations on the CP.
If pumping continues, excessive pressures may further complicate the problem by causing
lost circulation below the bridge.
Most operators choose to work the pipe and attempt to free the bridge without applying
excessive pump pressure.
4-72 October 2006

If the bridge occurs with kick above, the warning signs will indicate that
z the circulating DPP will increase rapidly due to the incompressibility of the drilling
fluid, and that
z the CP will decrease in a slow, consistent manner, particularly if the choke is opened
to maintain the original DPP.
Example of Well Bridging with Kick Below Bridge
SIDPP = 800 kPa

SICP = 2800 kPa
Overkill = 600 kPa
Reduced Pump Speed = 60 SPM
RSPP = 4000 kPa
Circulation commenced at 0420 hrs.
TIME CIRCULATING CIRCULATING PVT

DPP CP (m3)
(kPa) (kPa)
0420 4600 2800 5.0
0422 5200 3400 4.8
0424 5200 3600 5.0
0426 5200 3700 5.1 (Bridge)
0428 5200 1400 4.6
0430 5800 1200 4.1
0432 6800 800 3.6
The example illustrates circulation continued without detection of the bridge. If the gas
influx is below the bridge, as is suspected due to the lag in the increased circulating drill
pipe pressure, the continued pumping jeopardizes the wellbore integrity in the open hole
section that extends from the bridge down to total depth.
4-73 October 2006

Plugged Choke
The indicators of a plugged choke, whether manual or remote operated, are the same except
that the operator of a manual choke is influenced by the sound and vibration of fluid
circulating through the manifold.
Plugged chokes are characterized by
z a continual increase in circulating DPP and CP.

z no tank gain even though the CP is increasing. Tank volume will decrease.
z no sound of fluid circulating through the manifold.
z pump speed decreasing as circulating pressures increases.
z the flare continually decreasing and eventually extinguishing itself if the gas has
reached the surface.
If the choke cannot be unplugged by repeated opening/closing sequences, it will become

necessary to switch chokes.
The preferred operation is to shut-in the well and establish new circulating pressures after
reviewing recorded pressures, realizing that manifold and remote choke panel gauges may
read differently for the same reason.
The plugged choke should be isolated with closed valves to prevent any potential fluid and
pressure interference.
4-74 October 2006

Example of a Plugged Choke
SIDPP = 400 kPa

SICP = 1700 kPa
Overkill = 500 kPa
Reduced Pump Speed = 32 SPM
RSPP = 2200 kPa
Circulation commenced at 1415 hrs.
CIRCULATING DPP CIRCULATING CP PVT

1420 3100 2200 4.0
1422 3100 2100 4.2
1424 3100 2300 4.1
1426 3100 2500 4.4
1428 3200 2600 4.2 (Plugged Choke)
1430 3600 3000 3.2
1432 4000 3400 2.2
1. The well should be shut in, the manifold re-arranged, and the second choke made
ready for circulation. Then the circulating system will have an excessive amount of
trapped pressure or overkill.
2. The overkill must be bled off through the choke until the DPP equals 900 kPa
(original SIDPP plus overkill).
3. Engage the pump. The choke operator should maintain the corresponding CP until
the DPP stabilizes. Then revert to the circulating DPP, which should approximately
be 3100 kPa.
Correlation of Pressures
Any time a new set of gauges is used during a circulation, the accuracy should always be
verified.
When a hydraulic choke becomes plugged, and it is necessary to revert to a manual choke in
the manifold without shutting in the well, pressures are correlated in the following manner.
4-75 October 2006

Procedure for Correlation of Pressure
Casing Pressure — Casing Pressure — Drill Pipe Pressure

(Hydraulic Choke) (Manifold) (Manifold)
Figure 4-18
1. After opening the second choke and isolating the plugged choke, communication
must be established between the manifold and rig floor by either phone or hand
signals.
z Although the hydraulic choke is plugged, the gauges are still operative.
2. Check the DPP gauge on the hydraulic panel to verify the amount of trapped pressure.
z This trapped pressure will show up on the DPP gauge in the manifold shack.
3. Correlate the casing pressures.
z The CP gauge in the manifold must be correlated to the casing pressure on the
choke panel.
4. The choke operator then maintains the new circulating drill pipe pressure in the
manifold as the circulation is continued.
4-76 October 2006

Example of Gauge Correlation
The hydraulic choke gauges on the rig floor indicate the choke has become plugged. The
circulating pressures in the manifold were not recorded during the kick, but for the
purpose of this example, relative values will be provided.
Hydraulic Choke Manifold Gauges

Circulating DPP = 4600 kPa Circulating DPP = 4000 kPa
Circulating CP = 2800 kPa Circulating CP = 2400 kPa
While changing chokes, pressures on the hydraulic gauges decreased as follows:
z Circulating DPP = 4000 kPa

z Circulating CP = 2200 kPa
When communication is established between the manifold and rig floor, the first priority
is to establish the last accurate CP on the hydraulic gauge, which should be 2800 kPa.
The casing gauge in the manifold should read 2400 kPa although a different reading gives
a relative value.
At this point, the choke operator can maintain the new circulating DPP of 4000 kPa in the
manifold and continue with the circulation.
Note: In many cases, switching of chokes is done by re-establishing the pressures used
on the hydraulic gauges to those in the manifold. As noted in the previous
example, this procedure would add an additional 600 kPa to the circulating system.
4-77 October 2006

Washed Choke
The problem of washed chokes in hydraulic chokes, whether they are manufactured with
porcelain choke plates or tungsten carbide plates, are common to both shallow and deep rig
well control.
z In shallow wells where the choke plates are subject to wear because of high flow,
porcelain choke plates are utilized.
z Tungsten carbide plates in hydraulic chokes are utilized to withstand similar flow
rates, and at the same time, those flow rates are accompanied by high mud densities
and a high solids content.
The washed choke warning signs are when the circulating DPP and CP begin decreasing
(usually by an equal amount).
To compensate for this drop in pressure, the choke is usually in the almost-closed position.
The switching of chokes is complete in the same manner previously discussed for the
plugged choke.
4-78 October 2006

Troubleshooting Summary
PROBLEM INDICATORS SOLUTION
Plugged Nozzle z DPP increases drastically z Shut down and re-establish
z CP reduces slightly with pump accurate shut-in pressures, then
stroke decrease re-establish new circulating
pressures
Unplugged Nozzle z DPP decreases z Re-establish last accurate CP
z CP and pump strokes remain and maintain new reduced DPP
the same or increase slightly
Bridge z DPP increases z Work pipe without applying
z rapidly if gas above the bridge excessive pump pressure
z slowly if gas below the bridge
z CP decreases and fluctuates
z Pump speed decreases slowly
z Fluid returns decrease
z Flare decrease or dies
Plugged Choke z DPP and CP increase z Shut-in well
continually z Switch chokes
z Pump speed decreases slightly z Establish new circulating
z No tank increase pressures
z Flare goes out if gas at surface z Isolate plugged choke
z Correlate pressure gauges
Washed Choke z DPP and CP decrease equally z Shut-in well
z Pump speed remains the same z Switch chokes
z Establish new circulating
pressures
If the following problems occurred during the circulation of a kick, you would expect to
observe the following if you used Step #1 of the Driller’s Method while attempting to hold
DPP constant.
CHOKE FLARE
PROBLEM DPP CP SPM PVT POSITION (IF GTS) OTHER
Plugged Nozzle 8 9 9 8 almost open
Unplugged
Nozzle 9 8 8 9 almost closed
Bridge dies or sound in
8 9 9 9 8 almost open decreases manifold
Plugged Choke sound in
8 8 9 9 almost open dies manifold
Washed Choke 9 9 8 8 almost closed increases
4-79 October 2006

Problems associated with observing casing pressure as well as drill pipe pressure.
CHOKE
PROBLEM DPP CP SPM PVT POSITION OTHER
Plugged Nozzle 9
8 same or same normal same pump working harder
Unplugged 8 pump not working as
Nozzle 9 same or same normal same hard
Bridge 8 9 9 decreases closed pump working harder
Plugged Choke no sound in manifold
8 8 9 9 open shack
Washed Choke same or choke closed with pump
9 9 same increases closed running
4-80 October 2006

1. Choose and describe the most appropriate method of well control based on the following
information.
Depth = 628 m
Casing set at = 210 m
MACP = 1400 kPa
SIDPP = 400 kPa
SICP = 1200 kPa
Tank Gain = 4.5 m3
Temperature = -25°C
The mud-mixing pump is down for repairs and another one is being hot shotted out to the
rig. It should be there in about 2 hours.
What well control method will you use?
Describe the procedure for the method you have chosen.
4-81 October 2006

information.
Depth = 1480 m
MACP = 4200 kPa
SIDPP = 400 kPa
SICP = 800 kPa
Tank Gain = 2 m3
90 m3 premix = 1390 kg/m3
What well control method will you use?
4-82 October 2006

3. Complete the chart below by indicating what you would expect to observe if you used
Step 1 of the Driller’s Method and the following problems occurred during the circulation
of a kick.
CHOKE FLARE
PROBLEM DPP CP SPM PVT POSITION (if GTS) OTHER
Plugged Nozzle
Unplugged Nozzle
Bridge
Plugged Choke
Washed Choke
Complete the chart below by indicating what you would expect to see if you observed
circulating CP and DPP when the following problems occurred during the circulation of a
kick.
CHOKE
Plugged Nozzle
Unplugged Nozzle
Bridge
Plugged Choke
Washed Choke
4. State one advantage for using the following well control methods.
METHOD ADVANTAGE
Driller’s Method
Concurrent
Low Choke
Modified Low Choke
Volumetric
Wait and Weight
4-83 October 2006

5. State the procedure for bleeding-off the excess amount of trapped overkill.
The following pages are sample forms to practice well control calculations.

(Driller’s Method)
DEPTH 1450 m
CASING 273 mm OD, 60.27 kg/m, J-55
CASING SEAT 465 m
HOLE SIZE 222 mm
PIPE SIZE 114 mm OD, 24.7 kg/m, -IF
DRILL COLLARS 196 m of 171 mm OD × 73 mm ID
PUMP SIZE (Bore × Stroke) 127 mm × 406 mm DUPLEX
PUMP FULL SPEED/PRESSURE 60 spm/8600 kPa
PUMP REDUCED SPEED/PRESSURE 30 spm/2600 kPa
SHUT IN DRILL PIPE PRESSURE (SIDPP) 300 kPa
SHUT IN CASING PRESSURE (SICP) 1600 kPa
PIT GAIN 2.5 m3
LEAK-OFF GRADIENT 18 kPa/m
OVERKILL 600 kPa
4-84 October 2006

Well Total Depth m Casing Depth m Date:

PUMP DATA
Pump Bore Dia mm × Stroke Length mm RSPP kPa
3 3
Pump Output m /stroke × SPMReduced = m /min
Drill Pipe
OH Annulus
Casing Annulus
Mud Tanks
Pre-Mix Tanks
TOTAL
CALCULATIONS
Fracture Pressure = Depth of Casing m × Leak-Off Gradient kPa/m = kPa
3
HP = Depth of Casing m × Original Mud kg/m × 0.00981 = kPa
MACP = Fracture Pressure kPa - HP kPa = kPa
Density Increase = SIDPP kPa ÷ Depth m ÷ 0.00981 = kg/m3
Kill Mud = Density Increase kg/m3 + Original Density kg/m3 = kg/m3
4250 x Density Increase kg/m 3
Barite Required = = kg/m3
4250 − Kill Mud kg/m 3
=
3 3
Total Barite = Barite Required kg/m × Volume m = kg
Number of Sacks = Total Barite kg ÷ 40 kg/sack = sacks
MR = Number of Sacks sacks ÷ Minutes(R) Minutes = Sacks/min
ICP = RSPP kPa + SIDPP kPa + OK kPa = kPa
⎡ RSPP kPa x Kill Mud kg/m 3 ⎤
FCP = ⎢ ⎥ + OK kPa = kPa
⎢
⎣ Original Mud kg/m 3 ⎥
⎦
Fracture Pressure = Depth of casing m × Leak-off Gradient kPa/m = kPa
HP = Depth of casing m × Kill Mud kg/m3 × 0.00981 = kPa
Maximum Allowable Casing Pressure with Kill Mud (MACP) kPa

4-85 October 2006

KICK DATA
SIDPP kPa WELL DEPTH m RSPP kPa @ spm

3 3
SICP kPa ORIGINAL MUD kg/m Overkill kPa PIT GAIN m
4-86
CP = Given
SICP = SIDPP
SIDPP = SIDPP
CP = SICP + OK
SIDPP = 600 kPa

SICP = 1400 kPa
CP = SIDPP + OK
SICP = SIDPP + OK
SIDPP = SIDPP + OK

Tank Gain to Zero
October 2006
KICK DATA
SIDPP kPa WELL DEPTH m RSPP kPa @ spm

3
SICP kPa ORIGINAL MUD kg/m3 Overkill kPa KILL MUD kg/m
4-87
SICP = 0
SIDPP = 0
SIDPP = 0
SICP = SIDPP
SICP = 300 kPa

SIDPP = 300 kPa
CP = SIDPP + OK
CP = SIDPP + OK
CP = SIDPP + OK

Pressure Bled Off
October 2006

CONCURRENT METHOD
DEPTH 2170 m
CASING SEAT 960 m
HOLE SIZE 222 mm
PUMP FULL SPEED/PRESSURE 60 spm / 8600 kPa
PUMP REDUCED SPEED/PRESSURE 30 spm / 3300 kPa
PIT GAIN 2.5 m3
GRADIENT 18 kPa/m
4-88 October 2006


PUMP DATA
Pump Bore Dia mm × Stroke Length mm RSPP kPa
3 3
Pump Output m /stroke × SPMReduced = m /min
Drill Pipe
OH Annulus
Casing Annulus
Mud Tanks
TOTAL
CALCULATIONS
HP = Depth of casing m × Original Mud kg/m3 × 0.00981 = kPa

MACP = Fracture Pressure kPa - HP kPa = kPa
Density Increase = SIDPP kPa ÷ Depth m ÷ 0.00981 = kg/m3
Increase this circ. = 3
= kg/m3
(4250 x PO m /min + (40 x MR) sack/min
3 3
New Mud Density = OMD kg/m + MDI kg/m = kg/m3
Remaining Density Increase = Density Increase kg/m3 - Increase this circ. kg/m3 = kg/m3
Remaining SIDPP = Remaining Density Increase kg/m3 x Depth m x 0.00981 = kPa
ICP = RSPP kPa + SIDPP kPa = kPa
3
3300 kPa x New Mud Density kg/m
FCP = + Remaining SIDPP kPa = kPa
Original Mud Density kg/m 3

3
HP = Casing Depth m × New Mud kg/m × 0.00981 = kPa
Maximum Allowable Casing Pressure this circulation (MACP) kPa
4-89 October 2006

Maximum Allowable Casing Pressure This Circulation (MACP) kPa

Strokes to Bit From Pre-recorded Information STROKES
Circulating Rate Strokes Per Minute spm
ICP kPa
FCP kPa
4-90 October 2006

CONCURRENT METHOD
KICK DATA
SIDPP kP a SICP kPa RSPP kPa

3 3
OVERKILL kPa KILL MUD kg/m ORIGINAL MUD kg/m DEPTH m
1800 3500
DP CSG
4-91
CP = SICP
CP = Given
CP = Given
SICP = Given
SICP = FP - HP
SIDPP = FP - HP
SICP = 3500 kPa

SIDPP = 1800 kPa
ICP = RSPP + SIDPP
October 2006

WAIT AND WEIGHT METHOD
DEPTH 2600 m
CASING SEAT 1060 m
HOLE SIZE 222 mm
PIT GAIN 2.5 m3
GRADIENT 18 kPa/m
4-92 October 2006



PUMP DATA
Pump Bore Diameter mm × Stroke Length mm RSPP kPa

Pump Output m3/stroke x SPMReduced = m3/min
Drill Pipe
OH Annulus
Casing Annulus
Sub Totals
Mud Tanks
TOTAL
CALCULATIONS
HP = Depth of casing m × Original Mud kg/m3 × 0.00981 = kPa
MACP = Fracture Pressure kPa - Hydrostatic Pressure kPa = kPa
Density Increase = SIDPP kPa ÷ depth m ÷ 0.00981 = kg/m3
4250 x Density Increase kg/m 3
Barite Required = = kg/m3
4250 − Kill Mud kg/m 3
Total Barite = Barite Required kg/m3 × Volume m3 = kg
Number of Sacks = Total Barite kg ÷ 40 kg/sack = Sacks
Initial Circulating Pressure = RSPP kPa + SIDPP kPa = kPa
RSPP kPa x Kill Mud kg/m 3
Final Circulating Pressure = = kPa
Original Mud kg/m 3

3
Hydrostatic Pressure = Casing Depth m × Kill Mud kg/m × 0.00981 = kPa
Maximum Allowable Casing Pressure with Kill Mud (MACP) kPa
4-93 October 2006

KILL SHEET ― WAIT & WEIGHT METHOD
DATE:
Maximum Allowable Casing Pressure With Kill Mud (MACP) kPa

Strokes to Bit From Pre-recorded Information STROKES
Circulating Rate Strokes Per Minute spm
ICP kPa
FCP kPa
4-94 October 2006

KICK DATA
SIDPP kPa SICP kPa RSPP kPa

3
OVERKILL kPa KILL MUD kg/m3 ORIGINAL MUD kg/m DEPTH m
CP
4-95
CP = Given
CP = Given
CP = SICP
= Given
SICP = FP - HP
SIDPP = FP - HP
SIDPP = 1800 kPa

SICP = 3500 kPa
DPP = FP - HP in DP
DPP = RSPP + SIDPP

October 2006
CHAPTER 5
UNUSUAL WELL
CONTROL OPERATIONS
Chapter 5: Unusual Well Control Operations
UNUSUAL WELL CONTROL OPERATIONS
OUTCOME
Apply well control practices to handle a kick in conjunction with unusual down hole
circumstances.
OBJECTIVES
1. Apply well control procedures to manage the kick while the drill string is off-
bottom.
2. Apply well control procedures to manage the kick when equipment problems
occur.
3. Apply well control procedures to manage the kick when experiencing lost
circulation.
4. Describe the methods used for locating lost circulation zones in the well.
5. Describe the methods of well control associated with unusual down hole
circumstances.
6. Apply well control procedures to handle a kick while running casing or a liner,
cementing operations and using various water and oil based mud.
OBJECTIVE ONE
Apply well control procedures to manage the kick while the drill string is off-bottom.
INTRODUCTION
Unusual well control operations are those unique circumstances, which create dangerous well
control situations. Most of the discussion to this point has dealt with ideal situations, which
do exist in some well control operations. More frequently, however unusual problems are
encountered.
5-1 October 2006

These can be identified as things such as

z equipment malfunctions,
z improper well design, and
z debris from the flowing formation or other zones possibly disrupting normal
procedures.
A number of possible failures can be quickly diagnosed by observing pressure trends, and
carefully maintaining records during each well control incident. So, the proper use and
maintenance of the equipment during the whole drilling process, as well as during the kill
operation, will help the supervisor to evaluate each situation as it arises.
A large number of well control operations are conducted with the drill string off bottom. Off
bottom kicks are usually introduced into the well as a result of
z filling the hole improperly,

z calculating fill-up volumes incorrectly for the trip sheet,
z failing to adhere to the calculated fill-up volumes on the trip sheet,
z causing swabbing by using excessive tripping speed, and
z exposing a lost circulation zone which makes it difficult to accurately monitor the hole
fill volumes.
With the drill string partially removed (drill pipe off bottom) and the well shut-in, correct
evaluation of the situation depends on the following considerations and observations.
z While on bottom, the mud density was sufficient to contain formation pressure.
z If bottoms up was circulated prior to hoisting the bit, and no pit gain was detected, the
mud density must be sufficient (assuming a flow check was done).
z If a 10-minute flow check was conducted after 5% * of the drill string is pulled (and
done regularly from then on), a pit gain should have been detected in the event an
underbalanced situation did exist.
The following is an example of a well control situation with the drill string partially removed and
the well shut in.
*
Refer to EUB Directive D36
5-2 October 2006

Example
Situation
Drill string partially removed (drill pipe off bottom) and the well shut-in.

During the trip, the well commenced to flow with the bit located 616 metres from surface
and was shut in. Information was recorded as follows:
SIDPP = 800 kPa
SICP = 1000 kPa
Pit Gain = 4.0 m3
Observations
With the drill string off bottom, the accuracy of the 800 kPa shut-in drill pipe pressure is
suspect because of the following:
z The SIDPP of 800 kPa represents the volume of gas located from the bit to total depth,
not formation pressure.
z In this case, the SIDPP will increase proportionally to the volume of gas between the
bit and total depth.
Calculations of a density increase using the SIDPP will be invalid regardless of the depth
selected.
(a) Density Increases at 1200 metres
Density Increase = 800 kPa ÷ 1200 metres ÷ 0.00981
= 70 kg/m3
Kill Density = 70 kg/m3 + 1080 kg/m3 = 1150 kg/m3
(b) Density Increase at 616 metres

Density Increase = 800 kPa ÷ 616 metres ÷ 0.00981
= 130 kg/m3
Kill Density = 1080 kg/m3 + 130 kg/m3 = 1210 kg/m3
3
z Any mud density selected will be excessive considering 1080 kg/m was capable of
maintaining pressure control while on bottom.
z The 1210 kg/m3 mud density could develop lost circulation, considering it represents a
130 kg/m3 increase above original density.
5-3 October 2006

Procedure to Regain Control of the Well
1. Circulate bottoms-up from bit to surface with the original mud density.
Shut in to evaluate.
z After circulation is completed and a 10-minute flow check conducted, two common
situations can arise:
i) The well is dead
(a) At this point, the drill string should be returned to bottom, but the presence of
gas bubbles in the lower section of the wellbore is a strong possibility.
(b) As the drill string is lowered and the gas bubble is penetrated, rapid pit gains
can develop at the surface resulting from the gas being displaced from the open
hole to the smaller annular space. This occurs because of the close tolerance
between wellbore and drill collars.
ii) The well is flowing.
(a) shut the well in

(b) circulate or strip in
If the well does not exhibit immediate signs of pressure or flow, the wellsite supervisor may
decide to verify the potential of the gas below the bit prior to confirming whether the drill string
will be run in or stripped in.
5-4 October 2006

Procedure to Verify the Potential of Gas Below the Bit
1. Install an inside blowout preventer.

Work the pipe 10 - 15 minutes.
z if the well remains dead at the end of this time, the supervisor may choose to
− run in 5 or 10 stands,
− check for flow, and
− circulate bottoms-up if necessary.
z This operation should continue until the bit is on bottom, at which time the well should be
to circulate and a trip margin added if necessary.
z If working the pipe for 10 to 15 minutes initiates flow, the decision should be to strip the
pipe to bottom in accordance with good oilfield practice.
z As the pipe is stripped with the inside blowout preventer in the string, returns to the trip
tank equalling the wet displacement should be observed. The fluids in excess of the wet
displacement per stand indicate gas is beside the drill collars and could necessitate
circulating bottoms-up.
z When running in a well that has had the top section killed, the well must be
monitored every stand.
5-5 October 2006

OBJECTIVE TWO
Apply well control procedures to manage the kick when equipment problems occur.
EQUIPMENT CONSIDERATIONS
If an equipment problem is not properly diagnosed and the correct action taken to either correct
the problem or find another safe way to perform the kill operation, the situation can rapidly
worsen as illustrated in the following example.
Stripping on shallow rigs can be restricted due to the stack configuration.
z A very common stack arrangement includes casing bowl, pipe rams, drilling spool, blind
rams and annular preventer.
z If the annular preventer fails during the stripping operation, the well would be shut in with
the pipe rams without an appropriate bleed-off below the spool other than the casing bowl
side outlet valve.
z Consider replacing the blind rams with pipe rams to enable ram-to-ram stripping
operations, or repair the annular preventer.
z A better alternative is a stack arrangement that includes an additional set of pipe rams
above the spool, installed prior to drilling out casing.
An alternative method of working the drill string to bottom uses the mixing and displacing of
barite pills to the annulus to lower the CP.
z As the drill string is lowered, the barite pills will be displaced to surface where they can
be easily monitored and treated out over the shale shaker, at which time another pill can
be used if necessary.
5-6 October 2006

Example of Barite Pill
Total Depth = 980 m

Surface Casing = 218 mm set at 182 m
Leak-Off Gradient = 18.1 kPa/m
SIDPP = 1000 kPa
SICP = 1000 kPa
Hole Size = 200 mm
Bit located at = 485 m
Drill Collars = 168 m - 159 mm × 76 mm
Drill Pipe = 114 mm × 24.7 kg/m IF
Spotting a barite pill in the annulus with 1300 kg/m3 density would require the following
volume:
⎛ SICP (kPa) ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ x Annular Capacity (m 3 /m)
⎝ (Pill Density (kg/m 3
) − Mud Density (kg/m 3
) x 0.00981 ⎠
Spotting another pill of equal density in the drill collars and drill pipe requires the following
volume:
1000 kPa
Height of the 1300 kg/m3 mud = 464 m
(1300 kg/m − 1080 kg/m 3 ) x 0.00981
3
Length in drill pipe 464 m - drill collar length

464 m - 168 m = 96 m
Volume in drill collars 168 m × 0.0045 m3/m = 0.756 m3
Volume in drill pipe 296 m × 0.0074 m3/m = 2.190 m3
Total volume for pipe and collars 0.756 m3 + 2.19 m3 = 2.94 m3
In this situation, an 8.4 m3 pill of 1300 kg/m 3 would reduce the surface pressure, assisting
with the running-in of the drill string.
If well control measures have to be implemented with the drill string off bottom, the wellsite
supervisor must consider each variable when deciding the course of action.
Regardless of the method used, it is of greatest importance, and in accordance with accepted well
control practices, to return the drill string to bottom to regain complete control.
5-7 October 2006

OBJECTIVE THREE
Apply well control procedures to manage the kick when experiencing lost circulation.
LOST CIRCULATION
If a formation in open hole breaks down during a well control operation, or lost circulation causes
a kick situation, formation fluid can begin flowing into the annulus from the kicking formation
and into the lost circulation zone at an uncontrolled rate. This is known as an underground
blowout.
All conventional methods of well control are based on the principle of maintaining a constant
bottom hole pressure.
z Therefore, in severe lost-circulation areas, conventional well control procedures do not

apply.
Underground Blowout
If lost circulation develops, either as a result of exceeding the MACP and fracturing a zone, or if
some weaker zone exists in the wellbore, the situation becomes more complex.
The weak or fractured zone’s inability to hold wellbore pressure will prohibit the application of
sufficient HP to keep the productive zone from admitting another kick into the wellbore. Also, it
will prevent circulating the formation fluid out of the hole.
If a zone breaks down, the usual result is an Underground Blowout. This is defined as a
situation where an uncontrolled flow of formation fluids is entering the wellbore from one zone
and leaving the wellbore by escaping into another zone.
A critical concept in understanding why underground blowouts occur and in making remedial
plans to cure such events, is the fact that the wellbore will not withstand the HP of a full column
of kill weight mud. Because of this, normal kick control procedures cannot be successful.
Control of an underground blowout is dependent on pumping mud of sufficient density, volume
and rate to outrun the underground flow.
5-8 October 2006

Indications that an underground blowout may have occurred during a well kick or well control
procedure include the following:
z SIDPP may be equal to or higher than SICP.

z CP may build up on initial shut-in, then decline as the weakest zone is fractured and
begins to take fluid.
z Circulating pump pressure is unstable and does not respond to choke changes.
z Circulating pressure is lower than previously recorded at the same rate.
z Mud losses are apparent.
z Minor or no changes are apparent in casing pressure when circulating.
Underground blowouts can be of two types:
1. downward-flowing, from a higher-pressure upper zone into a lower-pressure zone deeper

in the well
2. upward-flowing, from a deep, high pressure zone into a shallower formation
The first type may occur when an abnormally pressured zone is left uncased, and drilling
continues into a lower-pressure zone. It is a potential problem when drilling into reservoirs that
have been on production, and have reduced pressures as a result.
The second type may be caused by:
z late recognition of a kick which may result in large kick volumes, with consequently
higher shut-in pressures.
z mishandling of a kick could allow casing pressure to exceed MACP, allowing fracture of
upper, weaker zones.
z an inadequate design of a well with casing strings set too shallow in formations with
integrity too low to withstand imposed pressures.
z bullheading a kick into a substantial section of open hole and possibly breaking down
some upper zone.
z internal wear of the casing by the drill string to the point of rupture by pressure below the
casing burst pressure rating. In this case, weaker zones are exposed to fluids.
5-9 October 2006

Identifying Lost Circulation Zones, Flowing and Thief Zones
Before making a plan to remedy an underground blowout, it is necessary to identify the origin of
the flow as well as the thief zone. The distance between the zones needs to be known in order to
make effective plans.
In the case of up-flowing underground blowouts, identifying the flowing zone may be simple.
z If the well has been under control, and no equipment malfunction or human error has
allowed HP to fall to below a level that will allow some zone in the open hole to flow, any
new flow probably comes from the last zone that was penetrated.
In other cases, the situation may be more complex and the use of a variety of tools may be
required.
To reduce the risk of lost circulation the following guidelines apply:
z Drill with the lightest practical mud density.

z Control mud properties to achieve lowest practical plastic viscosity, yield point and gel
strength.
z Control hoisting and running-in speeds.
z Do not attempt to use fine lost circulation materials. They are similar to drilled solids and
simply add to the viscosity.
z Screen out coarse material as soon as possible after a batch treatment.
z Locate the point of lost circulation before spotting any type of pill that could set up
around the pipe.
If the lost circulation is severe during a well control operation, the flow from the high pressure
zone must be stopped before the lost circulation zone can be sealed.
Usually, the first step in shutting off the underground flow is the spotting a high density barite
plug between the kicking zone and the lost circulation zone when the kicking zone is below the
lost circulation zone.
5-10 October 2006

BARITE PLUG
Well placed barite plugs have been used as a solution to sealing a kicking zone with a non-
permeable barite bridge above the zone. The technique consists of mixing a plug with barite and
phosphate in fresh water to provide rapid settling. Since fresh water will not support the barite in
a static condition, the settled barite forms an almost impermeable seal and helps provide HP to
control formation pressure.
Advantages of a barite plug are
z increased HP,
z low cost,
z ease of placement,
z ease of drillability, and
z commonly used materials.
Some disadvantages are that
z bulk barite and a pumping unit are required,

z salt water contamination will prevent settling, and
z improper displacement can plug drill pipe.
5-11 October 2006

Mixing and Pumping Recommendations
1. Calculate volume for a minimum 60 m settled barite.

2. Mix caustic soda in mix water to adjust pH between 9 and 10.
3. Mix 2 kg SAPP/m3 mix water.
4. Mix bulk barite through cement hopper to desired density. The density of an open-hole
plug should range between 2200 and 2600 kg/m3, although best settling results are
obtained with 2200 kg/m3 density.
5. Under-displace plug by 0.3 m3. Maintain a positive pressure on the drill pipe to prevent
the plug from falling on vacuum.
6. Displace the plug at a minimum 1.0 m3/min. and preferably 1.5 m3/min.
7. Pull pipe quickly above the plug and circulate for several hours, if it is possible to do so.
The recommended mixture for desired densities is shown in the following table.
DENSITY SETTLED FRESH WATER BARITE

kg/m3 VOLUME (%) m3/m3 slurry kg/m3 slurry
2200 38 0.64 1510
2300 40 0.61 1650
2400 43 0.57 1810
2500 46 0.54 1960
2600 50 0.50 2120
8. After determining the well is dead, go back in the hole to near the top of the barite plug.
Set a balanced cement plug and pull out. (This step is sometimes not required if barite
plug is holding.)
9. After cement sets up, run in and tag top of cement plug.
5-12 October 2006

GUNK PLUGS
If a barite plug fails to seal off the kicking formation in an underground blowout, the next
approach to consider is setting a gunk plug.
This diesel-bentonite slurry has been successfully used to seal the wellbore, particularly in
underground salt water flows. When dry bentonite is blended into diesel oil, the bentonite will
not yield, and the slurry remains a fluid with a fresh water spacer. This allows the slurry to be
pumped to the bit with relatively low pressures. When the slurry leaves the bit and is exposed to
water in the annulus, the bentonite hydrates rapidly. This causes the slurry to become extremely
viscous. The extreme viscosity of the slurry slows the formation flow and as more water enters
the annulus, provides a complete seal.
Gunk plugs, unlike barite plugs, will lose strength over time under downhole conditions.
The slurry is jet-mixed with a cementing unit.
− This normally requires 19 sacks of bentonite per cubic metre of diesel. Slurry volume
usually ranges from 3.5 m3 to 25 m3.
− The greatest disadvantage of pumping a gunk plug is the danger of the slurry contacting
water inside the drill string. If this occurs, the pumping pressure will become excessive
and result in a plugged drill string.
− For this reason, diesel spacers are pumped ahead and behind the slurry when using
water-based mud.
− With oil-based mud, diesel spacers are not necessary.
5-13 October 2006

Procedure for Setting a Gunk Plug
1. Rig up both the cementing unit and the rig pumps so that either can be used to displace
the slurry.
z A third pump should be connected to the annulus.
2. Pump 0.80 m3 to 1.60 m3 of diesel into the drill string as a spacer.
3. Jet mix the slurry to 1320 kg/m3.
z The slurry can be batch-mixed or mixed on the run.
4. Tail in with 1.60 m3 to 3.20 m3 diesel spacer.
5. Displace the slurry with mud at a rate of 0.48 to 0.80 m3/minute.
6. Begin pumping mud into the annulus at 0.8 m3/minute as soon as the slurry reaches the
bit.
z This lowers the surface pressure and could provide water for slurry dehydration.
z A cement slurry should be squeezed through the bit to provide a permanent seal as
soon as it is determined that the underground flow has been shut off.
5-14 October 2006

OBJECTIVE FOUR
Describe the methods used for locating lost circulation zones in the well.
LOCATING LOST CIRCULATION ZONE
Several methods for locating the point of lost circulation are available including the following:
z Spinner Survey
z Temperature Survey
z Radioactive Tracer Survey
z Hot Wire Survey
z Pressure Transducer Survey
Although it is good practice to locate the lost circulation zone, there are several reasons why
surveys are not run more often:
z First, considerable time may be spent getting necessary equipment to the rig, and a
deliberate loss of mud is required for some surveys.
z Second, the records of these surveys are sometimes difficult to interpret.
z Third, due to abnormal subsurface pressure conditions, some tools cannot always be run.
Spinner Survey
The Spinner Survey is conducted by running a small spinner attachment into the well on a single
conductor cable in a way that the reamed rotor will spin or turn if there is any horizontal motion
of the mud. The RPM of the rotor are recorded on film as a series of dashes or spaces. Until the
point of lost circulation is reached, this will be very slow.
There is a definite speed-up of the rotor at the point of loss. However, there are two
disadvantages:
1. It requires a deliberate loss of large volumes of mud.

2. It is not effective where lost circulation material is already present in the mud.
5-15 October 2006

Temperature Survey
The temperature survey depends on a subsurface thermometer for measuring the difference in the
mud temperature and the formation temperature. It is conducted by running a sensitive element
in the hole that changes its resistance as the temperature changes.
Two surveys are conducted
One establishes the temperature gradient of the well after the mud has come to equilibrium with
the formation. The other is run immediately after adding fresh cool mud to the well. A sharp
temperature discrepancy will then occur at the point of lost circulation.
Radioactive Tracer Survey
Radioactive surveys for locating the point of lost circulation consist of making two gamma ray
surveys.
1. A base log is run before the introduction of radioactive material.

z A slug of mud containing radioactive material is then pumped down the hole.
2. A new log is run, and high concentrations of the radioactive material will be located at the
lost circulation zone.
z This method requires expensive equipment and deliberate loss of mud to obtain the
information.
Hot Wire Survey
The hot wire tool is essentially a calibrated resistance wire that is sensitive to temperature
changes. It is run to a desired depth, and the resistance is recorded. Mud is then pumped into the
hole.
If the tool is above the point of lost circulation, cooler mud will flow by it, changing the
resistance.
If the resistance does not change, the tool is below the lost circulation zone.
This tool can be used in any type of mud, but a large volume of mud is required while making the
survey.
5-16 October 2006

Pressure Transducer Survey
This type of survey involves using a short cylinder open at the top and swaged at the bottom to
restrict the flow of mud through the tube. There is a window fitted with a neoprene diaphragm
on one side of the tube. On the diaphragm, there is an electrode that moves back and forth
between two fixed electrodes.
As the pressure differential varies across the diaphragm, the potential varies in the electric circuit.
This indicates the rate of mud flow and the point at which the mud becomes static.
OBJECTIVE FIVE
Describe the methods of well control associated with unusual down hole circumstances.
PLUGGED DRILL PIPE OR BIT
Occasionally, the drill pipe will become plugged during a well-killing operation. When this
occurs, the plug must be removed, or an alternate circulation path must be created by perforating
the deepest unplugged interval of pipe.
The most common cause is barite plugging as a result of the addition of large volumes of barite
without adding sufficient suspension agents.
z Kelly screens should prevent such occurrences.
Perforating the drill string is usually done at the lowest possible depth in an attempt to find an
alternate circulation path.
z If the perforation is within casing, the charge should be minimized to prevent casing
damage.
Many operators have attempted to eliminate plugged bit nozzles by using a primer cord charge on
wireline to blow the jets out of the bit.
z This procedure requires sufficient time to rig up a logging unit.

z Surface pressure must be controlled during this time.
5-17 October 2006

HOLE IN DRILL STRING
A hole or washout is generally the result of erosion from the circulation of drilling fluid. When a
washout occurs during drilling operations, a subsequent decrease in pump pressure will be noted.
When a washout occurs during a well control operation, three problems must be considered:
z Continued circulation through the washout may sever the pipe.

z If the washout is high up in the drill string, a complete circulation will be impossible to
obtain.
z If the washout occurs in the lower portion of the drill string, the problem is slightly
reduced.
However, the increased hole size will decrease the circulation pressure at a constant pump output.
To control the well properly, a new circulating pressure must be established periodically to
account for the change in hole size.
Solving the problem of a washout in the drill string is difficult. The solution depends upon the
location of the hole and the severity of the problem.
z If the hole in the drill string is near surface, it may require stripping the pipe from the
hole and replacing the defective joint or joints.
z If the drill string does not contain a float, it will be necessary to spot a pill or set a plug in
the drill pipe.
z If the hole is near the bottom of the drill string, the time required to strip out and replace
the defective pipe must be weighed against the increasing rate of the CP.
5-18 October 2006

STRIPPING & SNUBBING
The drill string must be at or near bottom to have a successful well control operation.
Occasionally, due to improper hole fill practices or a reduction in hydrostatic pressure due to
swabbing, a well will begin to flow while the drill string is being hoisted.
The method used to return the pipe to bottom under pressure and under its own weight is called
stripping. The drill string could also be stripped out of the hole in the event of a washout.
If wellbore force exceeds the drill string weight, the operation is referred to as snubbing.
First Consideration
z The SIDPP will determine which method will be used to return the pipe to bottom.
z If the surface pressure is excessive, or the drill string is a considerable distance from
bottom, the effective weight of the drill string may not be sufficient to lower the pipe into
the hole against the wellbore pressure.
Second Consideration
z If the effective weight of the drill string is greater than the upward force of the well
pressure when a tool joint enters the annular preventer, the closing pressure in the annular
must be set appropriately to curtain the wellbore pressure. This can be determined by
attempting to move a tool joint through the annular preventer after the correct hydraulic
closing pressure has been set.
There will be cases when the well pressure will allow the pipe body to move through the annular
preventer but will not allow the pipe to move when the tool joint enters the annular preventer. In
this case, a combination of preventers will be required for the stripping operation.
5-19 October 2006

Stripping and Snubbing Procedures
There are three methods to use when stripping or snubbing pipe into the hole:
z Using the annular preventer.

z Using the annular preventer and a ram preventer.
z Using two ram preventers.
Stripping In With Annular Preventer
The annular preventer is preferred for stripping operations because it is a faster and simpler
operation. Also, there is less wear and tear on this preventer during stripping operations.
Pressure from the closing unit (accumulator) is controlled by the regulator valve which will
maintain a specific closing pressure on the annular preventer.
z The regulator will allow hydraulic fluid to flow back and forth between preventer and
fluid reservoir to control pressure.
z This adjustment of pressure allows tool joints to pass through the packing element.
With the pipe out of the hole and the blind ram closed, the following steps should be taken when
stripping into the hole:
5-20 October 2006

Procedure for Stripping In With Annular Preventer (Low SICP)
1. Install an inside BOP on top of the first stand of drill collars and run the stand to the top
of the blind rams.
2. Close the annular preventer and open the blind rams.
3. Reduce the closing pressure on the annular preventer until the packing element just spurts
out drilling fluid when the pipe is stripped in.
4. As the pipe is stripped into the well, bleed mud from the well at regular intervals to
maintain a constant bottom-hole pressure.
z A manual choke can be used to control the volume of bleed-off, which should
equal the wet displacement of the pipe.
z Some fluid seepage will occur as the tool joints pass through the preventer.
5. When lowering pipe into the hole, do not exceed 10 metres per minute.
z A slower rate should be used when passing tool joints through the preventer.
6. Reduce the closing pressure on the annular preventer from time to time.
7. Proceed with stripping until bottom is reached while keeping an account of the mud
displaced.
z Every stand of pipe should displace mud.
z If no returns are noted, fluid loss to a zone has occurred.
Annular to Ram Stripping
The regulator on the annular preventer should be adjusted so that sufficient pressure is supplied
to just maintain a seal around the pipe. However, 10,500 kPa closing pressure is most commonly
used each time the annular preventer is closed.
After closing the ram preventer with 10,500 kPa closing pressure, the manifold regulator should
be adjusted to bring the ram preventer closing pressure to a range of 700 to 3500 kPa, depending
upon well pressure. This procedure requires two (2) regulators on the accumulator.
z This extends the life of the ram rubbers.
5-21 October 2006

Procedure for Annular to Ram Stripping
1. Reduce the annular preventer closing pressure to the minimum sealing pressure.
2. Strip the pipe in the hole until the tool joint reaches the top of the annular preventer.
3. Bleed off proper mud volume as the pipe is stripped.
4. Close the ram preventer with 10,500 kPa closing pressure.
5. Bleed the pressure between the preventers to 0 kPa.
6. Reduce the closing pressure on the ram preventer to sealing pressure (700 kPa to 3500
kPa).
7. Open the annular preventer.
8. Strip the pipe through the ram preventer until the tool joint is below the annular preventer.
9. Close the annular preventer with 10,500 kPa closing pressure.
10. Pressure up between the preventers to the current wellbore pressure.
zReduce the annular preventer closing pressure to the sealing pressure as the
pressure is increased between the preventers.
11. Open the ram preventer.
Stripping Using Ram Preventers (When Two Sets of Pipe Rams are Available)
Stripping in the hole using ram preventers requires close attention to accurate measurement.
Ram preventers are normally used if the CP is in excess of 10,500 kPa.
5-22 October 2006

Procedure for Stripping Using Ram to Ram Preventer Combination
1. Measure the distance from the rotary table to the tops of the upper and lower rams on the
outside of the BOP.
2. Reduce the closing pressure on the ram to 3500 kPa.
3. With the upper ram closed, lower a joint of pipe, slowly measuring it until it is
approximately 0.6 metres above the upper ram.
4. Stop lowering the pipe and close the lower ram.
5. Bleed off pressure between the rams, and open the upper ram.
6. Lower the joint while measuring its location until the tool joint is between the two rams.
7. Stop lowering the pipe, and close the top ram.
8. Through the kill line, pressure up between the two rams to well pressure with the mud
pump.
9. Open the bottom ram.
10. Continue the procedure by repeating steps 3 to 9.
Snubbing Operations
Mechanical snubbers are available in several sizes, the smallest capable of exerting
approximately 22,000 daN force. Larger sizes range upward to units capable of exerting 155,000
daN force.
Pipe is snubbed into the hole until there is enough string force below the blowout preventers to
allow for normal stripping operations.
5-23 October 2006

Special Equipment Considerations
A decision must be made about which type of float will be installed in the drill string for the
stripping operation.
The following lists identify floats which have been used successfully above the stabbing valve. It
also lists their advantages and disadvantages.
DP Flapper-Type Float Valve
z ease of milling up
z can be worked through pipe if sleeve is installed
z requires specially bored sub
z can be pumped through
Inside BOP

z difficult to mill up
z can be stabbed on stabbing valve
z restricted ID
z some are wireline retrievable
Otis DP Plug
z plug receptacle can be run above drill pipe float valve during normal operations
z back pressure valve can be pumped down drill string to seat in receptacle
z wireline retrievable
z receptacle with back pressure valve plug in place can be made-up on top of stabbing
valve
5-24 October 2006

Stripping Guidelines
SURFACE PRESSURE LENGTH OF PIPE RECOMMENDED

TO BE STRIPPED OPERATION
7000 kPa or less Annular Preventer
7000 kPa - 10,500 kPa (a) 300 m Annular Preventer
(b) 300 m or more Annular/Ram Preventer
Combination
10,500 kPa or more Ram to Ram
Preventer Combination
5-25 October 2006

Example of Snubbing Drill Collars and Pipe
While tripping pipe, the hole was improperly filled, resulting in a kick situation with no pipe in the hole.
What string weight is required to overcome the surface pressure and allow pipe to be stripped in under the
following conditions?
Depth = 2195 m
Drill Pipe = 114 mm, 24.71 kg/m, H-90
Drill Collars = 171 mm × 64 mm, 156.1 kg/m
SICP = 2800 kPa
Friction Force in Annular Preventer = 5000 daN
π
0.785 =
4
Snubbing Drill Collars
Force = Pressure × Area
Area = 0.785 × Diameter × Diameter
= 0.785 × 0.171 m × 0.171 m
= 0.0229 m2
Force = 1 kPa = 1000 Pa
= 1 Pa = N/m2
Therefore
1 kPa = 1000 N/m2
N/m 2
2800 kPa x 1000 x 0.0229 m 2
1 kPa
= 64,120 N
1 daN
64,120 N x = 6412 daN
To convert 64,120 N to a string force which can be read on the weight indicator: 10 N
1 daN = 10 N
Therefore, the total string force required to begin stripping the pipe in the hole is equal to the string force plus the
friction force in the annular preventer.
Total String Force = 6412 daN + 5000 daN

= 11,412 daN
Note: An easier method to use when calculating the string force in the metric system is to use the following
formula:
Force = Pressure × Area × 100
where: Force is in daN,
Pressure is in kPa,
Area in m2
Snubbing Drill Pipe
Tool Joint Diameter = 152.4 mm = 0.1524 m
Area = 0.785 × 0.1524 × 0.1524 m
Force = Pressure × Area × 100
= 2800 kPa × 0.785 × 0.1524 m × 0.1524 m × 100
= 5105 daN
Total string force required to strip drill pipe in the hole is 5105 daN + 5000 daN = 10,105 daN
5-26 October 2006

Bleed-Off During Snubbing or Stripping Operations
Volumetric Method
This method is used while allowing for an equal displacement of mud to be bled off from the
well as the drill string is lowered into the hole. Wet displacement tables should be used (Wet
Displacement = Capacity of Pipe + Dry Displacement).
The greatest problem with this method is that relatively small volumes of mud are involved,
and during a bleed-off, more mud is usually allowed to escape than is necessary.
z When this occurs, additional formation fluids are allowed to enter the wellbore, and
pressure may increase in the annulus.
Pressure Method
This method is preferred to the volumetric method because it uses a simpler and more
accurate method of controlling bottom-hole pressure. It uses a cementing pump connected to
the choke line and is used to pump through the choke at a pressure slightly greater than the
well pressure.
z The choke line valve at the stack is opened, and stripping or snubbing operations
begin.
z Since the choke is maintaining a pressure slightly greater than the well pressure, no
additional formation fluids may enter the wellbore.
z The bleed-off volume is returned to the cementing pump mixing (suction) tank and
can be monitored accurately to ensure correct displacement volumes.
5-27 October 2006

PUMP DOWN FOR REPAIRS
The possibility exists, however remote, that the pump(s) become inoperable during a kick
situation. Measures must be taken to allow the kick to migrate and expand while preventing
a second kick from entering the wellbore.
Procedure for Pumps Down - No Float
1. The capability to accurately measure fluid return volumes is essential for the
Volumetric Method to be applied.
2. Build in overkill by allowing DPP to increase 700-1400 kPa above the SIDPP.
3. Maintain constant DPP by bleeding off drilling fluid through the choke.
4. Calculate the pressure exerted by 1 m3 of drilling fluid in the annulus.
5. When gas is at surface, any pressure that is bled off must be replaced by an equivalent
hydrostatic volume of drilling fluid (to maintain BHP).
6. Maintain accurate records of pressure and fluid volumes. Plot a graph of casing
pressure versus bleed-off volume.
7. Calculate the annular pressure exerted by 1 m3 of drilling fluid:
Annular capacity = 0.0300 m3/m
Mud gradient = 1415 kg/m3 × 0.00981 = 13.88 kPa/m
1 m3
1 m3 fluid in annulus = = 33.3 m
0.0300 m 3 /m
Therefore, every m3 exerts 13.88 kPa/m × 33.3 m, or 463 kPa.
Figure 5-1 illustrates the bleed off volumes and corresponding pressures. In this case, the
overkill was 1400 kPa; therefore:
the maintained DPP (kPa) = SIDPP (kPa) + 1400 (kPa)
= 1350 kPa + 1400 kPa
= 2750 kPa
CP (kPa) = SICP (kPa) + 1400 kPa
= 2800 kPa + 1400 kPa
= 4200 kPa
5-28 October 2006

Figure 5-1
5-29 October 2006

Procedure for Pump Down - Float in String
The procedure is similar to the previous situation except that DPP cannot be used.
1. The capability to accurately measure fluid return volumes is essential in order to

implement the Volumetric Method.
2. Calculate the volume of drilling fluid in the annulus equivalent to a HP of 700 kPa.
3. Allow the CP to increase to build in an overkill of 700-1400 kPa.
4. Bleed off a 700 kPa equivalent of drilling fluid as the CP increases, allowing the gas
influx to migrate and expand.
5. Maintain accurate records of pressures and fluid volumes.
6. Any gas that is bled off must be replaced by an equivalent volume of drilling fluid to
maintain BHP overbalance.
Figure 5-2 illustrates the bleed off volumes and corresponding pressures.
Figure 5-2
5-30 October 2006

Example
Maximum formation leak-off pressure is 17,585 kPa with 1415 kg/m3 at the shoe and when
3620 kPa is applied at surface in the leak-off test. When gas reaches the surface, the maximum
allowable casing pressure becomes:
Length of Gas Bubble at Surface = 320.14 metres
HP acting at the casing seat is as follows:
(1006 m - 320.14 m) × 1415 kg/m3 × 0.00981 + (320.14 m × 2.5 kPa/m)
= 9520 kPa + 800 kPa

= 10,320 kPa
MACP
= 17,585 kPa - 10,320 kPa = 7625 kPa
MIGRATION OF GAS BUBBLE

Casing Mud Bubble Bubble Top of Bubble Bottom-
Pressure Removed Volume Pressure Bubble Length Hole
Pressure
(kPa) (m3) (m3) (kPa) (m) (m) (kPa)
2,800 0.00 2.00 31,501 2067.16 129.39 31,819
3,500 0.00 2.00 31,501 2017.18 137.39 32,519
4,200 1.42 3.42 18,422 1024.64 121.71 33,283
4,900 1.45 4.87 12,937 579.03 169.10 33,455
5,600 1.45 6.32 9,969 314.77 219.44 33,572
6,300 1.45 7.77 8,109 130.33 269.79 33,698
7,000 1.45 9.22 6,834 11.96 320.14 33,825
5-31 October 2006

DIVERTER SYSTEM
Shallow gas formations in some areas present dangerous situations since gas can be at
surface with little or no warning, sometimes resulting in a fire or explosion. The use of a
Diverter System will provide a means of directing gas or influx away from the rig to the flare
pit.
Regulations also require a Diverter System (Class I & IA)
z when surface hole is drilled below 450 m.

z when drilling to total depth in certain areas to specified horizons.
Additional information on diverter systems is available in IRP Vol. 3 – Heavy Oil and Oil
Sands Operations.
The Diverter System consists of the following components:
z conductor casing set at a minimum depth of 20 m

z annular preventer and drilling spool installed on conductor casing
z quick-opening valve (HCR acceptable) installed on the spool, minimum 75 mm
nominal O.D.
z flare line, minimum 75 mm nominal O.D. to flare pit, a minimum 50 m distance away
from the rig.
Note: The well cannot be shut in with this system.
5-32 October 2006

ROTATING HEAD
The main purpose of a Rotating Head, as with a Diverter System, is to provide a safety
measure against fire and/or explosion during drilling operations.
Rotating Heads are required when drilling with fluids such as
z natural gas,
z air,
z foam or mist.
Rotating Heads are installed above the BOP stack and are not intended for well control
measures other than for low pressure (3500 kPa) situations. Rotating Heads are not to be
confused with Rotating BOPs, which are used extensively for underbalanced drilling.
EUB regulations require a reserve drilling fluid equal to at least 1.5 times the hole volume be
readily available while Rotating Heads are in use.
5-33 October 2006

SHALLOW GAS FORMATIONS
Shallow gas formations can present a danger because the gas pocket is generally at a depth
that may allow a kick to rapidly unload mud from the wellbore, and closing in the well might
result in fracturing the formation. Either occurrence can result in a serious well control
situation.
Since the hole is shallow, the gas can be sent to the surface with very little warning. When
drilling a surface hole, the driller should be EXCEPTIONALLY ALERT in watching for
signs of a well kick. In wells where the flow line sensor is used, it will warn of the kick early
enough to go to the diverter or close the well in. The pit volume gain will show just a little
later because the mud tanks must fill.
The following considerations should be utilized when drilling shallow gas formations:
z Try to keep the flow sensor operating reliably.

z If in doubt, shut the pumps off and make a flow check.
z Shallow gas can occur in known fields and may be caused by gas migration from
deeper high pressure zones on offset wells.
z It is necessary to use a diverter to control a shallow gas kick.
5-34 October 2006

OBJECTIVE SIX
Apply well control procedures to handle a kick while running casing or a liner, cementing
operations and using various water and oil based mud.
WELL CONTROL WHILE RUNNING CASING OR A LINER
Well control problems may be experienced while running a string of casing or a liner. This
can cause many complications for the wellsite supervisor and drilling crews. Most casing
strings are equipped with one or two floats which prevent the flow of fluids into the casing
string. If one of the floats fails, or a float is not to be used, a sudden decrease of hydrostatic
head could occur due to the flow of fluid into the casing string.
z A casing swedge of the proper thread type equipped with a valve must be on the
rig floor while running casing or a liner. The swedge and valve should be
accessible so that they can be stabbed into the casing string as quickly as possible.
z A cross-over from casing thread to drill pipe thread may allow the use of the stabbing
valve.
Running speeds and casing reciprocation should be at a rate that will not induce breaking
down any weak formations (surge pressure) since creating a loss of circulation could lead to
a kick. Mud returns should be closely monitored while running casing. A loss of returns or
an increase in flow returns, or rate could be indicators of a potential kick.
Careful consideration should be given to the course of action selected.
Options
z circulate out the kick

z strip the casing in the hole
z use of volumetric method
z use of top kill
z strip out the casing and strip or snub in a kill string
z use of HP in the wellbore (conduct an extended flow check) is the only well control
option available while running a slotted liner.
5-35 October 2006

WELL CONTROL DURING CEMENTING OPERATIONS
The primary method of well control during cementing operations is using the hydrostatic
head of the fluid column. Loss of HP could create a situation where an influx or kick may
occur.
Causes for the loss of hydrostatic head include
z insufficient annulus fill-up,

z failure of the casing floats,
z lost circulation,
z gas cut fluid in the annulus,
z swabbing caused by casing reciprocation,
z incorrect spacer densities,
z cement dehydration, and
z improper cement design.
The BOPs should not be removed until the cement has set and the possibility of a kick
occurring has been eliminated.
It may not be possible to conventionally circulate out a kick during cementing operations.
The method of well control must be chosen. Some of the methods to consider are
z top kill,
z the volumetric method,
z displacing the cement out of the casing if the top wiper plug has not been dropped, or
z shutting the well in and allowing the cement to set.
A discussion of well control procedures should be a part of the pre-job safety meeting prior
to running and cementing casing.
5-36 October 2006

KICK BEHAVIOUR IN VARIOUS MUDS
Oil - Base Muds
Under normal drilling conditions with water-based drilling fluids, a kick is recognized by an
increase in flow or tank volume, along with other indicators, including gas monitoring.
When an oil-based drilling fluid is used, the common gases such as methane, carbon dioxide
and hydrogen sulphide are soluble in oil and diesel fuel. Depending on the temperature and
pressure of the influx, and the type of gas, kick detection becomes more difficult because the
gas stays in solution until near surface. This causes the hole to unload rapidly, usually
without warning.
IRP Vol. 14 – Non Water Based Drilling and Completions/Well Servicing Fluids
Kick Detection and Control
Rigs drilling with oil based drilling fluids must be equipped with return flow rate
sensors and alarms set to give early alert to increased annular flow. Rig crews must be
given specific training on the need for and use of this equipment.
Hydrocarbon gases are soluble in all oils used for drilling fluids. When a gas influx occurs at
the bottom of the well it may largely go into solution if the influx rate is not large compared
to the circulating rate.
Therefore, an increase in flow may not be immediately apparent at surface. The gas can stay
in solution with the oil mud until it gets close to surface and the hydrostatic pressure drops
below the effective bubble point of the solution. The gas then breaks out and can cause a
rapid increase in flow rate followed quickly by gas to surface.
It is important that equipment and training be provided to enable early detection and fast
response to increases in annular flow.
Figure 5-3 graphically illustrates the behaviour of gas in the systems.
5-37 October 2006

Figure 5-3
5-38 October 2006

Figure 5-4
Advantages of Oil-Base Muds in Well Control
ADVANTAGE EXPLANATION
More forgiving on trips when drilling near balance No migration if gas is in solution
through low permeability zones.
Easier to take care of the well while waiting to No migration if gas is in solution
circulate.
Lower CP. Maximum pressure may be shut-in pressure.
Lower pressures on shoe Maximum pressure on shoe often occurs at time of
shut-in.
Easier to control Less gas to pass through choke — none if casing
pressure stays above the bubble-point pressure of
mixture.
As well conditions get worse and pressures rise,

more gas will stay in solution.
Easier on surface equipment — reduces slugging Some gas comes out of solution downstream of the
choke
All, if the casing pressure stays above the bubble-

point pressure mix.
Less chance of sticking the drill pipe.
5-39 October 2006

Gel Chemical Systems
Gel Strengths
When a drilling fluid has been subjected to zero or near-zero shear rates over a period of
time, the fluid tends to develop a rigid or semi-rigid gel structure.
z This property of drilling fluids is called thixotropy.
Gel strength readings taken at 10-second and 10-minute intervals on the Fann VG meter
provide a measure of the degree of thixotropy present in the fluid.
Signs of trouble in a mud system are usually reflected by progressive gels or flash gels.
A wide range between the initial and 10-minute gel readings is called progressive gels, and is
an indication of solids buildup.
z If the initial and 10-minute gels are both high with little difference between the two,
flash gels have occurred, indicating flocculation.
The magnitude of gelation, as well as the type of gel strength, is important to the suspension
of cuttings and weight material. Gelation should not be allowed to reach any higher than
necessary to carry cuttings and provide HP.
Excessive gel strengths can cause complications, such as the following:
z entrapment of gas in the mud

z excessive pressures when breaking circulation after a trip
z reduction of the rate at which sand and cuttings settle in the settling pit, resulting in
solids buildup
z excessive swabbing while tripping out of the hole
z excessive pressure surges while tripping in the hole
z inability to get logging tools to the bottom
5-40 October 2006

Contaminated Mud
The drilling fluid should be able to resist contamination from
z the formations penetrated,

z the liquids and gases contained in the formations, and
z any materials added to the system during routine operations.
The most significant contaminant problem is drilled solids, especially if the solids are small
or if they react chemically with the drilling fluid.
Severe contamination also can be caused by
z externally added materials like cement.

z high concentrations of certain gases (CO2, H2S, etc), which were trapped in the
formation, entering the mud system.
Contamination of Cement Slurries
Fluids that are optimum for drilling are often chemically incompatible with the slurries used
to cement casing. Poor cement jobs can easily jeopardize the drilling and completion
operations. Drilling fluids that are chemically incompatible with the cement should always
be separated from the cement by a spacer fluid.
Poor control of rheological properties, fluid loss, and hole washouts can also cause
difficulties during cementing.
Polymer Muds
Polymer muds with high shear values and elevated gel strengths have been known to dampen
or even mask the transmission of kick pressures to surface, making shut-in pressure readings
difficult to obtain — particularly the DPP.
High gel strengths can also contribute to excessive swabbing and surge pressures unless
tripping speeds are reduced.
5-41 October 2006

1. If a kick developed while all the pipe was out of the hole, what string weight would be
required to overcome the surface pressure and the annular preventer friction in the
following situation?
Depth = 1825 m
Drill Pipe = 114 mm, 20.46 kg/m
Drill Collars = 158.8 mm × 57.2 mm, 134.66 kg/m
SICP = 1250 kPa
Friction in Annular Preventer = 3500 daN
2. 500 metres of pipe was tripped out of a 1500 m well when a flowcheck showed that the
well was flowing. By the time the well was shut in, there was a 3 m3 pit gain. The
driller circulated bottoms-up from bit to surface with the original mud density. After
the circulation, a 15-minute flow check was conducted with no sign of flow from the
wellbore.
Describe the method of getting back to bottom to do a complete bottoms-up.
5-42 October 2006

3. Calculate the volume of mud to bleed-off in order to bring the gas bubble to surface
and still maintain a constant bottom hole pressure with 700 kPa of overkill.
Depth = 1850 m
SIDPP = 1000 kPa
SICP = 1800 kPa
Hole Size = 200 mm
Drill Pipe = 114 mm, 24.71 kg/m, 1,630 m
Drill Collars = 166 mm × 64 mm, 215 m
Intermediate Casing = 244 mm, 53.57 kg/m at 940 m
Pit Gain = 1.0 m3
MACP = 5000 kPa
(a) Find the bleed off volume for the collars in open hole.
(b) Find the bleed off volume for drill pipe in open hole.
(c) Find the bleed off volume for drill pipe in casing.
5-43 October 2006

CHAPTER 6
UNDERBALANCED AND
LATERAL DRILLING
Chapter 6: Underbalanced and Lateral Drilling
UNDERBALANCED AND LATERAL DRILLING
OUTCOME
Explain well control procedures to handle a kick while under balanced and lateral drilling.
OBJECTIVES
1. Describe theory and recommended practices for underbalanced drilling.

2. Explain the well control measures used during underbalanced drilling including
tripping procedures.
3. Explain the well control measures used during lateral drilling and coiled tubing
overbalanced drilling.
OBJECTIVE ONE
Describe theory and recommended practices for underbalanced drilling.
INTRODUCTION
Underbalanced drilling, as defined by the Alberta Energy and Utilities Board EUB ID 94-3,
is stated as:
“When the hydrostatic head of a drilling fluid is intentionally designed to be lower

than the formation being drilled, the operation will be considered to be
underbalanced drilling. The hydrostatic head of the drilling fluid may be naturally
less than the formation pressure or it can be induced. The induced state may be
created by adding natural gas, nitrogen or air to the liquid phase of the drilling fluid.
Whether induced or natural this may result in an influx of formation fluids which
must be circulated from the well and controlled at surface.”
6-1 October 2006

Whether induced or natural, underbalanced drilling (UBD) is advantageous for:
z drilling pressure-depleted formations that are easily damaged by conventional drilling,

z drilling formations which normally have lost circulation problems, and
z providing production and reservoir information.
The popularity and projected growth of UBD has initiated new safety, environmental and
equipment standards, and practices as a result of the efforts by the EUB, service companies
and operators.
The EUB has developed EUB ID 94-3 that addresses environmental and drilling concerns.
The Drilling and Completions Committee has developed a set of Recommended Practices,
IRP Vol. 4 – Well Testing and Fluid Handling which address safety, and environmental and
operating guidelines for the industry.
IRP Vol. 6 – Critical Sour Underbalanced Drilling provides guidelines for sour
underbalanced drilling.
6-2 October 2006

THEORY OF UNDERBALANCED DRILLING
Underbalanced drilling maintains a hydrostatic pressure in the downhole circulating system

that is less than the pressure formation.
Underbalanced conditions can be generated by circulating with low density fluids such as
fresh water or light hydrocarbons (gas or oil) in formations with high pressures. In
underpressured reservoirs, underbalance can be generated by injecting a gas into the
circulating system, effectively lowering the HP. The gas most commonly used is nitrogen.
Compressed air or natural gas are also used as the circulating media for certain drilling
applications (usually extremely hard formations), but has limitations such as hole cleaning
ability due to depth, water flow, etc.
Essentially, underbalanced drilling relies on the surface mechanical equipment to maintain

well control rather than hydrostatic mud column pressure. Special surface equipment is
required for well control, solids separation, cutting samples, and storage and disposal of
produced fluids.
Well control situations caused by underbalanced drilling are applicable to vertical, deviated
and horizontal wells, and all pressure calculations must be done using true vertical depth
(TVD).
The EUB defies a drilling operation one which exceeds 100 metres of new hole or
penetration of more than one potential hydrocarbon-bearing formation is penetrated, must
conform to EUB Directive 036.
6-3 October 2006

EQUIPMENT
The following has been re-written from EUB ID 94-3 and IRP Vol. 4 – Well Testing and
Fluid Handling.
Surface BOP Equipment
Underbalanced drilling requires surface equipment that will
z permit drilling to proceed while controlling annular pressure,

z allow connections to be made with the well flowing or shut in,
z provide back up control in case of diverter failure,
z provide equipment which allows for control of annular pressure to be varied so that the
rated working pressure of surface equipment is not exceeded,
z provide a way to bleed off pressure or kill the well without the diverter system, and
z provide the means to safely shut in the well.
Refer to EUB Directive 036 for BOP stack configuration which are based on well depth and
anticipated pressures. The minimum drilling and coiled tubing stack configurations are
illustrated in Figures 6-1 and 6-2 respectively.
In addition to the normal BOP stack, the equipment must include
z a circulating return line and diverter (is not a BOP and cannot be used for primary well
control)
z a bleed-off line to enable flaring in the event a diverter line becomes obstructed or
another operation requires bleeding off separately from the production vessel, and
z the ability to equalize pressure between the diverter line and below the lowest ram type
preventer.
The primary well control equipment must not be used for snubbing or stripping operations
except for emergencies.
6-4 October 2006

Casing Head Seal
If casing is not cemented to surface, a secondary seal in the spool above the casing head must
be energized to prevent wellbore pressure from being exerted down through the surface
casing or intermediate casing annulus (in the event of primary seal failure).
Diverter
A diverter system must be used to divert the formation fluids away from the well bore.
Diverters can be:
z a second annular preventer

z a rotating BOP
z a rotating head.
Blind Shear Rams
The use of blind shear rams is dictated by existing regulations.
Bleed-Off and Kill Lines
Bleed-off and kill lines must conform to existing regulations.
Downhole Equipment
At least two non-ported floats are required to prevent back flow from the well while drilling
underbalanced. They should be installed near the bottom of the drill string.
6-5 October 2006

BOP STACK - UNDERBALANCED DRILLING
Figure 6-1 [EUB ID 94-3]

Notes: 1. The diverter preventer shall be positioned at the top of the BOP stack.
2. The diverter/flowline may be installed between the annular preventer and the ram
preventer or immediately below the diverter preventer.
3. For wells having an H2S content less than 10 ppm and a maximum tubing head
pressure less than 7000 kPa, the blind ram may be replaced with a drill-through
wellhead valve and, the kill line may be installed above or below the ram preventer
.* sour wells only
6-6 October 2006

COILED TUBING BOP STACK

UNDERBALANCED DRILLING

Notes: 1. For wells having an H2S content less than 10 ppm and a maximum tubing head
pressure less than 7000 kPa, the three ram blowout preventer stack may be
replaced with a remotely operated annular preventer.
2. The kill and diverter/flowlines may be located below the BOP stack provided that a
drill-through wellhead valve is installed immediately below the diverter/flowline.
*sour wells only
6-7 October 2006

Separation Equipment
The surface handling of fluids relates closely to conventional production testing and much of
the information covered in IRP Vol. 4 – Well Testing and Fluid Handling relates directly to
UB drilling operations. The surface handling equipment is separated into two distinct
systems-open tank for sweet operations and closed system for sour operations (>10 ppm
H2S).
Open tank systems, used for sweet operations only (<10 ppm H2S) include the following
requirements:
z All sources of ignition near the tanks must be eliminated due to the possible release of
combustible vapours
z Continuous monitoring devices must be installed to monitor for explosive vapours, H2S
and oxygen deficiency
z Only CSA-approved detonation-type flame arrestors shall be used
z Using earthen pits for storage of produced fluids is prohibited.
Closed system requirements include:
z Only non-combustible drilling fluids shall be flowed through the separator. If the
drilling fluid is designed to include oxygen (air-entrained) then the inside of vessels
and flowlines must be monitored for explosive mixtures.
z An inert purge system into the separator inlet line shall be installed.
z All pressure vessels and storage tanks shall be grounded and bonded.
z The flowline working pressure must be equal to or greater than the maximum wellhead
shut-in pressure and pressure tested to at least that limit.
z The flowline size shall be based on the maximum flow rates and expected pressures. A
flowline diameter must be no less than 75 mm in diameter. A flowline 100 mm or
greater must be flanged.
z A routine inspection and maintenance program shall be in place and supported with
documentation.
6-8 October 2006

Surface Storage
Precautionary measures that must be taken to protect the environment include
z the safe storage and/or disposal of any produced reservoir fluids and drill cuttings
z not producing or storing reservoir fluids in earthen pits
z venting and flaring produced gas and vapours
z holding cuttings from sour wells in tanks with vapour control, and then venting either
to the flare stack or through an H2S scrubbing system
Refer to Figure 6-3 for surface equipment schematic.
SURFACE HANDLING OF FLUIDS

CLOSED SYSTEM EXAMPLE
6-9 October 2006

OBJECTIVE TWO
Explain the well control measures used during underbalanced drilling including tripping
procedures.
WELL CONTROL
The issue of well control during UBD operations is a closely integrated part of the drilling
operation and cannot be easily separated (as with an overbalanced operation), since primary
control is no longer maintained by the drilling fluid.
Prior to start up and throughout UBD operations the following should be conducted in
preparation for unexpected occurrences:
z A risk/failure analysis should be developed concerning the specific conditions of the

well to be drilled.
z A contingency plan should be developed for emergencies relating to equipment failure

or unexpected pressures.
z Procedures should be developed for both routine and emergency kill operations.
z All BOP and flow equipment should be pressure tested prior to start up and at regular
intervals throughout the drilling of the well.
z Frequent emergency drills should be conducted.
In UBD operations there must be a means of returning the well to static conditions; that is
killing the well and circulating out any influx. EUB regulations require that at least 100% of
the hole volume of kill fluid must be on location at all times during UBD operations and that
the kill fluid must be readily accessible to pump into the wellbore by opening/closing no
more than two valves.
When the well is to be killed:

z Displace the hole to kill fluid
z Bypass liquid and gas out of the hole
z Stop pump
z Monitor well for flow
z Conduct flow checks at regular stages throughout the trip (if applicable).
6-10 October 2006

TRIPPING PROCEDURES
For a short trip or round trip:
z leave the hole standing with underbalanced fluid,

z blow down the drill pipe, and
z trip into the casing.
If tripping out of the hole, the decision may be made either to kill the well or strip out. If the
decision is made to strip out, a snubbing service may be required.
(a) During stripping operations, once the bit is directly above the blind rams:
z close the blind rams,

z ensure flow is diverted to the P-tank,
z ensure pressure is bled off between the blind rams and upper pack-off prior to
pulling the bit through the table, and
z change bit.
(b) If the decision is made to kill the well, the well could be displaced to kill fluid at this
time, and normal tripping procedures would apply.
6-11 October 2006

OBJECTIVE THREE
Explain the well control measures used during lateral drilling and coiled tubing
LATERAL DRILLING WELL CONTROL
Generally, all techniques of kick prevention used in conventional well drilling also apply to
lateral drilling, however, since lateral wellbores are often at high angles and small diameters,
extra precautions should be considered.
z The potential kick intensity and volume can be high if there is a long, high-angle
section in the reservoir formation. Gas can accumulate in the upward arch portions of
the horizontal sections and a kick may not be detectable until gas begins to flow into
the vertical section. The gas accumulations may also be swept from the arch portions
when pump rates are increased.
z The swab pressure can be relatively high in lateral sections because of the small hole
size and deviation. It is important to conduct frequent flow checks while tripping
through the lateral section to ensure the well is stable.
z The lateral section of the wellbore may act as a gas separator, and although the vertical
column of drilling fluid may provide a calculated overbalance, slugs may reduce the
hydrostatic pressure.
z The MACP in multilateral wells should be calculated based on the weakest formation
of all wellbores.
z Kicks can occur anywhere along the horizontal sections of the wellbore. Gas can
therefore reach the surface much sooner than expected.
z The drill string configuration is reversed compared to vertical wells since drill collars
and heavy weight drill pipe are nearer the surface. As the gas influx elongates, the
hydrostatic pressure in the annulus is reduced. The choke operator must be alert and
quickly adjust the choke to properly maintain BHP.
6-12 October 2006

Shut-in pressures in high angle wells may respond differently from vertical wells.
z It is important to know the TVD of the well used to calculate the kill mud density. The
measured depth is used to calculate the hole volumes.
z The SIDPP may be close to the SICP since the kick in the high angle section causes a
small or negligible reduction in the hydrostatic pressure.
z Zero shut-in pressures with a positive tank gain does not mean there is no kick. The
kick is still in the lateral section of the well.
z After shutting in a horizontal well, a kick can enter weak formations and accurate
pressure readings cannot be obtained. Fluctuation in SIDPP and SICP indicate lost
circulation.
When killing lateral or horizontal wells, the SIDPP decreases just as it does in a vertical well
until the kill mud reaches the TVD of the well. At that point the SIDPP should be the same
as the FCP. The kill mud, however, still has to fill the drill string and due to the pressure
caused by the friction losses until the kill mud reaches the end of the string at the bit, the
SIDPP may be lower than the FCP. Because it is more difficult to plot the SIDPP using the
Wait and Weight method, it may be preferred to use the Driller’s method.
Use a kick sheet designed for high angle wells to calculate the drill pipe pressure schedule.
A kill sheet designed for vertical wells will result in higher well pressures and possible
fractured formation.
6-13 October 2006

Example of the Deviated Well Control Sheet
SECOND LINE SUPERVISOR’S WELL CONTROL DATA SHEET

DEPTH 3700 m (MD), 2300 m (TVD)
CASING 244.5 mm set @ 1700 m (TVD), 2500 (MD)
HOLE SIZE 215.9 mm
HWDP 127 mm, 200 m, Cap. = 0.00456 m3/m
DRILL COLLARS 152 × 51 mm, 190 m, Cap. = 0.0021 m3/m
DP 127 mm Cap. = 0.00962 m3/m
Disp. 0.0098 m3/m (Top @ 1400 m)
RSPP OR PRESSURE LOSS 4500 kPa @ 40 spm
PUMP OUTPUT = 0.019 m3/stk
PIT GAIN 2.5 m3
SIDPP 0 kPa
SICP (Initial SI Pressure) 2200 kPa
PIT GAIN 2.5 m3
FORMATION LEAK-OFF Surface Press 9000 kPa, with 1100 kg/m3
KOP 1000 m (TVD)
EOB 2500 m (MD), 1700 m (TVD)
CAPACITY:
DP and OH 0.0239 m3/m
DP and Casing 0.0284 m3/m
DC and Casing 0.023 m3/m
This well is being drilled with a mud motor.
After circulating the kick out, the shut in pressures are: SICP = 2000 kPa; SIDPP = 0 kPa.
After the kick is circulated out SICP = SIDPP. Therefore pressure used for density increase
is 2000 kPa.
6-14 October 2006

Date:
Surface BOP Kill Sheet
Well Name:
FORMATION STRENGTH DATA: CURRENT WELL DATA:
SURFACE LEAK -OFF PRESSURE FROM DRILLING FLUID DATA:
FORMATION STRENGTH TEST (A) 9000 DENSITY 1260
DRILLING FLUID DENS. AT TEST (B) 1100 DEVIATION DATA:
MAX. ALLOWABLE DRILLING FLUID DENSITY = KOP M.D.. 1000
(A)
(B)+ = (C) 1639 KOP T.V.D 1000
EOB M.D. 2500
INITIAL MASP =
((C) - CURR. DENS.) x 0.00981 x SHOE T.V. DEPTH
EOB T.V.D. 1700
= 6320
CASING SHOE DATA:
SIZE 244.5
M. DEPTH 2500
T.V. DEPTH 1700
m3 / stroke m3 / stroke
HOLE DATA:
SIZE 215.9
M. DEPTH 3700
T.V. DEPTH 2300
Pump 1 Pump 2
40 0.019
PRE-RECORDED LENGTH CAPACITY VOLUME PUMP STROKES TIME

VOLUME DATA: m m3/m m3 40 stks /min minutes
DP - SURFACE TO KOP 1000 X 0.00962 = 9.62 (L) 506 stks

DP - KOP TO EOB 1500 X 0.00962 = 14.43 + (M) 760 stks
DP - EOB TO BHA 1000 X 0.00962 = + (N1) 506 stks

9.62
HEVI WALL DRILL PIPE X = + (N2) stks
200 0.00456 0.912 48
DRILL COLLAR X = + (N3) stks
DRILL STRING VOLUME (D) m3 stks 45.5 min

34.58 1820
DC x OPEN HOLE X =
DP / HWDP x OPEN HOLE 1200 X 0.0239 = 28.68 +
OPEN HOLE VOLUME (F) m3 min

28.68 1510 37.8
DP x CASING 3737 min
2500 X 0.0284 = (G) 71.0 93.4
TOTAL ANNULUS VOLUME (F + G) = (H) 99.68 5247 1312 min
(D + H) = (I) 134.26 7067 1358 min
(J) 120 SHADED AREAS FOR DEVIATED WELL

TOTAL ACTIVE FLUID SYSTEM (I + J) 254.26
6-15 October 2006

Date:
Well Name:
KICK DATA:
SIDPP 0 kPa SICP 2000 kPa PIT GAIN 2.5 m3
SIDPP
KILL FLUID DENSITY CURRENT DRILLING FLUID DENSITY +
TVD x 0.00981
1260
............................... + 2000 =
KMD 2300
................................. X 0.00981 1350
.............kg / m3
INITIAL CIRC. PRESS. DYNAMIC PRESSURE LOSS + SIDPP

ICP
4500
............................... + 2000 =
6500
.............kPa
FINAL CIRCULATING KILL FLUID DENSITY

x DYNAMIC PRESSURE LOSS
PRESSURE CURRENT DRILLING FLUID DENSITY
FCP
1350
........................ 4500
x ................................. =
1260
........................ 4821
.............kPa
DYNAMIC PRESSURE PL + ( FCP- PL) x

KOPMD 4500 + (...................
= ................ 4821 - ................) 1000
4500 x ...................
TDMD =
LOSS AT KOP (O) 3700
.................. 4587
.............kPa
SIDPP - (KMD - OMD) x KOPTVD x 0.00981

REMAINING SIDPP
AT KOP (P) 2000 -
= ............... 1350 1260 x ...............
(..............-.............) 1000 x 0.00981 =
1117
.............kPa
CIRCULATING PRESS (O) + (P) = ............. 1117 =

4587 + .................
AT KOP (KOP CP) 5704
.............kPa
4500 + (...........
4821 - ...........)
4500 x 2500
.................
DYNAMIC PRESSURE PL + (FCP- PL) x EOBMD = ............. =
LOSS AT EOB (R) TDMD 3700
................. 4717
.............kPa
SIDPP - (KMD - OMD) x EOBTVD x 0.00981

REMAINING SIDPP
AT EOB (S) 2000 -
= ............... 1350 1260 x ...............
(..............-.............) 1700 x 0.00981 =
500
.............kPa
CIRCULATING PRESS (R) + (S) = ............. 500 =

4717 + .................
AT EOB (EOB CP) 5217
.............kPa
796 kPa (T) x 100 796 x 100

.......... kPa
6500 - .............
(T) = ICP - KOP CP = ............... 5704 = ........... = 157
= .................
(L) 506
........... 100 STROKES
5217 = ........... (U) x 100 487 x 100

.......... kPa
5704 - .............
(U) = KOP CP - EOB CP = ............... 487 kPa = 64
= .................
(M) 760
........... 100 STROKES
4821 = ...........
5217 - .............
(W) = EOB CP - FCP = ............... 396 kPa (W) x 100 396 x 100
..........
71.48 kPa
= = .................
(N1+N2+N3) 554
........... 100 STROKES
6-16 October 2006

Date:
Well Name:
STROKES PRESSURE SIDPP

[kPa] 10000
0 6500
100 6343
200 6186 9000
300 6029
STATIC & DYNAMIC DRILL PIPE PRESSURE [kPa]
400 5872
500 5715
600 5640
700 5576 8000
800 5512
900 5448
1000 5384
1100 5320
7000
1200 5256
1300 5157
1400 5087 x
1500 5017
1600 4947 6000
1700 4877 x
1800 4835
1820 4821
x
5000
x
4000
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
STROKES
6-17 October 2006

COILED TUBING OVERBALANCED DRILLING
Well control considerations for CT overbalanced drilling are the same as for conventional
Equipment used for CT drilling operations have features that help minimize some of the risks
when drilling overbalanced, however, it is still important to maintain static well conditions as
any influx into the wellbore is undesirable. The stripper/lubricator/flow line equipment, if
installed, provides a means of defence against any undesired influx, but conventional BOP
equipment is still required to kill the well.
The EUB Directive 036 specifies the BOP requirements based on well depth and anticipated
pressures (Classes I, II, III, and IV). The same well control equipment and kick detection
equipment are required as for conventional overbalanced drilling. Class V, VI and Critical
Sour Wells require shear ram.
The following items should be considered when conducting flow checks and shut-in
procedures with coiled tubing:
z Pulling pipe while pumping through the bit is the same as pulling wet pipe.
z Top filling is the same as pulling dry pipe, if a non-floated mud motor is utilized.
z Trip volumes are more accurate due to no mud losses during connections.
z Potential for swabbing is reduced when filling through bit.
z The coil operation is always ready to snub back into the well.
6-18 October 2006

Date:
Well Name:
FORMATION STRENGTH DATA: CURRENT WELL DATA:
SURFACE LEAK -OFF PRESSURE FROM DRILLING FLUID DATA:
FORMATION STRENGTH TEST (A) DENSITY
DRILLING FLUID DENS. AT TEST (B)
DEVIATION DATA:
MAX. ALLOWABLE DRILLING FLUID DENSITY = KOP M.D..
(A)
(B)+ = (C) KOP T.V.D
EOB M.D.
INITIAL MASP =
EOB T.V.D.
((C) - CURR. DENS.) x 0.00981 x SHOE T.V. DEPTH
=
CASING SHOE DATA:
SIZE
M. DEPTH
T.V. DEPTH
m3 / stroke m3 / stroke
HOLE DATA:
SIZE
M. DEPTH
T.V. DEPTH
Pump 1 Pump 2
PRE-RECORDED LENGTH CAPACITY VOLUME PUMP STROKES TIME

VOLUME DATA: m m3/m m3 40 stks /min minutes
DP - SURFACE TO KOP X = (L) stks

DP - KOP TO EOB X = + (M) stks
DP - EOB TO BHA X = + (N1) stks
HEVI WALL DRILL PIPE X = + (N2) stks
DRILL COLLAR X = + (N3) stks
DRILL STRING VOLUME (D) m3 stks min
DC x OPEN HOLE X =
DP / HWDP x OPEN HOLE X = +
OPEN HOLE VOLUME (F) m3 min
DP x CASING X = (G) min
TOTAL ANNULUS VOLUME (F + G) = (H) min
(D + H) = (I) min
(J)
SHADED AREAS FOR DEVIATED WELL
TOTAL ACTIVE FLUID SYSTEM (I + J)
6-19 October 2006

Date:
Well Name:
KICK DATA:
SIDPP kPa SICP kPa PIT GAIN m3
SIDPP
KILL FLUID DENSITY CURRENT DRILLING FLUID DENSITY +
TVD x 0.00981
............................... + =
KMD ................................. X 0.00981 .............kg / m3
INITIAL CIRC. PRESS. DYNAMIC PRESSURE LOSS + SIDPP

ICP
............................... + = .............kPa
FINAL CIRCULATING KILL FLUID DENSITY

PRESSURE x DYNAMIC PRESSURE LOSS
CURRENT DRILLING FLUID DENSITY
FCP
........................
x ................................. =
........................ .............kPa
KOPMD = ................ + (................... - ................) x ...................

DYNAMIC PRESSURE PL + ( FCP- PL) x =
LOSS AT KOP (O) TDMD
.................. .............kPa
SIDPP - (KMD - OMD) x KOPTVD x 0.00981

REMAINING SIDPP
AT KOP (P) = ............... - (..............-.............) x ............... x 0.00981 =
.............kPa
CIRCULATING PRESS (O) + (P) = ............. + ................. =

AT KOP (KOP CP) .............kPa
.................
DYNAMIC PRESSURE PL + (FCP- PL) x EOBMD = ............. + (........... - ...........) x =
LOSS AT EOB (R) TDMD ................. .............kPa
SIDPP - (KMD - OMD) x EOBTVD x 0.00981

REMAINING SIDPP
AT EOB (S) = ............... - (..............-.............) x ............... x 0.00981 =
.............kPa
CIRCULATING PRESS (R) + (S) = ............. + ................. =

AT EOB (EOB CP) .............kPa
(T) x 100 .......... x 100 kPa

(T) = ICP - KOP CP = ............... - ............. = ........... kPa = = .................
(L) ........... 100 STROKES
(U) x 100 .......... x 100 kPa

(U) = KOP CP - EOB CP = ............... - ............. = ........... kPa = = .................
(M) ........... 100 STROKES
(W) x 100 .......... x 100 kPa

(W) = EOB CP - FCP = ............... - ............. = ........... kPa = = .................
(N1+N2+N3) ........... 100 STROKES
6-20 October 2006

Date:
Well Name:
STROKES PRESSURE SIDPP

[kPa] 10000
9000
STATIC & DYNAMIC DRILL PIPE PRESSURE [kPa]
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
STROKES
6-21 October 2006

CHAPTER 7
CRITICAL SOUR WELLS
Chapter 7: Critical Sour Wells
CRITICAL SOUR WELLS
OUTCOME
Identify specific methods, techniques and recommended practices for well control of a
critical sour well.
OBJECTIVES
1. State the requirements and safety criteria for drilling operations involving H2S.
2. Identify the equipment requirements for drilling operations involving critical sour
wells.
3. State the supervisory requirements for drilling personnel involved in a critical sour
well.
OBJECTIVE ONE
State the requirements and safety criteria for drilling operations involving H2S.
INTRODUCTION
H2S release potential in geological formations throughout Western Canada is proportional to

the age and depth of the formation. A survey conducted by the Alberta Energy & Utilities
Board (EUB) and summarized in EUB ID 97-6 shows that:
1. Formations above the Mannville Group contain little or no H2S.

2. Some reservoirs in the Mannville Formation contain varying small amounts of H2S in
scattered areas throughout the province with potential H2S release rates up to 0.1 cubic
metres per second (m3/s).
3. Some reservoirs in Jurassic and Triassic formations also contain small amounts of H2S,
but these formations are of limited distribution.
7-1 October 2006

4. Mississippian and Devonian formations are of principal concern as they have the
potential for significant H2S concentrations and reservoir flow capability.
5. H2S release rates in the foothills/mountain area are less predictable due to the faulted
nature of the region.
The EUB has established public safety criteria in EUB ID 97-6 based on potential H2S
release rates and minimum separation distances between sour wells, and residential and other
developments. H2S release rates are determined by the maximum expected H2S
concentration combined with the maximum anticipated deliverability in an open-hole flow or
a casing flow without back pressure, and should be based on a realistic engineering and
geological approach.
The EUB may classify any level of sour well as a critical sour well, and therefore, in
addition to requiring an emergency response plan, applicants must submit a drilling plan
detailing drilling-related equipment and procedures.
The industry Blowout Prevention Review Committee (BPRC) was established as a result of
the Lodgepole 1 inquiry, and developed IRP Vol. 1 – Critical Sour Drilling to assist operators
in the drilling of critical sour wells.
Sour gas, particularly in higher H2S concentrations can complicate well control procedures in
several ways:
z The H2S associated with the gas influx is highly soluble in water, and unless
treated, will become a very corrosive acid solution. The pH of the drilling fluid
must be maintained above 10.0.
z Sour gas in the free state in the wellbore can cause drill pipe to become H2S-
embrittled, resulting in failure and parting of the drill pipe (as was the case at the
Lodgepole blowout).
z H2S is a poisonous gas that in concentrations as low as 500 ppm or 0.05% can cause
death to humans unless the victim is resuscitated (refer to Table 7-1 H2S Toxicity
Levels).
1
Well blowouts were experienced in 1979 and 1982 at Lodgepole (southwest of Drayton Valley,
Alberta). It took 60 days to control the blowouts, and in both cases, the rig burned down. Two
people died as a result of H2S exposure in the 1982 incident.
7-2 October 2006

Table 7-1
H2S TOXICITY LEVELS

H2S Exposure (ppm) Possible Health Effects
Less than 1 ppm You can smell it.
10 ppm (8-hour OEL) No known adverse health effects.
20 to 200 ppm Eye and respiratory tract irritation and loss of smell. Will also
cause headache and nausea.
100 ppm Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH).
IDLH refers to a hazardous atmosphere where a person without
adequate respiratory protection may be fatally injured or suffer
immediate, irreversible or incapacitating health effects.
500 to 700 ppm Affects the central nervous system. After a couple of minutes, it
causes loss of reasoning, loss of balance, unconsciousness and
breathing failure.
700 ppm to 1000 ppm Immediate loss of consciousness. Permanent brain damage and
death will occur if you are not rescued immediately.
Note: 1% = 10,000 ppm
The IRP Vol. 1 – Critical Sour Drilling and EUB ID 97-6 cover a wide range of requirements
for critical sour well drilling. This manual will only address the equipment and well control
requirements.
OBJECTIVE TWO
Identify the equipment requirements for drilling operations involving critical sour wells.
EQUIPMENT
The following are general equipment requirements. Refer to IRP Vol. 1 – Critical Sour
Drilling for more details.
7-3 October 2006

BOP Stack
ARP - The minimum component requirements are:
One annular preventer, two spools and three rams. One ram to be located
directly below the annular preventer.
Refer to Figures 7-1, 7-2 and 7-3 for recommended stack arrangements.
7-4 October 2006

BOP STACK CONFIGURATION 1
Figure 7-1
7-5 October 2006

Figure 7-2
To improve the benefits of this configuration, a ram-blanking tool (see Figure 7-4) can be
used to allow the top ram to perform the function of a blind ram when the drill string is out of
the hole.
7-6 October 2006

Figure 7-3
To improve the benefits of this configuration, a ram-blanking tool (see Figure 7-4) can be
used to allow the top ram to perform the function of a blind ram when the drill string is out of
the hole.
7-7 October 2006

The two-spool stack arrangement is designed as a redundant system to reduce the effect of
equipment failure. The top spool and choke line should be used during well control
situations, leaving the lower spool/choke line as backup only.
The use of a Ram Blanking Tool can convert the upper pipe rams to blind rams if required.
Refer to Figure 7-4 for Ram Blanking Tool Configuration.
BOP RAM BLANKING TOOL
Figure 7-4
7-8 October 2006

IRP - Wing valves on the casing bowl or on the intermediate spool should not be considered
acceptable substitutes for a drilling spool.
Choke Manifold
IRP - Critical sour well BOPs require two drilling spools regardless of BOP class or
depth rating of the rig. Therefore, all manifolds utilized on critical sour wells will
be of the dual choke line variety. Existing manifolds should be certified as suitable
for sour service.
All valves, chokes lines and fittings should be made of material with performance
standards in compliance with NACE MR-01-75.
The recommended manifold layout shown in Figure 7-5 would allow flow from either choke
line to be routed to either choke, or either wing of the manifold.
7-9 October 2006

NOTE: 1. Flanged connections throughout

2. For equipment code see EUB Regulations
Figure 7-5
7-10 October 2006

Mud-Gas Separator
At least one properly sized atmospheric open bottom mud-gas separator is required. A
second mud-gas separator may be atmospheric open bottom, atmospheric closed bottom, or
pressurized design. Each mud-gas separator must be connected independently to each wing
of the choke manifold to allow independent flow to each mud-gas separator.
The inlet lines should be 25 mm larger than the BOP choke line outside diameter, and of
ASTM A333 Grade 6, Schedule 80, seamless material.
The recommended sizes for vent lines are listed in Table 7-2 with corresponding vessel sizes.
Figure 7-6 illustrates the suggested mud-gas separator configuration.
Table 7-2 EUB Directive 036, Section 2.2.4)
7-11 October 2006

SEPARATOR CONFIGURATION
D– Separator Diameter
Refer to Table 2 for specific BOP Class
requirements
d – Vent Line ID
Refer to Table 2 for specific BOP Class
requirements
L – Liquid Level
Minimum Height: 1.0 metre
V – Vapour Space
Distance from top of fluid inlet (inside the
separator) to the tangent line of the vessel
head. Minimum Height: 0.9 metre
LG – Liquid-Gas Disengagement Space
Distance from bottom of fluid inlet (inside the
separator) to the max. fluid level. Minimum
Height: 0.3 metre
SEPARATOR PLACEMENT IN MUD TANK

B– Open bottom underflow
Minimum Height: 0.3 metre
S – Minimum distance to tank wall:
0.5 metre
SEPARATOR INTERNALS
– If an impingement plate is used, it should be
removable and made from abrasion-resistant
material. Do not weld plate directly to the
separator body.
– Baffles should be installed to augment
Figure 7-6
7-12 October 2006

BOP Control System
IRP - The master control station should be located at ground level and not on the rig
floor.
Adhering to this recommendation provides the opportunity to activate the BOPs from the
accumulator if the floor controls (remote controls) are not accessible. More piping is
required since a pressure and return line are needed for each component on the BOP stack,
but in the event of a leak to any of the lines or components, an alternate component can be
made to function without any further loss of fluid.
IRP - The accumulator should be sized such that when charged to its operating pressure
and with recharge pump off, there should be sufficient volume to open the HCR,
close the annular preventer on drill pipe, and close, open, and close one ram
preventer. The final accumulator pressure should not be less than 8400 kPa.
Shear Blind Rams
The use of Shear Blind Rams is at the operator’s discretion and/or EUB’s request. The risks
and consequences of not using them must be completely reviewed on a per-well basis.
Shear rams may need a minimum of 19 MPa to effectively shear the pipe. This may require
that there be a booster unit on the accumulator. Each system components design and
operation will vary depending on the manufacturer and the type and thickness of the pipe
being sheared.
Drill Pipe Design and Metallurgy
Generally IRP Grade E-75 with limited hardness is recommended. API Grades X-95 and G-
105 should be used only if the overpull margin is exceeded with E-75. Only premium
grades, or better, drill pipe is recommended. Drill pipe must be hardness tested and
identified with a unique identifier, and inspected within 90 days of use.
7-13 October 2006

Kick Detection
The following tank volume and flow monitoring equipment is recommended to assist on-site
personnel in kick detection when drilling critical sour wells:
z An automated mud-tank-level monitoring system, which is capable of detecting a

change of +/- 1.0 m3 in total volume. This system must also be equipped with
− a monitoring station located at the driller’s console,
− a continuous recorder to record tank volumes, and
− a warning light that is activated when the alarm is switched off.
This system is to be backed up with a mechanical system.
z A flowline sensor complete with
− a monitoring station located at the driller’s console that is capable of detecting +/-
10% flow rate,
− a continuous recorder, and
− a warning light that is activated when the system is switched off.
z A trip tank design in which a change in fluid level of 25 mm equals a volume change
of no more than 0.08 m3 or a maximum surface area of 3.0 m2. The trip tank must be
monitored by either a mechanical or automated system.
A trip record must be completed for every trip and signed by the rig manager and wellsite
supervisor.
H2S Detection
Drilling fluids provide a protective barrier against H2S gas if the pH property of the fluid
remains high. Alkalinity control (pH 10.0 - 11.5) is absolutely essential while drilling sour
formations.
7-14 October 2006

The following H2S detection techniques are required in addition to regular mud checks:
z Use of a continuous pH-monitoring device mounted near the flow line, which is
equipped with a continuous recording chart and alarm to warn of a sudden drop in pH.
z Testing the mud filtrate for soluble sulphides at least 3 times a day.
H2S Monitoring
IRP - Each drilling rig must have an H2S detection device that can continuously monitor
for the gas and activate an alarm when sensing an H2S concentration of 10 ppm or
more. At least one sensor must be located at the shaker and be able to detect at
least a 5-ppm concentration.
Generally, most monitoring systems include as many as four sensors located strategically
around the rig in places such as:
z near the cellar,

z near the pumps, and
z on the mud tanks.
Safety Equipment
Before drilling in the critical sour zone, safety equipment and safety supervisors are to be on
location. Breathing air lines are to be installed and crews must be briefed on the use of the
specific breathing equipment.
7-15 October 2006

OBJECTIVE THREE
State the supervisory requirements for drilling personnel involved in a critical sour well.
SUPERVISION AND TRAINING
When the critical sour zone is open, the requirements for the level of supervision and the
training are as follows:
z Two operator representatives must be available on a 12-hour basis. Training

certification to include Well Control, H2S Alive and First Aid.
z One contractor’s representative must be available on a 24-hour basis. Training
certification must include Well Control, H2S Alive and First Aid.
z A minimum of a 5-man crew must be on working. All crewmembers must hold valid
H2S Alive certification as a minimum.
z Two safety supervisors who have H2S and First Aid certification must be available on
a 12-hour shift basis.
z All on-site service personnel must hold valid H2S certification.
A precautionary measure on sour and critical sour drilling sites is to restrict the number of
people on site to essential personnel only.
WELL CONTROL
The danger of drill pipe embrittlement and its subsequent failure because of H2S always
presents the possibility that other complications such as lost circulation or equipment failure
may arise while circulating a sour gas kick.
The following procedure may be considered if a kick is detected in a known sour formation.
Each operator must define how they would handle a specific well control situation.
7-16 October 2006

Sour Kick While Drilling
Prior to starting circulation:
1. Prepare kill mud for Wait and Weight Method.

2. Close lower kelly cock.
3. Bleed off pressure between lower kelly cock and pump.
4. Break off kelly above lower kelly cock.
5. Install stabbing valve on kelly and leave in open position.
6. Make a mouse hole connection, and make up new single and stabbing valve on kelly.
Depending on the hole depth and relation of the kelly in the table, two singles and a
second stabbing valve may be required.
7. Equalize pressure above the lower kelly cock to SIDPP.
8. Open lower kelly cock and check SIDPP.
9. Adjust regulator pressure on the annular preventer to allow a tool joint to strip through.
Begin circulation while using Wait and Weight Method.
When pressures have stabilized:
1. Strip pipe through annular.

2. Tag bottom.
3. Slack off string weight (except weight of the blocks).
4. Leave drill string in that position.
5. Maintain pH control 10.5 - 11.0
7-17 October 2006

Sour Kick While Tripping
Depending on the depth of the bit, the procedure is no different for a sour kick than a sweet
influx:
1. Determine shut-in pressures.

2. Attempt to strip into hole.
3. Circulate out kick.
When circulating a sour kick, it is important to position the drill string to prevent
hydraulicing (in the event of H2S embrittlement and failure). Embrittlement is not likely to
occur unless circulation is stopped for a prolonged period of time at the critical stage when
the influx is near surface.
The recommendation is to position the tool joint up against the closed upper pipe rams while
circulating. The use of a pup joint will make the lower kelly cock accessible, if needed.
1. Install stabbing valve and kelly.

2. Obtain shut-in pressures.
3. Prepare to strip in the hole:
z Close stabbing valve.
z Bleed off pressure between stabbing valve and pump.
z Break off kelly above stabbing valve.
z Rack kelly.
z Install an inside BOP.
z Strip in hole.
z Pick up kelly, make a mouse-hole connection to a pup joint, and make up to string.
z Position pup joint tool joint below upper pipe rams.
z Close upper rams.
z Pull pup joint tool joint snug to the pipe rams (max. 5000 daN.)
4. Circulate kick-using Step #1 of the Driller’s Method.
The stripping and circulating procedure may need to be repeated several times before
working to bottom. Drilling fluid pH control 10.5 - 11.0 is mandatory.
7-18 October 2006

CHAPTER 8
TABLES
Chapter 8: Tables
TABLES
CHAPTER 8 TABLES
DRILL PIPE CAPACITIES AND DISPLACEMENTS ........................................... 8-1
HEAVI-WATE (DRILCO)........................................................................................ 8-1
DRILL COLLAR CAPACITIES AND DISPLACEMENTS ................................... 8-2
ANNULAR VOLUME DRILL PIPE AND OPEN HOLE (m3/m)........................... 8-4
AND OPEN HOLE .............................................................................................. 8-5
ANNULAR VOLUME DRILL PIPE AND CASING (m3/m) (SI)......................... 8-14
HOLE CAPACITY .................................................................................................. 8-16
DIMENSIONS AND BURST PRESSURES OF CASING (kPa)........................... 8-22
ACCUMULATOR SIZES IN LITRES ................................................................... 8-24
Volume Conversions .......................................................................................... 8-25
RAM TYPE BLOWOUT PREVENTERS ........................................................... 8-26
Hydril Company................................................................................................. 8-26
Cameron Iron Works......................................................................................... 8-27
NL Shaffer.......................................................................................................... 8-30
ANNULAR PREVENTERS.................................................................................... 8-31
Hydril Company................................................................................................. 8-31
NL Shaffer.......................................................................................................... 8-32
HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED VALVES......................................................... 8-33
Rockwell Manufacturing Co. (McEvoy)............................................................ 8-33
NL Shaffer.......................................................................................................... 8-34
DOUBLE ACTING DUPLEX MUD PUMP CAPACITIES PER CYCLE............ 8-35
TRIPLEX SINGLE ACTING MUD PUMP CAPACITIES PER CYCLE ............. 8-36
Disclaimer
The following charts and tables may not be accurate for
field purposes as they are for instructional purposes only.
Chapter 8: Tables
DRILL PIPE CAPACITIES AND DISPLACEMENTS

Size Mass ID Tool Joint ID Displacement Capacity
Connection OD
mm kg/m mm mm mm m3/m m3/m
73 15.48 54.64 SH 85.7 44.45 0.00197 0.00230

73 15.48 54.64 IF 104.8 53.98 0.00198 0.00234
89 19.79 70.21 SH 104.8 53.98 0.00254 0.00390

89 19.79 70.21 IF 120.6 68.26 0.00261 0.00392
89 23.09 66.09 FH 127.0 65.09 0.00318 0.00343
102 20.84 84.48 SH 117.48 65.09 0.0027 0.0057
114 24.71 97.18 IF 155.58 85.73 0.00331 0.0074

114 24.71 97.18 H-90 152.4 82.55 0.0034 0.0073
114 29.77 92.45 XH 158.75 63.5 0.0042 0.0067
127 29.02 108.61 XH 161.93 95.25 0.0040 0.0093

127 38.07 101.6 XH 165.1 88.9 0.0051 0.0080
HEAVI-WATE (DRILCO)
Size Mass ID Tool Joint ID Displacement Capacity
Connection OD
mm kg/m mm mm mm m3/m m3/m
89 38.66 52.39 IF 120.65 55.56 0.0051 0.0022

102 41.64 65.09 FH 133.4 68.26 0.0055 0.0034
114 62.45 69.85 XH 158.75 73.03 0.0082 0.0038
127 74.35 76.2 IF 158.75 79.38 0.0098 0.0046
8-1 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
DRILL COLLAR CAPACITIES AND DISPLACEMENTS
Size Mass ID Displacement Capacity

mm kg/m mm m3/m m3/m
105 51.7 51 0.0067 0.0021
47.4 57 0.0061 0.0026
42.7 64 0.0055 0.0032
121 73.8 51 0.0094 0.0021

69.4 57 0.0089 0.0026
64.8 64 0.0083 0.0032
127 83.4 51 0.0106 0.0021

79.1 57 0.0101 0.0032
152 126.9 51 0.0162 0.0021

122.8 57 0.0157 0.0026
118.1 64 0.0151 0.0032
111.5 73 0.0142 0.0041
107.2 76 0.0137 0.0046
159 139.2 51 0.0178 0.0021

135.0 57 0.0172 0.0026
130.3 64 0.0166 0.0032
123.7 73 0.0158 0.0041
119.4 76 0.0153 0.0046
165 151.7 51 0.0194 0.0021

147.7 57 0.0189 0.0026
142.9 64 0.0183 0.0032
136.4 73 0.0174 0.0041
129.0 76 0.0165 0.0046
171 165.0 51 0.0211 0.0021

160.6 57 0.0205 0.0026
156.1 64 0.0200 0.0032
150.2 73 0.0192 0.0041
145.1 76 0.0186 0.0046
8-2 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
DRILL COLLAR CAPACITIES AND DISPLACEMENTS
Size Mass ID Displacement Capacity

mm kg/m mm m3/m m3/m
178 178.4 51 0.0228 0.0021
174.0 57 0.0222 0.0026
169.5 64 0.0217 0.0032
163.6 73 0.0209 0.0041
159.1 76 0.0203 0.0046
184 193.3 51 0.0247 0.0021

188.9 57 0.0241 0.0026
184.4 64 0.0236 0.0032
177.0 73 0.0226 0.0041
172.5 76 0.0221 0.0046
190 206.7 51 0.0246 0.0021

197.8 64 0.0253 0.0032
187.4 76 0.0239 0.0046
197 214.1 64 0.0272 0.0032

202.2 76 0.0258 0.0046
190.3 89 0.0242 0.0062
203 238.7 51 0.0304 0.0021

234.4 57 0.0299 0.0026
229.7 64 0.0293 0.0032
223.1 71 0.0284 0.0040
218.8 76 0.0279 0.0046
229 306.3 51 0.0390 0.0021

302.1 57 0.0385 0.0026
297.3 64 0.0379 0.0032
290.7 71 0.0370 0.0040
286.4 76 0.0365 0.0046
254 362.0 76 0.0461 0.0046
279 444.5 76 0.0586 0.0046
8-3 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
ANNULAR VOLUME DRILL PIPE AND OPEN HOLE (m3/m)

Drill Pipe O.D.
Hole Size 73 89 102 114 127
(mm)
121 0.0073
149 0.0133 0.0113
152 0.0140 0.0121
156 0.0148 0.0128
159 0.0156 0.0136
165 0.0172 0.0152
168 0.0180 0.0160
171 0.0189 0.0169 0.0149 0.0128
187 0.0234 0.0213 0.0194 0.0173
194 0.0253 0.0233 0.0213 0.0192
200 0.0272 0.0255 0.0233 0.0212 0.0188
213 0.0314 0.0293 0.0274 0.0253 0.0229
216 0.0324 0.0304 0.0284 0.0263 0.0239
219 0.0334 0.0315 0.0295 0.0274 0.0250
222 0.0346 0.0326 0.0306 0.0285 0.0261
229 0.0369 0.0346 0.0329 0.0308 0.0284
241 0.0415 0.0395 0.0376 0.0355 0.0331
245 0.0428 0.0407 0.0388 0.0367 0.0343
251 0.0452 0.0432 0.0413 0.0392 0.0367
270 0.0530 0.0510 0.0491 0.0470 0.0446
279 0.0571 0.0551 0.0532 0.0511 0.0487
305 0.0688 0.0668 0.0648 0.0627 0.0603
311 0.0718 0.0698 0.0679 0.0658 0.0634
343 0.0882 0.0861 0.0842 0.0821 0.0797
349 0.0916 0.0896 0.0876 0.0855 0.0831
375 0.1060 0.1040 0.1021 0.1000 0.0976
381 0.1098 0.1078 0.1059 0.1038 0.1014
406 0.1255 0.1235 0.1216 0.1195 0.1171
445 0.1510 0.1490 0.1470 0.1449 0.0145
8-4 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables

AND OPEN HOLE
Hole Size Drill Collar O.D. Annular Volume Height
(mm) (mm) (m3/m) (m/m3)
121 76 0.0069 144.93
79 0.0065 153.85
83 0.0061 163.93
89 0.0052 192.31
95 0.0043 232.56
98 0.0038 263.16
102 0.0033 303.03
105 0.0028 357.14
108 0.0023 434.78
114 0.0012 833.33
146 76 0.0129 77.52
79 0.0125 80.00
82 0.0123 81.30
89 0.0113 88.49
95 0.0104 96.15
98 0.0099 101.01
102 0.0094 106.38
105 0.0089 112.36
108 0.0083 120.48
114 0.0073 136.99
121 0.0061 153.93
127 0.0048 208.33
133 0.0035 285.71
140 0.0021 476.19
152 95 0.0111 90.09
98 0.0106 94.34
102 0.0101 99.01
105 0.0096 104.17
108 0.0091 109.89
114 0.0080 125.00
121 0.0068 147.06
127 0.0056 178.57
133 0.0043 232.56
140 0.0029 344.83
8-5 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables

AND OPEN HOLE
(mm) (mm) (m3/m) (m/m3)
157 95 0.0119 84.03
98 0.0114 87.72
102 0.0109 91.74
105 0.0104 96.15
108 0.0099 101.01
114 0.0088 113.64
119 0.0076 131.58
127 0.0064 156.25
133 0.0051 196.08
140 0.0037 270.27
146 0.0022 454.55
159 95 0.0127 78.74
98 0.0122 81.97
102 0.0117 85.47
105 0.0112 89.29
108 0.0106 94.34
114 0.0095 105.26
121 0.0083 120.48
127 0.0071 140.84
133 0.0058 172.41
140 0.0045 222.22
165 102 0.0133 75.19
105 0.0128 78.13
108 0.0123 76.92
114 0.0112 89.29
121 0.0100 100.00
127 0.0088 113.65
133 0.0075 133.33
140 0.0061 163.93
146 0.0046 217.39
8-6 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables

AND OPEN HOLE
(mm) (mm) (m3/m) (m/m3)
168 102 0.0141 70.92
105 0.0136 73.53
108 0.0131 76.34
114 0.0120 83.33
121 0.0108 92.59
127 0.0096 104.17
133 0.0083 120.48
140 0.0069 144.93
146 0.0055 181.82
152 0.0040 250.00
159 0.0025 400.00
172 102 0.0150 66.67
105 0.0144 69.44
108 0.0139 71.94
114 0.0128 78.13
121 0.0116 86.21
127 0.0104 96.15
134 0.0091 109.89
140 0.0078 128.21
146 0.0066 151.52
152 0.0049 204.08
159 0.0033 303.03
187 114 0.0173 57.80
121 0.0161 62.11
127 0.0149 67.11
134 0.0136 73.53
130 0.0123 81.30
146 0.0108 92.59
152 0.0093 107.53
159 0.0078 128.21
165 0.0062 161.29
172 0.0045 222.22
8-7 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables

AND OPEN HOLE
(mm) (mm) (m3/m) (m/m3)
194 114 0.0192 52.08
121 0.0180 55.56
127 0.0168 59.52
134 0.0155 64.52
140 0.0141 70.92
146 0.0127 78.74
152 0.0112 89.29
159 0.0096 104.17
165 0.0080 125.00
172 0.0064 156.25
200 114 0.0211 47.39
121 0.0200 50.00
127 0.0187 53.48
134 0.0174 57.47
140 0.0161 62.11
146 0.0147 68.03
152 0.0131 76.34
159 0.0116 86.21
165 0.0080 125.00
172 0.0064 156.25
213 127 0.0228 43.46
133 0.0216 46.30
140 0.0202 49.50
142 0.0188 53.19
152 0.0173 57.80
159 0.0158 63.29
165 0.0141 70.92
172 0.0125 80.00
178 0.0107 93.46
184 0.0089 112.36
191 0.0070 142.86
197 0.0051 196.08
8-8 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables

AND OPEN HOLE
(mm) (mm) (m3/m) (m/m3)
216 152 0.0184 54.35
159 0.0168 59.52
165 0.0152 65.79
172 0.0135 74.07
178 0.0118 84.75
184 0.0100 100.00
191 0.0081 123.46
197 0.0062 161.29
219 152 0.0195 51.28
159 0.0179 55.87
165 0.0163 61.35
172 0.0146 68.49
178 0.0129 77.52
184 0.0111 90.09
191 0.0092 108.70
197 0.0073 136.99
203 0.0053 188.68
222 152 0.0206 48.54
159 0.0190 52.63
165 0.0174 57.47
172 0.0157 63.69
178 0.0140 71.43
184 0.0122 81.97
191 0.0103 97.09
197 0.0083 120.48
203 0.0064 156.25
210 0.0043 232.56
229 165 0.0196 51.02
172 0.0179 55.87
178 0.0162 61.73
184 0.0144 69.44
191 0.0125 80.00
197 0.0106 94.34
203 0.0086 116.28
210 0.0066 151.52
216 0.0044 227.27
8-9 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables

AND OPEN HOLE
(mm) (mm) (m3/m) (m/m3)
241 165 0.0243 41.15
172 0.0226 44.25
178 0.0209 47.85
184 0.0191 52.36
191 0.0172 58.14
197 0.0153 65.36
203 0.0133 75.19
210 0.0113 88.49
216 0.0091 109.89
222 0.0069 144.93
245 165 0.0255 39.22
172 0.0238 42.02
178 0.0221 45.25
184 0.0203 49.26
191 0.0184 54.35
197 0.0165 60.61
203 0.0145 68.97
210 0.0125 80.00
216 0.0103 97.09
222 0.0081 123.46
229 0.0059 169.49
251 165 0.0280 35.71
172 0.0263 38.02
178 0.0246 40.65
184 0.0228 43.86
191 0.0209 47.85
197 0.0190 52.63
203 0.0170 58.82
291 0.0149 67.11
216 0.0128 78.13
222 0.0106 94.34
229 0.0083 120.48
235 0.0061 163.93
8-10 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables

AND OPEN HOLE
(mm) (mm) (m3/m) (m/m3)
270 178 0.0324 30.86
184 0.0306 32.68
191 0.0287 34.84
197 0.0268 37.31
203 0.0248 40.32
210 0.0227 44.05
216 0.0206 48.54
222 0.0184 54.35
229 0.0162 61.73
235 0.0138 72.46
241 0.0115 86.96
248 0.0090 111.11
254 0.0065 153.85
279 178 0.0365 27.40
184 0.0347 28.82
191 0.0328 30.49
197 0.0309 32.36
203 0.0289 34.60
210 0.0268 37.31
216 0.0247 40.49
222 0.0225 44.45
229 0.0203 49.26
235 0.0179 55.87
241 0.0156 64.10
248 0.0131 76.34
254 0.0106 94.34
260 0.0081 123.46
267 0.0054 185.19
8-11 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables

AND OPEN HOLE
(mm) (mm) (m3/m) (m/m3)
305 203 0.0402 24.88
210 0.0385 25.97
216 0.0364 27.47
222 0.0342 29.24
229 0.0319 31.35
235 0.0296 33.78
241 0.0272 36.76
248 0.0248 40.32
254 0.0223 44.84
260 0.0197 50.76
267 0.0171 58.48
273 0.0144 69.44
279 0.0116 86.21
311 203 0.0436 22.93
210 0.0416 24.04
216 0.0394 25.38
222 0.0372 26.88
229 0.0350 28.57
236 0.0327 30.58
241 0.0303 33.00
248 0.0279 35.84
254 0.0254 39.37
260 0.0228 43.86
267 0.0202 49.50
273 0.0175 57.14
279 0.0147 66.03
8-12 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables

AND OPEN HOLE
(mm) (mm) (m3/m) (m/m3)
343 203 0.0599 16.69
210 0.0578 17.30
216 0.0558 17.82
222 0.0536 18.66
229 0.0513 19.49
236 0.0485 20.62
241 0.0466 21.46
248 0.0456 21.93
254 0.0417 23.98
260 0.0391 25.58
267 0.0365 27.40
273 0.0338 29.59
279 0.0310 32.26
286 0.0282 35.46
292 0.0253 39.53
299 0.0224 44.64
305 0.0194 51.55
350 203 0.0634 15.77
210 0.0613 16.31
216 0.0592 16.89
222 0.0570 17.54
229 0.0547 18.28
236 0.0524 19.08
241 0.0501 19.96
248 0.0476 21.08
254 0.0451 22.17
260 0.0426 23.47
267 0.0400 25.00
273 0.0372 26.88
279 0.0345 28.99
286 0.0317 31.54
292 0.0288 34.72
299 0.0258 38.76
305 0.0228 43.46
8-13 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
ANNULAR VOLUME DRILL PIPE AND CASING (m3/m) (SI)

Casing Mass Drill Pipe O.D.
O.D. (mm)
60 73 89 102 114 127
114.3 14.14 0.0056 0.0043
15.63 0.0055 0.0041
17.26 0.0053 0.0039
20.09 0.0049 0.0036
22.47 0.0046 0.0032
127.0 17.11 0.0077 0.0064
19.35 0.0074 0.0060
22.32 0.0070 0.0057
26.79 0.0064 0.0051
30.21 0.0060 0.0047
34.53 0.0054 0.0041
139.7 20.83 0.0099 0.0085 0.0065 0.0046
23.07 0.0096 0.0082 0.0062 0.0043
25.30 0.0093 0.0079 0.0059 0.0040
29.76 0.0087 0.0074 0.0054 0.0035
34.23 0.0082 0.0069 0.0048 0.0029
38.69 0.0076 0.0063 0.0043 0.0024
168.3 29.76 0.0157 0.0144 0.0123 0.0104
35.72 0.0159 0.0136 0.0116 0.0097
41.67 0.0141 0.0128 0.0108 0.0089
47.62 0.0135 0.0121 0.0101 0.0082
177.8 25.30 0.0188 0.0175 0.0155 0.0136
29.76 0.0183 0.0169 0.0149 0.0130
34.23 0.0177 0.0164 0.0143 0.0124
38.69 0.0171 0.0158 0.0138 0.0119
43.16 0.0165 0.0152 0.0132 0.0113
47.62 0.0160 0.0146 0.0126 0.0107
52.09 0.0154 0.0141 0.0121 0.0102
56.55 0.0149 0.0136 0.0116 0.0097
193.7 35.72 0.0222 0.0208 0.0188 0.0169 0.0148
39.29 0.0218 0.0204 0.0184 0.0165 0.0144
44.20 0.0211 0.0198 0.0177 0.0158 0.0137
50.15 0.0203 0.0190 0.0170 0.0151 0.0129
58.04 0.0194 0.0181 0.0160 0.0141 0.0120
8-14 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
ANNULAR VOLUME DRILL PIPE AND CASING (m3/m) (SI)

Casing Mass Drill Pipe O.D.
O.D. (mm)
60 73 89 102 114 127
219.1 35.72 0.0304 0.0290 0.0270 0.0251 0.0230
41.67 0.0297 0.0284 0.0264 0.0245 0.0223
47.62 0.0289 0.0276 0.0256 0.0237 0.0215
53.57 0.0282 0.0268 0.0248 0.0229 0.0208
59.53 0.0274 0.0261 0.0240 0.0221 0.0200
65.48 0.0266 0.0253 0.0233 0.0214 0.0192
72.92 0.0257 0.0244 0.0224 0.0205 0.0183
244.5 48.07 0.0382 0.0369 0.0349 0.0330 0.0308 0.0284
53.60 0.0375 0.0362 0.0341 0.0322 0.0300 0.0277
59.53 0.0367 0.0354 0.0334 0.0315 0.0293 0.0269
64.74 0.0360 0.0347 0.0326 0.0307 0.0286 0.0262
69.94 0.0353 0.0340 0.0320 0.0301 0.0279 0.0255
79.62 0.0341 0.0327 0.0307 0.0288 0.0267 0.0243
86.91 0.0332 0.0319 0.0299 0.0280 0.0256 0.0234
90.93 0.0327 0.0314 0.0293 0.0274 0.0253 0.0229
106.85 0.0306 0.0293 0.0273 0.0254 0.0232 0.0208
273.1 48.74 0.0498 0.0485 0.0464 0.0445 0.0424 0.0400
60.27 0.0483 0.0470 0.0450 0.0431 0.0409 0.0385
67.71 0.0473 0.0460 0.0440 0.0421 0.0399 0.0375
75.90 0.0463 0.0450 0.0430 0.0411 0.0389 0.0365
82.59 0.0454 0.0441 0.0421 0.0402 0.0380 0.0356
90.33 0.0444 0.0431 0.0411 0.0392 0.0370 0.0346
97.77 0.0435 0.0421 0.0401 0.0382 0.0360 0.0336
298.5 62.50 0.0594 0.0589 0.0560 0.0541 0.0520 0.0496
69.94 0.0585 0.0571 0.0551 0.0532 0.0511 0.0487
80.36 0.0571 0.0558 0.0537 0.0518 0.0497 0.0473
89.29 0.0559 0.0546 0.0526 0.0507 0.0485 0.0461
339.7 71.43 0.0791 0.0777 0.0757 0.0738 0.0717 0.0693
81.10 0.0778 0.0765 0.0744 0.0725 0.0704 0.0680
90.78 0.0765 0.0752 0.0731 0.0713 0.0691 0.0667
101.20 0.0752 0.0739 0.0719 0.0700 0.0679 0.0654
107.15 0.0747 0.0734 0.0714 0.0695 0.0673 0.0649
406.4 96.73 0.1150 0.1121 0.1116 0.1097 0.1076 0.1052
111.61 0.1130 0.1117 0.1097 0.1078 0.1056 0.1031
125.00 0.1113 0.1100 0.1080 0.1060 0.1039 0.1015
473.1 130.21 0.1568 0.1555 0.1535 0.1516 0.1495 0.1470
508.0 139.89 0.1825 0.1811 0.1791 0.1772 0.1751 0.1727
158.49 0.1801 0.1787 0.1767 0.1748 0.1727 0.1703
197.93 0.1749 0.1736 0.1716 0.1696 0.1675 0.1651
8-15 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
HOLE CAPACITY
Cubic Metres Per Linear Linear Metres Per Cubic
Diameter of Hole (mm) Metre Metre
51 0.0020 493.19
54 0.0023 436.87
57 0.0026 389.68
60 0.0029 349.74
64 0.0032 315.64
67 0.0035 286.30
70 0.0038 260.86
73 0.0042 238.67
76 0.0046 219.20
79 0.0050 202.01
83 0.0054 186.77
86 0.0058 173.19
89 0.0062 161.04
92 0.0067 150.13
95 0.0071 140.29
98 0.0076 131.38
102 0.0081 123.30
105 0.0086 115.94
108 0.0092 109.22
111 0.0097 103.07
114 0.0103 97.42

117 0.0108 92.23
121 0.0114 87.44
124 0.0120 83.01
127 0.0127 78.91
130 0.0133 75.11
133 0.0140 71.57
137 0.0146 68.28
140 0.0153 65.22

143 0.0160 62.35
146 0.0168 59.67
149 0.0175 57.16
8-16 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
HOLE CAPACITY
152 0.0182 54.80
156 0.0190 52.59
159 0.0198 50.50
162 0.0206 58.54
165 0.0214 46.69

168 0.0222 44.95
171 0.0231 43.30
175 0.0240 41.74
178 0.0248 40.26
181 0.0257 38.86
184 0.0266 37.53
187 0.0276 36.27
191 0.0285 35.07

194 0.0295 33.93
197 0.0304 32.85
200 0.0314 31.81
203 0.0324 30.82
206 0.0335 29.88
210 0.0345 28.98
213 0.0356 28.13
216 0.0366 27.30

219 0.0377 26.52
222 0.0388 25.77
225 0.0399 25.05
229 0.0411 24.36
232 0.0422 23.69
235 0.0434 23.06
238 0.0446 22.45
241 0.0457 21.86

244 0.0470 21.29
248 0.0482 20.75
251 0.0494 20.23
8-17 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
HOLE CAPACITY
254 0.0507 19.73
257 0.0520 19.24
260 0.0533 18.78
264 0.0546 18.33
267 0.0559 17.89

270 0.0572 17.47
274 0.0586 17.07
276 0.0599 16.68
279 0.0613 16.30
283 0.0627 15.94
286 0.0642 15.59
289 0.0656 15.25
292 0.0670 14.92

295 0.0685 14.60
298 0.0700 14.29
302 0.0715 13.99
305 0.0730 13.70
308 0.0745 13.42
311 0.0761 13.15
314 0.0776 12.88
318 0.0792 12.68

321 0.0808 12.38
324 0.0824 12.14
327 0.0840 11.90
330 0.0857 11.67
333 0.0873 11.45
337 0.0890 11.24
340 0.0907 11.03
341 0.0924 10.82

346 0.0941 10.63
349 0.0958 10.43
352 0.0976 10.25
8-18 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
HOLE CAPACITY
356 0.0994 10.07
359 0.1011 9.89
362 0.1029 9.72
365 0.1047 9.55
368 0.1066 9.38

371 0.1084 9.22
375 0.1103 9.07
378 0.1122 8.92
381 0.1141 8.77
384 0.1160 8.62
387 0.1179 8.48
391 0.1198 8.35
394 0.1218 8.21

397 0.1238 8.08
400 0.1257 7.95
403 0.1277 7.83
406 0.1298 7.71
413 0.1339 7.47
419 0.1380 7.25
425 0.1422 7.03
432 0.1465 6.83
438 0.1508 6.63
445 0.1552 6.44
451 0.1597 6.26
457 0.1642 6.09
464 0.1688 5.92
470 0.1735 5.76
476 0.1782 5.61
483 0.1830 5.46
489 0.1878 5.32
495 0.1928 5.19
502 0.1977 5.06
508 0.2028 4.93
514 0.2079 4.81
521 0.2130 4.69
527 0.2183 4.58
8-19 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
HOLE CAPACITY
533 0.2235 4.47
540 0.2289 4.37
546 0.2343 4.27
552 0.2398 4.17
559 0.2453 4.08
565 0.2509 3.98
572 0.2566 3.90
578 0.2624 3.81
584 0.2682 3.73
591 0.2740 3.64
597 0.2799 3.57
603 0.2859 3.50
610 0.2920 3.42
616 0.2981 3.35
622 0.3043 3.29
629 0.3105 3.22
635 0.3168 3.16
641 0.3232 3.09
648 0.3296 3.03
654 0.3361 2.98
660 0.3427 2.92
667 0.3493 2.86
673 0.3560 2.81
679 0.3627 2.76
686 0.3695 2.71
692 0.3764 2.66
699 0.3833 2.61
705 0.3903 2.56
711 0.3974 2.52
718 0.4045 2.47
724 0.4117 2.43
730 0.4190 2.39
737 0.4263 2.35
743 0.4337 2.31
749 0.4411 2.27
756 0.4486 2.23
762 0.4562 2.19
768 0.4638 2.16
775 0.4715 2.12
781 0.4793 2.09
8-20 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
HOLE CAPACITY
787 0.4871 2.05
794 0.4950 2.02
800 0.5030 1.99
806 0.5110 1.96
813 0.5191 1.93
819 0.5272 1.90
826 0.5354 1.87
832 0.5437 1.84
838 0.5520 1.81
845 0.5604 1.78
851 0.5689 1.76
857 0.5774 1.73
864 0.5860 1.71
870 0.5946 1.68
876 0.6033 1.66
883 0.6121 1.63
889 0.6210 1.61
895 0.6299 1.59
902 0.6388 1.57
908 0.6479 1.54
8-21 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
DIMENSIONS AND BURST PRESSURES OF CASING (kPa)

Casing O.D. Mass
(mm) (kg/m) H-40 J-55 K-55 C-75 N-80 C-95 P-110
114.3 14.14 21,995 30,200
15.63 34,268 34,268
17.26 36,888 36,888 50,265 53,643 63,710 73,708
20.09 58,332 62,193 73,845 85,567
22.47 98,185
127.0 17.11 29,235 29,235
19.35 33,579 33,579
22.32 39,302 39,302 53,574 57,160 67,487 78,603
26.79 65,503 69,915 83,016 96,116
30.21 73,845 78,741 93,496 108,320
34.53 86,532 92,255 103,562 126,868
139.7 20.83 21,443 29,442 29,442
23.07 33,165 33,165
25.30 36,681 36,681 49,989 53,367 63,365 73,362
29.76 57,365 63,365 75,224 87,153
34.23 68,260 72,811 86,463 100,115
38.69 78,327 85,567 99,219 114,870
168.3 29.76 20,961 28,821 28,821
35.72 35,233 35,233 48,058 51,299 60,883 70,536
41.67 56,953 60,745 72,122 83,636
47.62 64,881 69,226 82,188 95,151
177.8 25.30 15,927
29.76 18,754 25,787 25,787
34.23 30,062 30,062 40,956 43,714 51,919
38.69 34,337 34,337 46,817 49,920 59,297 68,674
43.16 52,747 56,263 66,813 77,362
47.62 58,539 62,469 74,190 85,912
52.10 64,399 68,674 81,568 94,462
56.55 69,777 74,466 88,463 102,391
193.7 35.72 28,545
39.29 28,545 28,545 38,888 41,508 49,299
44.20 44,473 47,507 56,401 65,296
50.15 51,023 54,471 64,675 74,880
58.04 59,366 63,296 75,155 87,015
8-22 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
DIMENSIONS AND BURST PRESSURES OF CASING (kPa)

Casing O.D. Mass
(mm) (kg/m) H-40 J-55 K-55 C-75 N-80 C-95 P-110
219.1 35.72 20,340 20,340
41.67 17,030
47.62 19,720 27,097 27,097
53.57 30,752 30,752 41,990 44,749 53,160
59.53 47,230 50,333 59,790 69,226
65.48 52,470 56,056 66,468 76,948
72.92 58,470 62,330 74,052 85,705
244.5 48.07 15,652
53.57 17,651 24,270 24,270
59.53 27,235 27,235 37,164 39,646 47,024
64.74 40,887 43,645 51,781 60,055
69.94 44,403 47,396 56,194 65,088
79.62 51,230 54,677 64,882 75,156
273.1 48.74 12,549
60.27 15,720 21,581 21,581
67.71 24,684 24,684
75.90 27,787 27,787 37,853 40,404 47,989 55,574
82.49 41,465 44,472 52,816 61,089
90.33 67,295
97.77 73,121
298.5 62.50 13,652
69.94 21,167 21,167
80.36 24,546 24,546
89.29 27,649 27,649 37,646 40,198 47,713
339.7 71.43 11,928
81.10 18,823 18,823
90.78 21,305 21,305
101.20 23,787 23,787
107.15 37,095 44,059
406.4 96.73 11,308
111.61 18,134 18,134
125.01 20,547 20,547
473.1 130.21 11,239 15,514 15,514
508.0 139.89 10,549 14,548 14,548
158.49 16,616 16,616
197.93 21,099 21,099
8-23 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
ACCUMULATOR SIZES IN LITRES
All Bottles in U.S. Gallons

Conversion Factor — 3.785 Litres
Note: 1 gallon is unusable due to displacement of bladder or float.
Valvcon
z All 15 gallon bottles
Ross Hill
z All 15 gallon bottles
Koomey
z 10 gallon, 11 gallon (most common), and 15 gallon bottles
(10 gallon bottles - 54" high; 11 gallon - 60¾" high)
Wagner
z Same as Koomey
NL Shaffer
z All bottles 11 gallon
Hydril
z (BALL) 40 GALLON
z (BALL) 60 GALLON
z (BALL) 80 GALLON
Cameron
z 20 gallon
Hudson
z (BALL) 40 GALLON
z (BALL) 60 GALLON
z (BALL) 80 GALLON
8-24 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
VOLUME CONVERSIONS (US GALLONS)

10 GALLON 11 GALLON 15 GALLON
(litres) (litres) (litres)
1 Bottle 34.06 37.82 52.92
2 Bottles 68.12 75.64 105.84
3 Bottles 102.18 113.46 158.76
4 Bottles 136.24 151.28 211.68
5 Bottles 170.30 189.10 264.60
6 Bottles 204.36 226.92 317.52
7 Bottles 238.42 264.74 370.44
8 Bottles 272.48 302.56 423.36
9 Bottles 306.54 340.38 476.28
10 Bottles 340.60 378.20 529.20
Note: The one gallon displacement of the bladder has been removed from the above figures.
(i.e., 37.85 - 3.79 = 34.06)
8-25 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
RAM TYPE BLOWOUT PREVENTERS

Model or BOP Size Working Pressure Vertical Bore Litres to Litres to
Type mm kPa mm Close Open
HYDRIL COMPANY
V 152 21,000 179.4 5.68 4.92
V 152 34,000 179.4 5.68 4.92
V 254 21,000 279.4 12.49 12.11
V 254 34,000 279.4 12.49 12.11
X 279 70,000 279.4 48.83 44.66
V 305 21,000 346.0 22.33 18.55
V 346 34,000 346.0 22.33 18.55
X 346 70,000 346.0 48.83 44.66
X 425 70,000 425.4 59.05 53.37
X 476 70,000 476.3 64.73 59.05
V 540 14,000 539.8 65.10 61.70
8-26 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables

CAMERON IRON WORKS
U 152 21,000 179.4 5.04 4.85
U 152 34,000 179.4 5.04 4.85
U 179 70,000 179.4 5.04 4.85
U 254 21,000 279.4 12.72 12.11
U 254 34,000 279.4 12.72 12.11
U 279 70,000 279.4 12.72 12.11
U 305 21,000 346.0 21.96 20.63
U 346 34,000 346.0 21.96 20.63
U 346 70,000 346.0 21.96 20.63
U 425 21,000 425.5 37.10 40.12
U 425 34,000 425.5 37.10 40.12
U 476 70,000 476.3 87.06 94.25
U 508 14,000 527.1 31.80 29.71
U 508 21,000 527.1 31.80 29.71
U 540 14,000 539.8 31.80 29.70
U 540 70,000 539.8 100.30 91.22
U 679 14,000 679.5 39.37 37.28
U 679 21,000 679.5 39.37 37.28
QRC 152 21,000 179.4 3.07 3.60
QRC 152 34,000 179.4 3.07 3.60
QRC 203 21,000 228.6 8.93 10.22
QRC 203 34,000 228.6 8.93 10.22
QRC 254 21,000 279.4 10.49 12.04
QRC 254 34,000 279.4 10.49 12.04
QRC 305 21,000 346.0 16.73 19.31
QRC 406 14,000 425.5 22.71 26.69
QRC 457 14,000 450.9 22.71 26.69
QRC 508 14,000 450.9 22.71 26.69
SS 152 21,000 179.4 3.03 2.65
SS 152 34,000 179.4 3.03 2.65
SS 203 21,000 228.6 5.68 4.92
SS 203 34,000 228.6 5.68 4.92
SS 254 21,000 279.4 5.68 4.92
SS 254 34,000 279.4 5.68 4.92
SS 305 21,000 346.0 10.98 9.46
SS 356 34,000 346.0 10.98 9.46
8-27 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables

CAMERON IRON WORKS (continued)
Type F 152 21,000 179.4 5.68 8.71
with 152 34,000 179.4 5.68 8.71
Type W2 178 70,000 179.4 5.68 8.71
Operator 203 21,000 228.6 10.60 14.01
203 34,000 228.6 10.60 14.01
254 21,000 279.4 10.60 14.01
254 34,000 279.4 10.60 14.01
279 70,000 279.4 10.60 14.01
305 21,000 346.0 15.52 20.06
356 34,000 346.0 15.52 20.06
Type F 152 21,000 179.4 8.71 11.55
with 152 34,000 179.4 8.71 11.55
Type W 178 70,000 179.4 8.71 11.55
Operator 203 21,000 228.6 14.01 17.41
203 34,000 228.6 14.01 17.41
254 21,000 279.4 14.01 17.41
254 34,000 279.4 14.01 17.41
279 70,000 279.4 14.01 17.41
305 21,000 346.0 25.74 30.66
356 34,000 346.0 25.74 30.66
Type F 152 21,000 179.4 15.03 13.10
with 152 34,000 179.4 15.03 13.10
Type L 178 70,000 179.4 15.03 13.10
Operator 203 21,000 228.6 25.93 23.43
203 34,000 228.6 25.93 23.43
254 21,000 279.4 25.93 23.43
254 34,000 279.4 25.93 23.43
279 70,000 279.4 25.93 23.43
305 21,000 346.0 38.99 35.51
356 34,000 346.00 38.99 35.51
8-28 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables

CAMERON IRON WORKS (continued)
Type F 152 21,000 179.4 1.97 3.98
with 152 34,000 179.4 1.97 3.98
Type H 178 70,000 179.4 1.97 3.98
Operator 203 21,000 228.6 3.41 6.82
203 34,000 228.6 3.41 6.82
254 21,000 279.4 3.41 6.82
254 34,000 279.4 3.41 6.82
279 70,000 279.4 3.41 6.82
305 21,000 346.0 5.76 10.22
356 34,000 346.0 5.76 10.22
8-29 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables

NL SHAFFER
LWS with 103 70,000 103.2 1.89 1.79
Locking 152 21,000 179.4 4.54 3.79
Manual 152 34,000 179.4 4.54 3.79
Screw 179 70,000 179.4 24.04 22.30
203 21,000 228.6 9.77 8.56
203 34,000 228.6 9.77 8.56
229 70,000 228.6 9.24 9.24
254 21,000 279.4 6.63 5.49
254 34,000 279.4 11.28 9.92
279 70,000 279.4 13.70 12.53
305 21,000 346.0 12.72 11.17
346 34,000 346.0 12.72 11.17
346 70,000 346.0 40.09 37.17
LWP 152 21,000 179.4 2.08 1.93
203 21,000 228.6 2.92 2.92
LWS 254 34,000 279.4 17.98 15.82
Poslock *254 34,000 279.4 35.24 32.10
279 70,000 279.4 15.90 14.01
*279 70,000 279.4 31.14 28.39
305 21,000 346.0 20.21 17.79
*305 21,000 346.0 39.97 36.41
346 34,000 346.0 20.06 16.68
*346 34,000 346.0 39.97 36.41
346 70,000 346.0 43.76 39.82
Types 152 21,000 179.4 10.41 8.71
B&E 152 34,000 179.4 10.41 8.71
Rams 203 21,000 228.6 10.41 8.71
203 34,000 228.6 10.41 8.71
254 21,000 279.4 12.30 10.22
254 34,000 279.4 12.30 10.22
279 70,000 279.4 13.70 12.53
305 21,000 346.0 13.44 10.98
356 34,000 346.0 13.44 10.98
406 14,000 393.7 13.82 11.36
* Shear Rams
8-30 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
ANNULAR PREVENTERS
HYDRIL COMPANY
GK 152 21,000 179.4 10.79 8.48
GK 152 34,000 179.4 14.61 12.49
GK 179 70,000 179.4 35.66 26.80
GK 203 21,000 227.0 16.39 12.91
GK 203 34,000 227.0 25.89 21.96
GK 229 70,000 228.6 60.18 45.23
GK 254 21,000 279.4 28.12 20.97
GK 254 34,000 279.4 37.13 30.17
GK 279 70,000 279.4 95.01 71.42
GK 305 21,000 346.0 43.00 33.84
GK 346 34,000 346.0 68.06 53.56
GK 346 70,000 346.0 130.70 93.34
GK 406 14,000 425.5 65.94 47.43
GK 406 21,000 425.5 79.56 59.81
GK 425 34,000 425.5 108.63 75.44
GK 457 14,000 454.0 79.83 54.66
MSP 152 14,000 179.4 10.79 7.50
MSP 203 14,000 227.0 17.30 11.17
MSP 254 14,000 279.4 28.12 19.80
8-31 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
ANNULAR PREVENTERS
CAMERON IRON WORKS
A 152 34,000 179.4 8.33 7.19
A 152 70,000 179.4 15.15 11.74
A 279 34,000 279.4 29.53 24.60
A 279 70,000 279.4 45.80 39.74
A 346 34,000 346.1 58.7 52.6
A 346 70,000 346.1 81.4 70.8
A 425 34,000 425.9 124.9 109.8
D 179 34,000 179.4 6.4 5.3
D 179 70,000 179.4 11.1 9.7
D 279 21,000 279.4 21.4 17.8
D 279 34,000 279.4 21.4 17.8
D 279 70,000 279.4 38.4 34.3
D 346 21,000 346.1 45.9 39.1
D 346 34,000 346.1 45.9 39.1
D 346 70,000 346.1 68.5 61.1
D 425 34,000 425.5 84.5 71.9
NL SHAFFER
Spherical 152 21,000 179.4 17.30 12.15
Preventers 152 34,000 179.4 17.30 12.15
203 21,000 228.6 27.37 19.04
203 34,000 228.6 41.38 33.12
254 21,000 279.4 41.64 25.66
254 34,000 279.4 70.67 55.23
305 21,000 346.0 88.95 55.53
346 34,000 346.0 89.25 65.90
346 70,000 346.0 193.95 161.55
425 34,000 425.5 125.89 96.94
8-32 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED VALVES

Model or Line Size Working Pressure Bore Size Litres to Litres to
Type mm kPa mm Open Close
CAMERON IRON WORKS
HCR 102 21,000 101.6 2.3 2.0
HCR 102 34,000 101.6 2.3 2.0
F 76 14,000 79.4 0.6 0.6
F 76 34,000 79.4 0.9 0.9
F 76 70,000 79.4 1.1 1.1
F 102 14,000 104.8 1.1 1.1
F 102 34,000 104.8 1.1 1.1
F 102 70,000 104.8 2.2 2.2
DV 102 21,000 101.6 3.0 4.2
DV 102 34,000 101.6 3.0 4.2
ROCKWELL MANUFACTURING CO. (MCEVOY)
AC Valve. 76 14,000 NA 1.1 1.0
With U-1 76 21,000 NA 1.9 1.7
Hyd. Opr 76 34,000 NA 1.9 1.7
102 14,000 NA 2.6 2.3
102 21,000 NA 2.6 2.6
102 34,000 NA 3.9 3.7
8-33 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED VALVES

Model or Line Size Working Pressure Bore Size Litres to Litres to
Type mm kPa mm Open Close
NL SHAFFER
Flo-Seal 76 14,000 79.4 1.5 1.5
with 76 21,000 79.4 1.5 1.5
Ramlock 78 70,000 77.8 2.3 2.3
102 21,000 103.2 3.0 3.0
102 34,000 103.2 3.0 3.0
103 70,000 103.2 3.0 3.0
Type DB 76 21,000 79.4 1.1 1.1
76 34,000 79.4 1.1 1.1
78 70,000 77.8 2.3 2.3
102 21,000 103.2 3.0 3.0
102 34,000 102.2 3.0 3.0
103 70,000 103.2 3.0 3.0
Flo-Seal 76 14,000 79.4 1.1 1.1
76 21,000 79.4 1.1 1.1
76 34,000 79.4 1.1 1.1
78 70,000 77.8 2.3 2.3
102 21,000 103.2 3.0 3.0
102 34,000 103.2 3.0 3.0
103 70,000 103.2 4.9 4.9
8-34 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
DOUBLE ACTING DUPLEX MUD PUMP CAPACITIES PER CYCLE

(m3 per Revolution — 90% Volumetric Efficiency — Rod Deducted)
Stroke Length (mm)
Liner Size
(mm) 305 356 381 406 457 508
102 0.00787 0.00917 — — — —
108 0.00894 0.01041 — — — —
114 0.01013 0.01181 0.01229 0.01380 0.01424 0.01584
121 0.01143 0.01332 0.01391 0.01485 0.01620 0.01801
127 0.01278 0.01491 0.01561 0.01644 0.01823 0.02027
133 0.01421 0.01657 0.01738 0.01854 0.02036 0.02264
140 0.01571 0.01830 0.01927 0.02054 0.02262 0.02514
146 0.01727 0.02016 0.02126 0.02262 0.02496 0.02775
152 0.01891 0.02207 0.02323 0.02480 0.02742 0.03046
159 0.02061 0.02405 0.02542 0.02707 0.02997 0.0331
165 0.02239 0.02607 0.02760 0.02944 0.03262 0.03625
172 0.02422 0.02825 0.02990 0.03189 0.03539 0.03934
178 0.02614 0.03049 0.03228 0.03443 0.03825 0.04252
184 0.02811 0.03279 0.03477 0.03707 0.04122 0.04582
191 — — 0.03733 0.03981 0.04431 0.04923
197 — — 0.03997 0.04264 0.04749 0.04277
8-35 October 2006

Chapter 8: Tables
TRIPLEX SINGLE ACTING MUD PUMP CAPACITIES PER CYCLE

(m3 per Revolution — 100% Volumetric Efficiency)
Stroke Length (mm)
Liner Size
(mm) 178 191 203 216 229 235 254 279 305
76 0.00243 0.00261 0.00278 0.00296 0.00313 0.00321 0.00335 0.00382 0.00417
83 0.00285 0.00305 0.00326 0.00347 0.00367 0.00377 0.00409 0.00450 0.00488
89 0.00331 0.00355 0.00378 0.00401 0.00424 0.00439 0.00474 0.00518 0.00568
95 0.00378 0.00409 0.00434 0.00461 0.00488 0.00504 0.00541 0.00598 0.00649
102 0.00431 0.00461 0.00474 0.00525 0.00556 0.00572 0.00617 0.00682 0.00742
108 0.00488 0.00521 0.00556 0.00595 0.00628 0.00642 0.00696 0.00768 0.00836
114 0.00548 0.00587 0.00623 0.00666 0.00704 0.00723 0.00784 0.00858 0.00938
121 0.00609 0.00653 0.00696 0.00741 0.00784 0.00806 0.00870 0.00957 0.01044
127 0.00677 0.00723 0.00773 0.00822 0.00871 0.00893 0.00965 0.01064 0.01159
133 0.00745 0.00798 0.00851 0.00905 0.00957 0.00986 0.01064 0.01170 0.01275
140 0.00817 0.00874 0.00953 0.00992 0.01051 0.01078 0.01170 0.01283 0.01400
146 0.00993 0.00957 0.01022 0.01086 0.01146 0.01181 0.01275 0.01404 0.01533
152 0.00971 0.01041 0.01113 0.01181 0.01250 0.01286 0.01389 0.01528 0.01669
159 0.01056 0.01132 0.01207 0.01283 0.01359 0.01395 0.01507 0.01658 0.01809
165 0.01143 0.01223 0.01305 0.01385 0.01469 0.01509 0.01631 0.01795 0.01960
172 0.01230 0.01320 0.01409 0.01494 0.01582 0.01626 0.01760 0.01935 0.02111
178 0.01324 0.01420 0.01513 0.01606 0.01703 0.01749 0.01892 0.02083 0.02273
8-36 October 2006

CHAPTER 9
CASE STUDIES
Chapter 9: Case Studies
CASE STUDIES
CASE STUDY 1
Occurrence Blow
Duration 3 Days
Operation at the Time of Occurrence Drilling, Tripping Out
Formation Glauconitic
Depth 877 m
FP or Drilling Fluid Density 9200 kPa or 1160 kg/m3
Cause of Blow/Blowout
Human error — swabbing while tripping. In addition, the Milk River formation may have
contributed to the cause by slowly feeding gas into the mud and reducing its density.
Description of Event
While tripping out of the well for a bit change, a kick occurred and was undetected until gas
reached surface. The bit was at 534 m. All mud was blown from the well. The flow was
directed to flare through the choke manifold.
Control Procedures
Complicating the kill procedure was the inability to run back to bottom with the drill pipe.
Several circulations of weighted drilling mud over a period of 2 days were required to kill the
well. The well was eventually controlled using the low choke method and pipe was run back
to bottom to complete the well kill.
Hydrocarbon and/or Equipment Loss

113 × 103 m3 sweet natural gas (4 MMCF)
Injuries
None.
ACTIONS TO PREVENT FUTURE OCCURRENCES
Ensure sufficient mud density is achieved prior to tripping to offset swab pressure losses.
9-1 October 2006

CASE STUDY 2
Occurrence Blow
Duration 8 hours
Formation Milk River
Depth 830 m
Improper tripping procedures.
Well was flowing a little during trip out, crew felt gas coming from Milk River formation a
normal occurrence. Flow check was written on trip sheet at this point. With the collars out
of the hole, the well blew in.
Control Procedures
Well was shut-in and flow directed through the manifold and degasser to the flare pit.
Approximately 100 sacks of Barite were mixed at 1.5 min/sack. “Top killed the well.”
Pump kill weight mud — bleed-off pressure, pump 4 m3 — bleed-off pressure, continued
until shut-in pressure equals “0”. Trip in drill pipe and circulate out entrained gas.

Less than 14 × 103 m3 sweet gas, with a small amount of produced water to flare pit.
Injuries
None.
Ensure adequate mud density exists before beginning trip.

Do not trip when well is flowing.
9-2 October 2006

CASE STUDY 3
Occurrence Blowout
Duration 3 Days
Operation at the Time of Occurrence Drilling, Underbalanced
Formation Viking
Depth 2668.5 m
FP or Drilling Fluid Density 1105 kg/m3
Inadequate mud density caused kick. The blowout was caused by excessive casing wear
under the casing bowl due to a bent kelly.
Drilling to core point underbalanced. Decided to circulate up bottom hole sample and check
for core point. Geologist noted gas detector reading increased. Flow check conducted. Well
flowing. Casing pressure at MACP, directed flow to flare. Surface casing just below bowl
ruptured. Mud and gas flowed from ruptured surface casing.
Control Procedures
Mixed kill mud to 1300 kg/m3 and pumped down the drill pipe to kill the well. Installed
retrievable casing packer, exposed ruptured joint, backed out and replaced joint, cemented
and pressure tested.
Approximately 28.2 × 103 m3 sweet gas.
Injuries
None.

Ensure adequate mud density exists.
9-3 October 2006

CASE STUDY 4
Occurrence Blowout
Duration 9 Days
Operation at the Time of Occurrence Drilling
Formation Sparky
Depth 666 m
FP or Drilling Fluid Density 13000 kPa
Unexpected high pressure Sparky sand, which was pressure, supported by a nearby water
injector.
While drilling ahead in the Sparky formation, an influx occurred. The well was shut-in.
Weighted mud was mixed and circulated. Subsequently, the drill string became stuck.
Continued circulations to kill the well were complicated by lost circulation and an
underground flow.
Control Procedures
Continue to increase mud weight in increments until well was static at 1935 kg/m3.
Attempted to spot weighted cement plug across Sparky interval, but well started to flow
again. Mix mud and circulate until well was killed at 2320 kg/m3. Abandon the well with
cement.

12 joints of drill collar.
Injuries
None.

Exercise more attention when drilling in a water flood area and have the nearby injectors
shut-in prior to drill operation commencing.
9-4 October 2006

CASE STUDY 5
Occurrence Blowout
Duration 3 Days
Formation Belloy
Depth 775 m
Human error compounded by equipment failure — inadequate tripping procedures (hole fill
and swabbing) suspected as the cause of the influx. The blowout resulted from failure of the
HCV to open.
The well was shut-in after gas appeared at surface. The rig crew picked up and installed the
kelly. Gas broached to surface outside the surface casing and was ignited by the rig motors.
Control Procedures
High-density drilling fluid was circulated through drill pipe after the rig debris had been
removed.

125 × 103 m3 sweet gas, drilling rig and related equipment.
Injuries
2 crew members sustained burn injuries.

Improved tripping procedures with respect to hole fill and drill pipe withdrawal rate.
Ensure all BOP equipment is functioning and crews knowledgeable of appropriate
actions.
9-5 October 2006

CASE STUDY 6
Occurrence Blowout
Duration 20 Days
Operation at the Time of Occurrence Drilling, Tripping In
Formation Debolt and/or Wabamun
Depth 1925 m
FP or Drilling Fluid Density 19,900 kPa or 1140 kg/m3
Human error — swabbing.
A gas kick was experienced while tripping in the hole. The well was shut-in and an attempt
was made to circulate out the kick; however, the volume of gas was too great, causing an
underground blowout.
Control Procedures
Continued circulation and production from relief well was required to regain control.

Approximately 1000 × 103 m3 of gas (2% H2S), chokes, rig manifold, valves on flare line and
separator.
Injuries
None.
Improving tripping procedures.
9-6 October 2006

CASE STUDY 7
Reprinted from the Canadian Petroleum Safety Council - Safety Information - Safety Alerts -
2000 (June, 2000)
SAFETY ALERT
(Sweet Gas Blowout)
Incident:
At approximately 06:45 hrs. the morning of November 15, 1999 Berkley Petroleum Corp.
(BPC) experienced an uncontrolled sweet natural gas flow while drilling BPC Wild River 2-
21-56-23 W5M. The blowout occurred while circulating out a kick after tripping from a
drilled depth of 2962m (while tripping in - bit depth 2578m). The uncontrolled flow was
experienced through a rupture in the surface casing immediately below the casing head.
No injuries were sustained during the incident, but the gas subsequently caught fire and
ultimately, Command Drilling Inc. (Command) Rig #9 and the well were a total loss.
Casing Failure:
The surface casing (200mm 35.7 kg/m J-55 ERW) ruptured immediately below the casing
head at a pressure of approximately 4000 kPa. This is equivalent to approximately 20% of
the new casing rating (20,300 kPa). An independent metallurgical consulting company has
completed an inspection of the failed casing and have concluded the following:
z Internal pressure causing a catastrophic burst is the primary cause of failure.

z No manufacturing or material defects were present that contributed to the failure.
z The wall thickness of the casing in the vicinity of the failure is approximately 0.7mm.
z This represents approximately 10% of the original wall thickness.
z The wall thinning is the result of circumferential (rotational) wear and is eccentric
towards the catwalk side of the rig. The diameter of the wear "print" on the casing is
approximately 160mm.
z The portion of the casing inside the casing head has been worn completely through.
z The casing head and lower BOP spool show similar indications of wear.
z The worn portion of the casing decreases approximately linearly and is not evident
beyond a distance of 0.7m from (below) the casing head.
9-7 October 2006

Cause of Casing Wear:
It is likely that the wear was caused by the rotating tool joints below the kelly saver sub
while drilling. This is supported by the following:
z The diameter of the tool joints are approximately 159mm. This matches the diameter
of the worn portion of casing.
z The crews have reported that a slight rig misalignment did exist. The derrick was
leaning towards the back of the rig, which will cause the swivel to also lean towards
the back of the rig. The bottom of the kelly is subsequently pushed towards the front
of the rig with the kelly bushing acting as a fulcrum. This matches the location of the
worn portion of casing.
z The saver sub on the bottom of the kelly includes a 171 mm OD rubber
approximately 0.7m above the pin. If the rotating tool joints were causing the wear,
then the wear would be minimized or even eliminated after the saver rubber enters the
restricted ID of the casing head. This closely matches the wear profile confirmed by
inspection i.e. no wear was evident beyond 0.7m below the casing head.
z It is likely that the majority of the wear occurred while drilling with the first bit under
the shoe as this was the only bit run rotary (92 rotating hours from depth range 421m
to 1657m). All other bits were run on mud motors with greatly reduced drill string
RPM. Also, the transverse force of the tool joint on the casing at the base of the kelly
due to a rig misalignment is inversely proportionally to well depth because of drill
string tensile effects.
Cause of Fire:
During the incident the floor motor was not shut off as there was too much associated gas in
the area of the drill floor i.e. it was judged unsafe for personnel to return to the rig floor in an
attempt to kill the motor. If the motor could have been shut off, the likelihood of fire would
have been greatly reduced.
9-8 October 2006

Conclusions:
z The kick, which was experienced, and the procedures, which were in place and used
to recover from that were in essence quite routine. The kick would have been quickly
circulated out had it not been for the failure of the surface casing. In fact, the highest
surface pressure had already been experienced as evidenced by the fact that the pit
volumes were reducing when the failure occurred.
z Despite the fact that significant casing wear was experienced, there was no obvious
indications of wear to the rig personnel (i.e. no reported steel filings and/or excessive
noise in the cellar while drilling).
z According to the statements of the crews, the maximum rig misalignment was in the
order of 6 in. (single hanging in elevator from hole centre). These statements are
substantiated by the fact that the rig was equipped with hydraulic levelling jacks.
Thus, the crews will typically re-align the rig very easily and quickly by way of the
hydraulic jacks when the slips begin to become difficult to pull/set.
z It is hard to visualize such significant wear with only slight misalignment. This
suggests that there may have been some form of harmonic vibration while rotating the
drill string at high RPM’s, which could in turn have caused additional lateral forces of
the tool joints on the casing. If this were the case though, it is not expected that the
casing wear would be so localized only to the front of the rig and in fact would be
more random.
Recommendations:
The single-most effective effort to prevent a similar re-occurrence of such an incident is to

raise the level of awareness of all operations personnel as to the root cause(s) of the incident.
Areas of focus indicating a possible casing wear situation would include the following:
z Any indication of rig misalignment, knowing that significant wear may occur with
only a very minor misalignment.
z Dog-legs and/or well deviation.
z Impact or abrasive noise in the area of the cellar while drilling and/or tripping.
z Evidence of steel filings in the drilled cuttings.
9-9 October 2006

Additionally, the following "hard" policies have been incorporated into BPC operations and
should be considered by industry:
z Top 2 surface casing joints to be of the thickest wall and highest grade possible
considering available supply and specifics of the well design. This will not eliminate
wear but will improve wear resistance.
z Casing wear bushings to be run on all drilling operations, but as wear bushings will
not eliminate wear, these must be pulled at regular intervals on trips and used only as
an indicator of a casing wear situation.
z If wear is suspected and/or prior to entering any suspected over-pressured zone,
consideration should be given to pressure testing the surface casing. This is in
addition to the EUB required 30 day pressure test.
z All mechanical rigs are equipped with remote motor kills.
If any additional information relating to the incident is required, please feel free to contact
Hugh Munro at BPC (571-3600) or Rob Wagemakers at Command (269-7244).
This material is presented for information purposes only. Managers & supervisors should
evaluate this information to determine if it can be applied to their own situations and
practices.
9-10 October 2006

CASE STUDY 8
Reprinted from the Canadian Petroleum Safety Council - Safety Alert, Number #41,
2000/09/18
SAFETY ALERT
(Sour Gas Blowout)
Incident:
On Sunday, March 12, 2000, at approximately 08:30 hrs, a horizontal well experienced a
kick while drilling at a measured depth of 1183m. The Company was drilling the 222 mm
build section and the wellbore was at 85 degrees and within 30 metres of the intermediate
casing point. At 08:15 hrs a connection was made and directional drilling continued. Pit
volumes began to increase, drilling was stopped, and the Driller was about to pick up off
bottom when the well blew in at 08:30 hrs. Operations began to kill the well using heavy
weighted mud, but after four hours, the surface control equipment and manifold washed out.
On March 13, 2000, at 21:00 hrs, the well was ignited to eliminate the venting of raw gas
containing 0.4% H2S into the atmosphere. Removal of the damaged rig began and two relief
wells were initiated to kill the blowout. The well was successfully killed on March 26, 2000
and cement circulated from the relief well. Final abandonment of the well was completed on
March 31, 2000. No injuries were sustained during the incident. Equipment loss on location
was limited to substructure, drawworks, and derrick, as well as, directional tools and drill
pipe.
Loss of Control:
Loss of well control is attributed to the following causes:
1. An isolated Glauconite stringer of virgin reservoir pressure lightened the mud density
enough to allow the gas cap in the main sand to enter the wellbore. Mud densities were
within the range required to control the reservoir and were similar to offsetting wells
drilled in the pool between 1997 and 1999. The gradual lowering of the Mud Density due
to virgin pressure gas could have been detected had a mud gas detector been used. This
may have provided an early warning of gas increasing in the mud stream.
2. A second contributing factor is the Milk River formation, which had been active on an
intermittent bases during the entire hole, which is typical of wells in South Eastern
Alberta. Milk River activity can easily disguise other zone influxes.
9-11 October 2006

3. Insufficient surface casing depth for the encountered flowing pressures to allow a full
BOP shut-in and not exceed the Maximum Allowable Casing Pressure (MACP) at the
surface casing shoe.
4. A high sand and shale content was carried by the escaping gas, which rapidly washed out
the surface control equipment. Options to repair, control and kill were quickly eliminated
due to the erosion of equipment by the escaping gas.
Recommendations:
To assist in preventing a recurrence procedures have been implemented for drilling future
wells into the Little Bow "S" Pool. All field personal and drilling crews must adhere to the
procedures that follow. It is stressed that any kick warning signs will result in the well being
shut-in and the source determined and kick identification is the responsibility of every one on
location.
Drilling Procedures:
1. Prior to drilling into the Glauconite formation the mud density will be increased to 1215
kg/m3, which will provide a 700 kPa, overbalance on a 12 MPa virgin reservoir pressure.
2. Flow checks will be conducted upon penetrating any potential zones, including the
Glauconite.
3. A heavy weighted pill will be placed from the base of the Milk River to surface when
tripping.
4. Gas detection will be installed to measure background gas values from drill out at the
surface casing shoe until the intermediate casing is set.
5. One complete Bottoms Up Circulation, prior to penetrating the Glauconite, will be
conducted to verify the mud properties and establish a baseline gas background using the
gas detector.
6. Surface casing will be set at 300 m or within 15 m of the Milk River formation.
7. A leak-off test will be conducted on selected wells to verify the Maximum Allowable
Casing Pressure (MACP).
8. Metal fatigue and wall thickness will be verified on the BOP spools, valves, lines, and
choke manifold.
9. A second spool will be added to the BOP stack with a 75 mm line to flare.
9-12 October 2006

APPENDIX I
CRITICAL SOUR WELLS

Appendix I: Critical Sour Wells
CRITICAL SOUR WELLS
DEFINITIONS
Sour gas is natural gas, including solution gas, containing hydrogen sulphide (H2S).
Sour well is any oil or gas well expected to encounter sour gas-bearing formations during
drilling, or any oil or gas well capable of producing sour gas.
The phrase “critical sour well” is a designation that reflects the proposed well's proximity to
an urban centre and its maximum potential hydrogen sulphide (H2S) release rate during the
drilling stage.
A casing flow or open-hole flow is part of the well configuration when the well is
designated a “critical sour well”.
Critical sour wells include
(a) any well from which the maximum potential H2S release rate is 0.01 cubic metres per
second (m3/s) or greater, and less than 0.1 m3/s, and which is located within 500 metres
(m) of the corporate boundaries of an urban centre.
(b) any well from which the maximum potential H2S release rate is 0.1 m3/s or greater, and
less than 0.3 m3/s, and which is located within 1.5 kilometres (km) of the corporate
boundaries of an urban centre.
(c) any well from which the maximum potential H2S release rate is 0.3 m3/s or greater, and
less than 2.0 m3/s, and which is located within 5 km of the corporate boundaries of an
urban centre.
(d) any well from which the maximum potential H2S release rate is 2.0 m3/s or greater.
(e) any other well which the Board classifies as a critical sour well having regard to the
maximum potential H2S release rate, the population density, the environment, the
sensitivity of the area where the well would be located, and the expected complexities
during the drilling phase.
I-1 October 2006

ERP
z Emergency Response Plan
IRP
z Industry Recommended Practices
MANAGEMENT’S RESPONSIBILITIES
Communication
Operator's Representative
IRP - The operator's representative (Drilling Foreman) has overall responsibility to his
company for the well and for compliance with all regulations relating to the
operation of the well. He must establish a chain of command and a line of
communication at the well-site. The operator will delegate one representative as
having overall control in the chain of command.
Note: For the purpose of this document, the operator's representative would
include both the operator's employee Drilling Foreman and the Consultant
Drilling Supervisor.
Leadership
Contractor's Representative
IRP - The Drilling Contractor's representative (Rig Manager/Toolpusher) has the

responsibility to the operator's representative for the operation of the rig during
the drilling of the well. This provides for a single chain of command for the well
operation. He is responsible to his company for the rig equipment and crew, and
for compliance with all regulations relating to the operation of the rig.
I-2 October 2006

Shared Responsibility
IRP - Day-to-day operations on a lease are a shared responsibility between the

representatives, but the ultimate responsibility for supervision of the well
operation is assigned to the operator's representative.
Supervision
Level of Supervision Required When Critical Zone Open
IRP - Two operator representatives must be available to the operation on a 12-hour

shift basis while the critical zone is open. In addition, one contractor's
representative must be available to the operation on a 24-hour call basis.
Level of Supervisory Expertise
IRP - Both the operator's representative and the contractor representative must have
sufficient experience to handle all operations and conditions that could
reasonably occur during drilling and evaluation of the critical zone, and have
certification consistent with the Regulatory Requirements and the Training IRP.
Rig Crew
Level of Crew While Critical Zone Open
IRP - A minimum of 5 crewmembers must be on each shift while the critical zone is
open. Each member must have sufficient experience to fully handle his individual
responsibilities and to fully understand his responsibilities in the well control
operation.
Note: The use of 8-hour or 12-hour shifts should be reviewed between the
operator and contractor considering the nature of the operations in the
critical zone.
I-3 October 2006

Crew Training
Training should be consistent as identified in EUB ID 97-6.
4.5.1 Supervision
(1) On-site supervisors must have a current PITS Second Line Supervisor BOP Well
Control certificate, H2S Alive certification and experience in drilling sour wells.
(2) During the critical period of drilling operation, sufficient supervision must be on site
and available so that no individual supervisor is required to work a shift longer than
12 hours.
4.5.2 Rig Crew
(1) On-site rig managers must have a current PITS Second Line Supervisor BOP Well
Control certificate, and drillers must have a current PITS First Line Supervisor BOP
Well Control certificate.
(2) On-site rig managers and drillers must have H2S Alive certification and experience in
drilling sour wells.
(3) Each driller must have an adequate understanding of the correct operation of all kick
detection and monitoring equipment.
(4) A minimum five (5)-man drilling crew shall be maintained and all crew members
shall have H2S Alive certification.
4.5.3 Service Personnel
(1) Key on-site service personnel including mud-men, loggers, geologists, etc. shall have
previous experience in sour well drilling operations.
(2) All well-site personnel shall be trained in H2S safety.
4.5.4 Safety Specialists and Equipment
During the critical period of the drilling operation, safety personnel and adequate safety
equipment for all workers must be on site (minimum requirements are specified by the
Occupational Health & Safety (OH&S) Act and Regulations.
I-4 October 2006

APPENDIX II
GAUGES AND
SENDING UNITS
Appendix II: Gauges and Sending Units
GAUGES AND SENDING UNITS
INTRODUCTION
Pressure gauges and their relative accuracy will affect the entire well control operation.
A precharge pressure of 200 kPa is required on the diaphragm of the sending unit in
accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.
An accurate calibration of precharges can be verified with the individual gauges as follows:
TYPE OF SENDING CALIBRATION

UNIT
SWACO The gauge reads zero initially. With correct precharge,
the gauge will record 200 kPa.
TOTCO The gauge is recessed 200 kPa below zero initially.
Correct precharge will result in the gauge reading 0
kPa.
MARTIN DECKER The gauge is recessed 200 kPa below zero initially.
kPa.
Trapped Air
An improperly pumped line that is retaining trapped air will seriously affect all gauge
readings for the following reasons:
z Due to the compressibility of air within the hydraulic lines, the gauge will record
pressures that do not correspond linearly.
z The variation associated with a gauge having trapped air inside the hydraulic lines will
not be a constant value at high and low pressures.
z The compressibility of the air induces a vibration on the diaphragm, which affects its
elasticity and, in turn, reduces the diaphragm’s life expectancy.
II-1 October 2006

Piston-Type Gauges
Piston-type gauges are commonly associated with operations involving higher pressures.
Blowout preventers rated at 70,000 kPa or higher often require these gauges since the
expected pressures exceed the pressure ratings of diaphragm units.
Piston-type gauges can be influenced by high sand concentrations in the drilling fluids,
which restrict their vertical movement.
Choke operations usually encounter increases or decreases of pressure in larger magnitudes
than those associated with diaphragms.
II-2 October 2006

GAUGES AND SENDING UNITS
INTRODUCTION
Pressure gauges and their relative accuracy will affect the entire well control operation.
A precharge pressure of 200 kPa is required on the diaphragm of the sending unit in
accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.
An accurate calibration of precharges can be verified with the individual gauges as follows:
TYPE OF SENDING CALIBRATION

UNIT
SWACO The gauge reads zero initially. With correct precharge,
the gauge will record 200 kPa.
TOTCO The gauge is recessed 200 kPa below zero initially.
kPa.
MARTIN DECKER The gauge is recessed 200 kPa below zero initially.
kPa.
Trapped Air
An improperly pumped line that is retaining trapped air will seriously affect all gauge
readings for the following reasons:
z Due to the compressibility of air within the hydraulic lines, the gauge will record
pressures that do not correspond linearly.
z The variation associated with a gauge having trapped air inside the hydraulic lines will
not be a constant value at high and low pressures.
z The compressibility of the air induces a vibration on the diaphragm, which affects its
elasticity and, in turn, reduces the diaphragm’s life expectancy.
II-1 October 2006

Piston-Type Gauges
Piston-type gauges are commonly associated with operations involving higher pressures.
Blowout preventers rated at 70,000 kPa or higher often require these gauges since the
expected pressures exceed the pressure ratings of diaphragm units.
Piston-type gauges can be influenced by high sand concentrations in the drilling fluids,
which restrict their vertical movement.
Choke operations usually encounter increases or decreases of pressure in larger magnitudes
than those associated with diaphragms.
II-2 October 2006

APPENDIX III
LEAK-OFF TESTS
Appendix III: Leak-Off Tests
LEAK-OFF TESTS
THEORY OF LEAK-OFF TESTS
The fracture pressure, which is the combined total of the hydrostatic and surface applied
pressures, is the pressure required to rupture the open hole section.
The resulting fractures can be vertical or horizontal in direction, although it is assumed that
vertical fractures are most dominant. It is the vertical fracture on a shallow surface casing
that presents the greatest potential danger associated with well control operations if the
fracture travels to surface.
TEST PROCEDURES
After the casing and surface control equipment has been tested, the following procedure
should be followed to prepare for leak-off testing:
1. Circulate the hole clean.
2. Hoist the bit into the casing.
3. Equip the testing unit with a recorder capable of accurately recording the applied
surface pressure in correlation to the accumulative volume pumped.
4. Rig up a high pressure, low volume pump.
5. Close the annular preventer and manifold.
6. Commence pumping.
III-1 October 2006

Procedure for Leak-off Test
1. Pump slowly at a constant rate of 4 to 8 litres per minute depending upon the casing
setting depth.
2. Often, those who conduct leak-off tests on intermediate casing strings elect to use a
pumping unit (cementer) due to the anticipated volumes and corresponding surface
pressures.
3. Record the surface applied pressure correlating to a specific incremental volume
pumped.
4. Plot a graph that correlates the surface applied pressure with the volume pumped.
5. Terminate pumping to avoid possible fracturing/propagation of the open hole section
when the pressure plot deviates from a straight line. This deviation indicates the leak-
off pressure. Pumping should be terminated to avoid possible fracturing and/or
propagation of the open hole section.
TEST RESULTS
Figure III-1 is a plotting of a leak-off test conducted on a 10-metre open hole section below
the surface casing seat.
Test Data: Surface Casing = 212 m

Surface Applied Pressure = 1800 kPa
III-2 October 2006

Surface Applied
Figure III-1
After the casing plug and shoe have been drilled out, it is necessary to determine the MACP
that could be held during a kick situation.
The selection of a particular well control method may depend on many variables, and
perhaps the most important consideration should be the rupture pressure.
If the MACP is exceeded, a blowout may occur with gas migrating to surface outside the
casing.
III-3 October 2006

LEAK-OFF TEST RESULTS
When conducting a leak-off test, a graph correlating the surface applied pressure versus
accumulative volume pumped must be recorded.
Figure III-1 is a plot resulting from a leak-off test where a short section of open hole was
exposed below the casing. Test results can be analysed as follows:
z Section A - The initial slack in the system resulted from compression of trapped
air.
z Section B - The trend of constant pressure increased for equal volumes pumped
and continues until the “Leak-Off Pressure” point, where the plotted
points deviate from the straight line. At this point, the formation
began to yield since less pressure increase is seen for an equal volume
of mud pumped. The leak-off pressure point marks the MACP the
formation can withstand before fracturing.
z Section C - At point C (the apex of the plotted curve), the pumps were shut down
and the instantaneous shut-in pressure recorded. Between the moment
indicated by “Leak-Off Pressure” point and the shut-down of the
pumps indicated by point C, the formation being tested fractured.
z Section D - Between points C and D, the well was left shut-in until surface
pressure stabilized. If the pumps had not been shut down at point C, it
would be possible to propagate the fracture.
From this information, three valuable limits can be calculated regarding maximum pressure
limitations:
z leak-off gradient at the casing shoe

z MACP
z equivalent mud density
III-4 October 2006

Calculations
1. Fracture Pressure
The fracture pressure is the total pressure exerted on the open hole section during the
test.
Fracture Pressure = HP + Surface Applied Pressure
= (212 m × 1000 kg/m3 × 0.00981) + 1800
= 2080 kPa + 1800 kPa
= 3880 kPa
2. Leak-off Gradient
The gradient is the total pressure the casing seat can withstand divided by the depth of
the casing seat.
Leak-off Gradient = Fracture Pressure ÷ Casing Seat Depth

= 3880 kPa ÷ 212 m
= 18.30 kPa/m
It is the wellsite supervisor's responsibility to post the MACP corresponding to the mud
densities used to reach total depth. This chart must be posted in the doghouse and/or the
manifold shack depending upon the type of choke available.
Higher mud densities will exert increased HPs at the casing seat, resulting in lower MACP at
surface.
III-5 October 2006

CALCULATIONS
Fracture Pressure Density Hydrostatic Calculated MACP
(kPa) (kg/m3) Pressure (kPa)
(kPa)
3880 1000 2080 1800
1020 2121 1759
1040 2163 1717
1060 2204 1676
1080 2246 1634
1100 2288 1592
The calculated MACPs should be posted which correspond to the actual casing gauge
readings in maximum increments of 200 kPa. It is best to post the MACPs in 100 kPa
increments as shown in the following table.
POSTED MACP
Mud Density (kg/m3) MACP (kPa)
1000 1800
1020 1700
1040 1700
1060 1600
1080 1600
1100 1500
III-6 October 2006

PRESSURE INTEGRITY TESTS (PIT)
The PIT is an alternative to the conventional leak-off test. Selected by many operators, the
PIT is conducted to a pre-determined surface applied pressure based on a leak-off gradient of
22.6 kPa/m.
The reasoning behind the test is that numerous wellbores penetrate zones of significantly less
integrity, and the 22.6 kPa/m gradient will exceed the competency of the lower zones.
Example
Calculated surface applied pressure based on a maximum leak-off gradient of 22.6 kPa/m
with fresh water in the well (9.81 kPa/m).
Surface Applied Pressure = 370 m × (22.6 kPa/m - 9.81 kPa/m)

= 4732 kPa
For the PIT, pumping would continue until the surface applied pressure reached 4700 kPa, at
which time the test would be aborted and the pressure bled off.
Discussion
There are many variables associated with a leak-off test that influence the wellsite
supervisor's posting of the MACP. In many cases, the decision is not clear cut, but the
following should be taken into consideration if a well control situation develops.
III-7 October 2006

1. Assuming a leak-off gradient
z This is a common occurrence when the operator complies with the casing
requirements of the AEUB and is drilling in a known area for which sufficient
data exists to provide a reasonable value for the leak-off gradient.
z The assumed gradient in many cases is 18.1 kPa/m, a value representing 80% of
the assumed fracture gradient of 22.6 kPa/m.
z For an 18.1 kPa/m gradient, there is a competent cement job at the casing seat, an
assumption that could significantly influence any well control operation if the
cement bond lacks integrity.
− Any problems that are encountered during the cementing of the surface
casing, and that cause the wellsite supervisor to suspect the cement integrity,
should be followed with a leak-off test to ensure posting of an accurate
MACP.
z During the circulation of a kick, the cellar should simultaneously be monitored
with a visual inspection of the BOPs for verification of integrity when a leak-off
gradient has been assumed.
2. Poor Cement Job
z A poor cement bond will result in a lower leak-off gradient than anticipated when
based on 18.1 kPa/m.
z A second test should be conducted to confirm the initial results and will usually
provide a similar leak-off pressure due to the lack of swelling of the cement.
z Solutions to the problem of a poor cement job will vary depending upon the type
of casing being either surface or intermediate casing.
3. Unconsolidated Zone Below Casing Seat
z At times, operators have incurred lost circulation after drilling out the casing shoe
and prior to establishing the 5 to 10 metre open hole section.
z In many cases drilling resumes, and returns to surface are achieved after 2 to 3
days of drilling.
III-8 October 2006

z Confusion often develops about the selection of an accurate MACP to be posted.

z Drilling practices indicate the zone has healed and is capable of withstanding the
HP and a very low annular pressure loss.
z The washed-out section below the surface casing and its accompanying filter
cake will in many cases provide integrity during the drilling operation but is also
extremely suspect during a well control operation.
z The expanded volumes of gas passing by the surface casing seat could dislodge
the filter cake and jeopardize the integrity to the point of fracturing to surface
outside of the surface casing. It is for this reason the initial leak-off value is
selected as the basis for the posted MACP.
4. Lost Circulation
z The MACP is based on the weakest component in the wellbore. Penetration of a

lost circulation zone imposes a considerably lower MACP than indicated by the
leak-off test results conducted at the casing seat.
III-9 October 2006

Example
Leak-Off Gradient = 18 kPa/m
Lost Circulation Zone = 900 m
Mud Density 1140 kg/m3 at 900 m and then lowered to 1100 kg/m3.
Circulation is regained.
Analysis:
MACP - based on the leak-off test results at the casing seat.

MACP (fresh water) = 350 m × (18 kPa/m - 9.81 kPa/m)
= 2800 kPa
MACP with 1140 kg/m3 mud density at casing seal.

MACP (fresh water) = 350m × (18 kPa/m - 11.2 kPa/m)
= 2380 kPa
MACP - based on the lost circulation zone at 900 metres.

MACP (fresh water) = 900 m × 40 kg/m3 × 0.00981
= 350 kPa
(Assume 300 kPa for gauge accuracy.)
z If a kick situation develops, the first problem to be addressed is the inaccuracy of

the SICP and DPP.
z Any pressure on the casing in excess of 300 kPa will feed into the lost circulation
zone.
z Circulating the well with the conventional Driller's Method will permit an additional
gas influx into the well because circulating pressures are based upon unstabilized
pressures.
z Further losses of fluid will be incurred at the lost circulation zone during the
circulation, resulting in a considerably underbalanced situation and a continual
influx of gas.
z As the gas is circulated above the lost circulation zone, the pressure acting on the
zone from the upper section of the wellbore will be substantially reduced as a result
of the density difference between gas and mud.
z An additional concern is that a further influx in the lower section of the wellbore
may now exert greater pressure on the lost circulation zone.
III-10 October 2006

5. PIT to Pre-Determined Values
As previously discussed, some operators choose elect to conduct PITs to a

predetermined surface applied pressure based on a 22.6 kPa/m gradient.
However, there are still numerous leak-off tests conducted which exceed the 22.6
kPa/m gradient to values of 35 to 40 kPa/m which is considered excessive.
One of the most difficult situations a wellsite supervisor must contend with is the well
control situation where the CP at surface is in excess of the posted MACP without gas
to surface. If the deviation in pressure continues to increase, the wellsite supervisor
must select one of the following alternatives:
z Continue to circulate through the choke holding the circulating CP at the MACP
and attempt to mix barite as fast as possible.
z If no barite supplies are on location, and the poor-boy degasser can no longer
adequately degas the drilling fluid, the circulation may have to be directed through
the choke holding the MACP and downstream flow directed to the flare pit.
z Discontinue circulation and shut in the well, risking a downhole blowout.
In each situation, the amount of surface casing is of paramount importance. Surface

casing strings down to only 300 m may not give the supervisor the option of an
underground blowout because of possible broaching to surface. Therefore, the
circulating CO would have to be maintained at or below the MACP.
Surface casing strings in excess of 450 m have, in the past, been considered sufficient
to withstand underground blowouts without rupturing to surface.
z In this situation, operators can continue to circulate, while sustaining a temporary

downhole blowout, or shut in the well and make the necessary arrangements at
surface concerning mixing equipment, barite, etc. to continue circulation and
control the downhole blowout.
III-11 October 2006

The intermediate range of surface casing from 300 to 450 m presents the most difficult
situation to which the wellsite supervisor must respond.
z It is for this reason some operators have conducted leak-off tests to the values of 35
to 40 kPa/m gradients to assure the wellsite supervisor the casing seat has complete
integrity and could, if required, sustain a downhole blowout in an emergency
situation.
III-12 October 2006

LEAK-OFF TEST DATA

Date of Test: Service Company:
Depth of Casing: (m)

Mud Density: (kg/m3)
1. HP = Depth of Casing (m) × Density (kg/m3) × 0.00981 = kPa
2. LOP kPa
3. FP = HP kPa + LOP = kPa
POSTED MACP
Increased Density Depth of Casing MACP
3
FP =( kg/m × m × 0.00981) kPa
=( kg/m3 × m × 0.00981) kPa
=( kg/m3 × m × 0.00981) kPa
=( kg/m3 × m × 0.00981) kPa
=( kg/m3 × m × 0.00981) kPa
=( kg/m3 × m × 0.00981) kPa
Date Posted: Operator:
Wellsite Supervisor: Contractor:
LSD:
III-13 October 2006

MACP
Depth of Casing m Assumed Leak-off Gradient kPa/m
FP = Depth of Casing (m) × Leak-off Gradient kPa/m = kPa
POSTED MACP
Increased Density Depth of Casing
FP kPa = ( × 0.00981) = kPa
= ( × 0.00981) = kPa
= ( × 0.00981) = kPa
= ( × 0.00981) = kPa
= ( × 0.00981) = kPa
Date Posted:
Wellsite Supervisor:
LSD:
Operator:
Contractor:
III-14 October 2006

LEAK OFF TESTS
1. Given the following information, complete the chart below.

Casing Depth = 425 m
Applied Surface Pressure = 2700 kPa
FRACTURE MUD DENSITY HYDROSTATIC MACP

PRESSURE PRESSURE
1000
1020
1040
1060
1080
1100
1120
1140
1160
III-15 October 2006

Figure III-2
III-16 October 2006

APPENDIX IV
CAUSES OF KICKS AND

SHUT-IN PROCEDURES
Appendix IV: Causes of Kicks and Shut-In Procedures
CAUSES OF KICKS AND SHUT-IN

PROCEDURES
CAUSES OF KICKS
z Insufficient mud density

z Improper hole filling
z Swabbing
z Lost circulation
z Abnormal pressure
WARNING SIGNS OF KICKS
A number of warning signs at surface indicate the beginning of a kick situation. It is the
responsibility of each crewmember to recognize these warning signs and to follow prompt,
correct procedures in shutting in the well.
Several warning signs (see table below) may occur in sequence and when properly
recognized, should provide sufficient warning at surface.
PRIMARY SECONDARY
Flow rate increase or decrease Drilling break
Pit gain or loss Variation in pump speed or pressure
Lost circulation Mud contamination
Hole does not take correct fill-up volume. Erratic table torque
Pipe pulls wet after pulling dry.
Note: Causes and warning signs of kicks and blowouts are covered fully in the First Line
Supervisor's Blowout Prevention course. They are covered here briefly as a review.
IV-1 October 2006

FLOWCHECK PROCEDURES
While Drilling
1. Call an alert.
2. Stop rotary.
3. Hoist kelly above the rotary table.
4. Position tool joint at surface.
5. Shut off pump.
6. Divert flow to trip tank.
7. Zero trip tank.
8. Monitor and record volume increase in trip tank for 10 minutes.
Alternate Method
1. Call alert.
2. Stop rotary.
5. Shut off the pump.
6. Monitor the flowline for any flow from the well for at least 10 minutes.
7. Shut in the well immediately if there is any indication of flow from the well, or if no
flow is observed, continue drilling and watch closely for any further warning signs.
8. If no flow is observed, continue drilling and watch closely for any further warning
signs.
9. Record the results of the flow check in the tour book.
IV-2 October 2006

Before Tripping
1. Call alert.
3. Stop the pump.
4. Divert the flow line to the trip tank.
5. Zero the trip tank.
6. Monitor the trip tank for gain in volume for 10 minutes.
7. Proceed to trip the drill string out of the well if no flow is observed, or shut in the well
immediately if the well is flowing.
8. If the well is flowing, shut it in immediately.
While Tripping
1. Call alert.
2. Position tool joint above rotary table.
3. Install stabbing valve in open position.
4. Close stabbing valve.
5. Ensure hole is full.
6. Shut off pump.
7. Divert flow to trip tank if necessary.
8. Zero trip tank.
9. Monitor and record volume increase in trip tank for 10 minutes.
IV-3 October 2006

While Out Of Hole
1. Call alert.
2. Ensure hole is full.
3. Shut off pump.
4. Divert flow to the trip tank if necessary.
5. Zero trip tank.
6. Continuously monitor and record volume increase in trip tank.
PILL PUMPING PROCEDURES
1. Pumping Pills
z A trip pill is a measured volume of fluid weighted heavier than the current
circulating fluid, that when pumped down the drill string prior to a trip allows for
the drill string to be pulled out of the hole dry. The increased density of the mud
in the pill displaces the lighter fluid out of the inside of the drill pipe while the
pipe is being pulled out of the hole. Additions of weighting material, usually
barite or calcium carbonate, are used to increase the density of the mud being used
for the pill.
z With a properly placed pill, the fluid level inside the drill pipe will stay below the
drill floor. This procedure allows for more accurate monitoring of pipe
displacements and volumes while tripping. With the pipe pulling dry, the hole fill
pump can be run continuously thus ensuring the hole is always full to prevent any
kicks from entering the wellbore during the trip.
2. Information and considerations required prior to pumping pills;
z Accurate usable volume of the pill tank.

z Accurate and functional gauging of pill tank.
z Surface volume from pill tank to drill string. This volume includes the mud lines,
the standpipe, kelly hose and the kelly. This volume should then be calculated
into the corresponding number of pump strokes.
z The weighted pill should be a minimum of 215 kg/m3 greater than the mud density
in use, which would require approximately 8 to 10 sacks of barite per m3 of pill
pumped.
IV-4 October 2006

z The volume required is determined from the capacity of the largest drill pipe used.
A pill should occupy approximately 150 m TVD of drill pipe when placed,
typically 1.5 m3 to 2.0 m3. Slant holes will require slightly larger volumes to get
150 m TVD.
z Prior to mixing pills the mud should be checked to ensure that it can support the
barite additions without barite settling. If the barite settles while tripping the jets
in the bit could become plugged and circulation would not be possible in the event
of well control. It should also be noted that the pill tank should be adequately
agitated to mix the pill and hold the weighting material in suspension.
z If calcium carbonate is used, twice the number of sacks/m3 may be required over
barite.
z For high gel strength muds, increased pill density or a longer pill may be required.
z An effective pill is one that maintains the pipe dry throughout the trip.
z If tight hole is expected when pulling off bottom, the pipe should be pulled above
these spots prior to pumping the pill.
3. Pumping the pill
z Stop pump and flow check.

z The pill should be mixed in the pill tank to the correct volume and density.
z Pump the pill out of the pill tank.
z Once the pill tank has been emptied, switch to the suction of the active mud
system to displace the pill out of the surface equipment.
z The placement of the pill is the important factor. The pill needs to be ALL in the
drill string, not under displaced and still in the surface equipment or over
displaced and pumped too far down the drill pipe; or
z Once the pill is pumped, switch flowline returns to the trip tank and record initial
fluid level in tank. (There should be enough available room in the trip tank to
receive the flow back from the pill dropping in the drill pipe.)
z Break off the kelly and monitor the flow back.
z As the pill drops, flow back should start higher then slow as pill reaches
equilibrium.
z Monitor for 10 to 15 minutes to see trend. Read and record the volume in the trip
tank.
z Start to trip out of the hole.
IV-5 October 2006

4. Possible problems
z Pill does not fall after breaking drill pipe.
− This may mean the bit is in tight hole. Pull 2 to 3 stands and monitor for
flowback.
z Pipe begins to pull wet.
− Well could be kicking due to swabbing action.

− The pill may not be of sufficient weight to fall as fast as the pipe is being
pulled.
− Gel strength or mud properties not allowing flow.
− Barite settling, plugged nozzles. (BHA near surface / pill to bit)
− Pill over displaced and has fallen out of string.
− Down hole tools, i.e. Motor, teledrift, etc. inhibit flow of the heavier fluid.
z Flow back increases part way through trip.
− Tapered string or BHA - smaller ID. Pill lengthens in smaller ID and will
displace more fluid.
z In the cases where the pill is no longer effective, and it is known not to be an
influx from the well, A second pill can be pumped to stop the pulling of wet pipe.
z If the first pill had to be pumped around due to hole conditions, i.e. reaming, a
second pill can be pumped once operations return to normal. In the above cases
knowing the location of the first pill will be critical. Having a partially circulated
out pill can lead to flow up the drill pipe and fluid levels falling in the annulus.
IV-6 October 2006

SHUT-IN PROCEDURES (Soft)
If the well is flowing, the drilling crew should shut in the well and make the necessary
arrangements to begin the killing operation. Depending upon the position of the drill string
at the time of the kick, the following procedures should be used when shutting in the well.
Drilling
1. Call alert.
2. Stop rotary.
5. Shut off pump.
6. Open HCR valve through open choke to mud degasser.
7. Close annular preventer.
8. Slowly close choke. Do not exceed MACP.
9. Ensure well is shut in.
10. Read and record SICP, SIDPP and tank gain while pressures stabilize.
While Tripping
1. Call alert.
2. Position upper tool joint above the rotary table.
3. Set pipe in slips and release elevators.
4. Install stabbing valve in open position.
5. Close after installation.
7. Close annular preventer.
8. Slowly close choke. Do not exceed MACP.
9. Ensure positive shut-in.
10. Pick up and make up kelly.
11. Open stabbing valve.
12. Read and record SICP, SIDPP and tank gain while pressures stabilize.
IV-7 October 2006

Out of Hole
1. Call alert.
3. Close blind rams.
4. Slowly close choke, but do not exceed MACP.
5. Ensure positive shut-in.
6. Read and record SICP and tank gain while pressures stabilize.
SHUT-IN PROCEDURES (Hard)
Procedures remain the same as those of soft shut-in, except that choke is left in closed
position.
Hard shut-in should only be used where sufficient casings are set. The main advantage of a
hard shut-in is minimizing the size of the influx.
TIMES TO CHECK FOR FLOW
To avoid a kick situation, flow checks should be conducted at the following specific times
during the drilling operation.
z While drilling (any warning sign).

z Prior to tripping the drill string.
z While tripping (any warning sign).
z Continuously after all the drill string is out of the hole.
Note: Refer to EUB Directive D36
Flow-Check Times during Trip Out
z After pulling 5% of the drill string (measured depth).

z At the midpoint depth (measured depth) of the wellbore.
z Prior to pulling the last stand of drill pipe and the first stand of drill collars.
z After all the drill string is out of the hole continuously.
IV-8 October 2006

Flow-Check Times during Trip In
z After running in the drill collars and first stand of drill pipe.
z At approximately the midpoint of the wellbore.
z Record the depth and time of the flow checks in the tour book.
IV-9 October 2006

COIL TUBING PROCEDURES
While Drilling (Kick Warning Signs)
There are a number of warning signs that can occur while drilling. They are:
z an increase or a decrease in the mud tank volume

z an increase or a decrease in the flow from the well
z a change in the rate of drilling (often referred to as “drilling break”)
z a change in pump pressure
z a rapid change in the mud properties (gas, oil, salt water-cut mud)
z erratic mud motor differential pressure (torque)
z fluctuations in weight indicator reading
If any of these warning signs is detected, the immediate response that must be made is a flow
check.
Flow Checks
1. Call an alert.
2. Pick off bottom, ensure uniform outer diameter across the pack off area.
3. Stop the pump.
4. Divert the flow line to the trip tank.
5. Read and record the trip tank volume.
6. Monitor the trip tank for gain for 10 minutes. If there is any flow, shut-in immediately.
7. Record the flow check and its results in the Tour Report.
IV-10 October 2006

SHUT-IN PROCEDURE
1. Call an alert.
2. Pick off bottom, ensure uniform outer diameter across the pack off area.
3. Open the hydraulic valve to an open choke to the poor boy degasser.
4. Close the annular preventer.
5. Slowly close the manifold choke, but do not allow the casing pressure to exceed its
maximum allowable value.
6. Let pressures stabilize 5 to 15 minutes.
7. Read and record SIDPP.
8. Read and record SICP.
9. Read and record any gain in the trip tank.
10. Notify the operator’s representative and the rig manager at the earliest opportunity.
11. Prepare to kill the well.
While Tripping (Kick Warning Signs)
Tripping Out:
There are fewer kick warning signs that can occur while tripping than while drilling, but the
chances of a kick occurring while tripping are much greater. The warning signs are:
z The hole is not taking the proper amount of drilling fluid on fill-up (it’s taking less or
more than it should).
z Fluctuation in pump pressure while filling through bit (mud ring).
z The well flows by itself.
Tripping In:
z Well flows by itself (after pipe movement is stopped).

z The hole is not returning the proper amount of fluid.
*Note: Tripping in while pumping is like running in hole with wet pipe.
IV-11 October 2006

Flow Checks
z Call an alert.
z Stop, ensure uniform outer diameter, across packoff area.
z Make sure hole is full (equalization occurs inside lubricator, monitor level in the shaker
box. If level is not visible, remove lubricator connection at flow T position and note
fluid level).
z Stop the pump.
z Read and record the trip tank volume. Monitor the trip tank for gain for 10 minutes. If
there is any flow shut-in immediately.
z Record the flow check and its results in the Tour Report.
SHUT-IN PROCEDURE
1. Call an alert.
2. Ensure uniform outer diameter, across packoff area.
3. Open the hydraulic valve to an open choke to the poor boy degasser.
4. Close the annular preventer.
5. Slowly close the manifold choke, but do not allow the casing pressure to exceed its
maximum allowable valve.
6. Let pressures stabilize for 5 to 15 minutes.
7. Read and record SIDPP.
8. Read and record SICP.
9. Notify the operator’s representative and rig manager at the earliest opportunity.
10. Prepare to strip, snub, or to kill the well.
IV-12 October 2006

TRIPPING PROCEDURES
Before Tripping Out
1. Prepare the trip record form by calculating the theoretical displacement volume of the
drill string.
2. Be sure there is enough drilling fluid in the tanks to fill the hole. Check that the mud
tank volume indicator is working properly.
3. Make sure the stabbing valve and the inside BOP valve are readily available (also the
stabbing valve wrench and the necessary changeover subs).
4. Pull off bottom, stop the pump. Let drilling fluid stabilize.
5. Isolate and fill the trip tank (or the compartment to be used as the trip tank).
6. Zero the tank volume indicator.
7. Check for flow by checking for a change of volume in the trip tank, then pull out of
hole.
Trip Out Procedure
Option A (Hole Full at all Times)
1. Keep hole fill pump on and record the volume taken to fill the hole after every 140 -
150 metres of tubing pulled.
2. Record actual hole fill volume on the trip record for each 140 - 150 metres pulled and
compare with precalculated volumes on a section, not a cumulative basis.
3. When reaching the drill collars record the volume taken to fill the hole after every 3
drill collars.
4. Conduct flow checks at specified intervals.
IV-13 October 2006

Option B (Let Fluid Level Drop Maximum of 30 m then Fill)
1. Pull the number of metres calculated to lower the annulus fluid by 30 m.

2. Stop and fill the hole recording the fill volumes on the trip record, comparing measured
volume to the calculated volume.
3. When pulling the drill collars fill the hole after each 3 drill collars.
Out of Hole
1. Empty trip tank as much as possible and zero the pit level indicator.
2. Make sure well return flow is directed into trip fill tank.
3. Make sure the fully open stabbing valve and its wrench and inside BOP valve are
readily accessible on or near the floor (with the proper subs to fit all possible drill
string connections), and free of ice and debris.
4. Prepare calculated portion of trip record form.
5. Conduct flow check.
6. Start trip, watching trip speed to avoid surging.
*Note: Ensure coil is full prior to tripping in hole so as not to pump air in hole when
circulation is broke, (if not filling through the bit).
Trip in Procedure (Assuming Pipe is Filling)

2. Stop 10-20 metres off bottom.
3. Check bottoms up return flow for indications of trip gas.
IV-14 October 2006

Flow Checks
Tripping Out
1. Before starting the trip.

2. After pulling the first 5% of tubing from the hole.
3. After pulling about half the tubing or each time the trip tank is refilled.
4. Before the top of the drill collars are inside the BOP stack.
5. After any kick warning signs, or when in doubt.
Out of Hole
1. When bit is out of the hole.

2. Ever 20 - 30 minutes while the tubing is out of hole.
Tripping In
1. After all collars are run.

2. When bit is to the bottom of the intermediate casing.
3. Before breaking circulation.
4. After any kick warning signs, or when in doubt.
IV-15 October 2006

DIVERTER SYSTEM PROCEDURES
A Diverter System (EUB Class I & IA) is generally installed if shallow gas formations are
anticipated while drilling surface hole, to provide a means of directing any gas influx that
may occur away from the rig to the flare pit or flare tank. The well cannot be shut-in with
this system. A Diverter System is also required (EUB regulations) when:
z surface hole is drilled below 450 m.

z drilling to total depth in certain areas to specified horizons.
The Diverter System consists of the following components:
z conductor casing set at a minimum depth of 20 m.

z annular preventer and drilling spool installed on the conductor casing.
z quick-opening valve (HCR is acceptable) installed on the spool, minimum 150 mm
nominal O.D.
z flare line, minimum 150 mm nominal O.D. to flare pit or flare tank, a minimum 50 m
from the rig.
z the accumulator and control system must meet current regulations.
Procedure
1. At the first sign of a kick, call an alert.

2. Open the HCR and close the annular preventer. Commence pumping at a kill rate,
which is at least equal to the drilling rate, and greater if possible.
3. Organize a vacuum truck to connect to the flare tank load line (if a flare tank is in use),
and a water truck to offload into the mud tanks if necessary.
4. If drilling with water, commence mixing gel to build viscosity for barite suspension.
Circulate at kill rate (as in step #2) until mud properties are sufficient to suspend barite.
5. If drilling with mud commence mixing barite at a rate of 1 sack per minute for at least
one complete circulation. Calculate the volume of barite necessary for one circulation
at a 1 sack per minute mixing rate.
6. At the end of one circulation, shut down the pump and observe the well for flow at the
flare pit (or tank). Check diverter line for leaks.
IV-16 October 2006

7. If the well continues to flow, make another circulation mixing barite at 1 sack per
minute and pumping at kill rate. Stop and flow check again after the circulation is
complete.
8. If the well is dead, open up the diverter, circulate and adjust the mud density evenly
throughout the system.
There is a distinct chance that the diverter line could washout during these operations. Be
prepared to evacuate all personnel to a safe location as quickly as possible.
TOP DRIVE CONSIDERATIONS
If the top drive is already equipped with an additional stabbing valve that is also intended for
well control use, it must be pressure tested as per EUB Directive 036 requirements and be
easily disconnected from the top drive after it has been screwed into the drill pipe and closed.
It must be compatible with the inside BOP, open under pressure and strip in through BOP’s
as required.
The original stabbing valve required by the EUB is still required and must be readily
available.
The stabbing valve must conform to IRP Vol. 1 – Critical Sour Drilling for sour service
applications.
IV-17 October 2006

EUB Directive 036
IV-18 October 2006

IV-19 October 2006

CONDUCTING THE INSPECTION
Crew Training and Certification
Conducting Crew BOP Drills EUB Directive 036
1. A crew BOP drill must be conducted during the inspection provided it is operationally
prudent to do so.
Rig Supervisor’s Involvement
1. The rig manager and/or the operator’s representative should be requested to coordinate
the blowout drill, following the procedures outlined in Appendix 1040.
z The alert should be initiated by the Rig Manager or the operator’s representative.
z A horn is the required method of alerting the crew. A significant deficiency exists
if the rig does not have a horn, but the crew responds to an alternate alert. A
serious deficiency exists if the horn is not operable and the crew does not respond
to any form of alternate alert.
Drill Requirements
1. The drill conducted should determine the crew’s ability to detect a well kick (see
Section 255(3) for kick influx monitor testing when using mud tanks), and perform a
shut-in for the operation in progress at the time of the inspection.
z The intent of this check is to emphasize the EUB goal to educate the crew, and
survey both their awareness of kick detection and their control capability in order
to reduce the number of well control incidents.
2. The crew should be capable of applying well control procedures for four situations:
z drilling while shut in
z tripping
z tripping with drill collars opposite the BOP stack
z out of the hole.
IV-20 October 2006

Inspector’s Role
1. The inspector’s role throughout the drill should be that of an observer unless it is
apparent that the drilling supervisors need some assistance in establishing the format of
the drill. The inspector may also question the crew about specific well control
procedures.
Crew Procedures Form *
Shut-In Procedure While Drilling

Crew Member DRILLER DERRICK MOTOR HAND FLOOR HAND FLOOR HAND
HAND #1 #2
(1) Floor (1) Floor (1) Floor (1) Floor (1) Floor
Position
(2) Choke Manifold (2) Mud Tanks (2) Choke Manifold (2) Choke Manifold (2) Messenger
CALL ALERT Go to Floor Go to Floor Go to Floor Go To Floor
Duties: Go to Choke
RAISE KELLY Go to Mud Tanks Assist Motor Hand Assist Driller
Manifold
MONITOR TRIP
STOP PUMP
TANK
FLOW CHECK OPEN
SHUT-IN HYDRAULIC
VALVE
CLOSE ANNULAR SLOWLY CLOSE
PREVENTER CHOKE (Do not
Go to Choke exceed maximum
Manifold** allowable SICP)
LET PRESSURES
STABILIZE (5-15
min)
REPORT
READ & RECORD
INCREASE IN
SIDPP
TRIP TANK
READ & RECORD
VOLUME
SICP
RECORD TRIP
TANK GAIN
At direction of
Driller, NOTIFY
RIG MANAGER
PREPARE TO KILL
& OPERATOR’S
REPRESENTAT
IVE
*
From CAODC
**
Or to hydraulic choke control panel
IV-21 October 2006

Shut-In Procedure While Tripping

Crew Member DRILLER DERRICK MOTOR HAND FLOOR HAND FLOOR HAND
HAND #1 #2
(1) Floor (1) Derrick (1) Floor (1) Floor (1) Floor
Position
Remain in derrick
CALL ALERT Go to Floor Go to Floor Go To Floor
until called down
Duties: POSITION UPPER
TOOL JOINT
ABOVE TABLE
SET SLIPS AND SET SLIPS AND SET SLIPS AND
Go to Mud Tanks REMOVE REMOVE REMOVE
ELEVATORS ELEVATORS ELEVATORS
INSTALL INSTALL
MONITOR TRIP Go To Choke STABBING STABBING VALVE
TANK Manifold VALVE IN OPEN IN OPEN
FLOW CHECK POSITION, CLOSE POSITION, CLOSE
SHUT-IN OPEN
HYDRAULIC
VALVE
SLOWLY CLOSE
CLOSE
CHOKE (Do not
ANNULAR Assist Driller Assist Driller
exceed maximum
PREVENTER
allowable SICP)
INSTALL KELLY
OPEN STABBING
VALVE INSTALL KELLY INSTALL KELLY
Go to Choke
Manifold**
LET PRESSURES
STABILIZE (5-15
REPORT
min) READ &
INCREASE IN
RECORD SIDPP Assist Motor Hand
TRIP TANK
READ & RECORD
VOLUME
SICP RECORD
TRIP TANK GAIN
At direction of
PREPARE TO Driller, NOTIFY
KILL WELL OR RIG MANAGER &
STRIP IN OPERATOR’S
REPRESENTATIVE
*
From CAODC
**
IV-22 October 2006

Shut-In Procedure While Out of the Hole

Crew DRILLER DERRICK HAND MOTOR HAND FLOOR HAND FLOOR HAND
Member #1 #2
Position
Duties: CALL ALERT Go to Floor Go to Floor Go to Floor Go To Floor
FLOW CHECK OPEN
SHUT-IN HYDRAULIC
Assist Driller Go to Choke
VALVE Assist Motor Hand Assist Driller
Go to Mud Tanks Manifold
CLOSE BLIND
RAMS
SLOWLY CLOSE
Go to Choke MONITOR TRIP CHOKE (Do not
Manifold** TANK exceed maximum
allowable SICP)
LET PRESSURE
STABILIZE (5-15 REPORT
min) INCREASE IN
READ & RECORD TRIP TANK
SICP RECORD VOLUME
TRIP TANK GAIN
At the direction of
PREPARE TO
Driller, NOTIFY
STRIP IN SNUB
RIG MANAGER &
OR TOP KILL
OPERATOR’S
WELL
REPRESENTATIVE
*
From CAODC
**
IV-23 October 2006

Crew Positions & Duties for Diverter Operations 4 and 5 Man Crews *
Shut-In Procedure for Diverter Operations

Crew FLOOR HAND FLOOR HAND #2
Member DRILLER DERRICK HAND MOTOR HAND #1 (If available)
Initial Muster (1) Floor (1) Floor (1) Floor (1) Floor (1) Floor
Point (2) Mud Tanks (2) Messenger
Duties: Go to Floor then mud
CALL ALERT Go to Floor Go to Floor Go To Floor
tank(s).
FLOW Raise kelly or top Prepare trip tank and Follow Driller’s
Assist Driller Assist Derrickhand
CHECK drive to position TJ monitor instructions
Report increase in Advise Vac Truck
Stop pump Assist Derrickhand
tank volume Driver of situation
Go to flare tank off load
Open HCR valve**
line
Shut-In
Confirm diverter
Mix gel to build Assist Vac Truck
closure (flowline).
Close the diverter viscosity if water Assist Derrickhand Driver to get hooked up
Check under sub for
drilling to flare tank load line
& leaks
Engage pump and Mix barite as
Check diverter line to At direction of Driller,
pump at maximum required if viscosity
flare tank. Check flare Assist Derrickhand notify Rig Manager and
rate until gas flow is high enough to
tank to endure flow Well Site Supervisor
stops take it
Well Kill
Stop pump and
Prepare trip tank, Prepare to ignite gas in
flowcheck after each
monitor and report flare tank, if wind Assist Derrickhand Assist Derrickhand
circulation of barite
back to Driller direction is towards rig
until well is dead
*
From CAODC
** It is recommended that the diverter HCR should be interlocked to ensure that closure of the
diverter will open the HCR.
IV-24 October 2006

Shut-In While Drilling, Coiled Tubing (non-diverter)

Crew Member DRILLER DERRICK HAND MOTOR HAND FLOOR HAND FLOOR HAND #2
#1
Position
(2) Choke Manifold (2) Mud Tank (2) Choke Manifold (2) Choke Manifold (2) Messenger
Duties:
Go to Choke
Pick off bottom Go to mud tanks Assist Motor Hand Assist Driller
Manifold
MONITOR TRIP
STOP PUMP
TANK
OPEN
HYDRAULIC
VALVE
FLOW CHECK
SHUT-IN LET PRESSURES
STABILIZE (5-15
min.) READ & REPORT
RECORD SIDPP INCREASE IN TRIP
READ & RECORD TANK VOLUME
SICP RECORD
TRIP TANK GAIN
At direction of
Driller, NOTIFY RIG
PREPARE TO KILL MANAGER &
OPERATOR’S
REPRESENTATIVE
*
From CAODC
**
IV-25 October 2006

Shut-In While Tripping, Coiled Tubing (non-diverter)

Crew Member DRILLER DERRICK HAND MOTOR HAND FLOOR HAND #1 FLOOR HAND #2
(1) Floor (1) Floor (1) Floor (1) Floor

Position (1) Mud Tanks
(2) Choke Manifold (2) Choke Manifold (2) Choke Manifold (2) Choke Manifold
Duties:
Ensure tube across
packoff
MONITOR TRIP Go to Choke
TANK Manifold
OPEN
HYDRAULIC
VALVE
Assist Driller Assist Driller
FLOW CHECK
SHUT-IN LET PRESSURES
STABILIZE (5-15
min.) READ & REPORT
RECORD SIDPP INCREASE IN TRIP Assist Motor Hand
READ & RECORD TANK VOLUME
SICP RECORD
TRIP TANK GAIN
At direction of
Driller, NOTIFY RIG
PREPARE TO KILL
MANAGER &
WELL OR STRIP IN
OPERATOR’S
REPRESENTATIVE
*
From CAODC
**
IV-26 October 2006

APPENDIX V
STANDARDS FOR
WELLSITE
SUPERVISION OF
DRILLING, COMPLETION
AND WORKOVERS
INDUSTRY RECOMMENDED
PRACTICE
VOLUME 7 – 2002
Standards for Wellsite
Supervision of Drilling,
Completion and Workovers
Industry Recommended
Practice (IRP)
Volume 7 - 2002
Sanctioned
2002 - 03
This document as well as future revisions and additions are available
from:
Enform
1538 – 25 Avenue NE
Calgary, Alberta
T2E 8Y3
Phone: (403) 250-9606
Fax: (403) 291-9408
Website: www.enform.ca
Table of Contents
7 Standards for Wellsite Supervision of Drilling, Completions and

Workovers............................................................................................... 1
7.0 Acknowledgement & Disclaimer ..........................................................1
7.1 Introduction............................................................................................5
7.2 Scope........................................................................................................6
7.3 Definitions...............................................................................................7
7.4 Roles, Responsibilities and Duties ........................................................9
7.4.1 Operator and Prime Contractor..............................................9
7.4.1.1 Regulatory Compliance ..............................................................9
7.4.1.2 Safety ........................................................................................10
7.4.2 Wellsite Supervisor ................................................................12
7.4.2.1 General Duties ..........................................................................12
7.4.2.2 Safety ........................................................................................13
7.4.3 Employer’s Supervision.........................................................15
7.5 Requirements for Assigning Duties of Wellsite Supervisor ............17
7.5.1 A Supervisor Must be Assigned...........................................17
7.5.2 Agreement of Duties ..............................................................17
7.5.3 Identify Wellsite Supervisor ..................................................18
7.6 Training Requirements .......................................................................19
7.6.1 Wellsite Supervisor ................................................................19
7.6.2 Operator or Prime Contractor...............................................19
7.6.3 Training Requirements ..........................................................20
7.6.4 Description of Training Courses...........................................21
7.6.4.1 Safety Management and Regulatory Awareness for Wellsite
Supervision ............................................................................................21
7.6.4.2 Safety Management and Regulatory Awareness for Wellsite
Supervision (Refresher) .........................................................................21
7.6.4.3 Second Line Supervisor’s Well Control ...................................22
7.6.4.4 Well Service Blowout Prevention (BOP) .................................22
7.6.4.5 Detection and Control of Flammable Substance ......................22
Standards for Wellsite Supervision of Table of Contents • i

Drilling, Completions & Workovers
7.6.4.6 Workplace Hazardous Materials Information Systems
(WHMIS) Training ................................................................................22
7.6.4.7 Standard First Aid .....................................................................23
7.6.4.8 Transportation of Dangerous Goods (TDG) .............................23
7.6.4.9 H2S Alive® ...............................................................................23
7.7 Work Experience Assessment.............................................................24
7.7.1 Requirement for Assessment ...............................................24
7.7.2 Frequency of Re-Assessment ..............................................25
7.7.2.1 Continuous Work Situations .....................................................25
7.7.2.2 Changes in Job Assignment ......................................................25
7.7.3 Assessment Process and Content Requirements ...........26
7.7.3.1 Process for Assessment of Skill Level......................................26
7.7.3.2 Required Information Record of Work History and References26
7.7.3.3 Minimum Skill Assessment Requirements...............................28
7.7.3.4 Additional Job Specific Skill Requirements .............................30
7.8 Performance Evaluation and Audits..................................................31
7.8.1 Documentation........................................................................32
7.8.2 Inspections and Audits ..........................................................33
7.8.3 Government Inspections .......................................................34
Appendix “A”:....................................................................................................35
Levels of Control and Responsibility for Safety Management .....35
Appendix “B”:....................................................................................................36
Notice of Wellsite Supervisor (Sample) ...........................................36
Standards for Wellsite Supervision of Table of Contents • ii

Drilling, Completions & Workovers
7 Standards for Wellsite Supervision
of Drilling, Completions and
Workovers
7.0 Acknowledgement & Disclaimer
This Industry Recommended Practice (IRP) is a set of best

practices and guidelines compiled by knowledgeable and
experienced industry and government personnel, and is intended to
provide the operator with advice regarding STANDARDS FOR
WELLSITE SUPERVISION OF DRILLING, COMPLETIONS
AND WORKOVERS.
It was developed under the auspices of the Drilling and

Completions Committee (DACC).
DACC is a joint industry/government committee established to

develop safe, efficient and environmentally suitable operating
practices for the Canadian Oil & Gas industry in the areas of
drilling, completions and servicing of wells. The primary effort is
the development of IRPs with priority given to:
Development of new IRPs where non-existent procedures result in

issues because of inconsistent operating practices.
Review and revision of outdated IRPs particularly where new

technology requires new operating procedures.
Provide general support to foster development of non-IRP industry

operating practices that have current application to a limited
number of stakeholders.
Standards for Wellsite Supervision •1

Drilling, Completions and Workovers
The recommendations set out in this IRP are meant to allow
flexibility and must be used in conjunction with competent
technical judgement. It remains the responsibility of the user of the
IRP to judge its suitability for a particular application.
If there is any inconsistency or conflict between any of the

recommended practices contained in the IRP, and the applicable
legislative requirement, the legislative requirement shall prevail.
Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy and reliability of
the data and recommendations contained in the IRP. However
DACC, its subcommittees, and individual contributors make no
representation, warranty, or guarantee in connection with the
publication or the contents of any IRP recommendation, and hereby
disclaim liability of responsibility for loss or damage resulting from
the use of this IRP, or for any violation of any legislative
requirements.
This IRP has been sanctioned (sanction = review and support of the
IRP as a compilation of best practices) by the following
organizations:
• Alberta Energy and Utilities Board
• Alberta Human Resources and Employment
• British Columbia Workers’ Compensation Board
• Canadian Association of Oilwell Drilling Contractors
• Canadian Association of Petroleum Producers
• International Coil Tubing Association
• Oil & Gas Commission, British Columbia
• Petroleum Services Association of Canada
• Saskatchewan Energy & Mines
• Saskatchewan Labour

The following list of individuals participated in the development
of this Industry Recommended Practice (IRP) through the
DACC sub-committee and/or one of several working teams
responsible for various components. Apologies to anyone who
may have inadvertently been missed.
DACC Sub- Doug Fletcher Petro-Canada

Committee Members Les Groeller Shell Canada
Kenn Hample Alberta Workplace Health and
Safety
Barry Holland Workers’ Compensation Board of
British Columbia
Ron Hutzal Noyes Supervision
Rod Loewen Workers’ Compensation Board of
British Columbia
John Mayall EUB - Alberta
Don Myers (CHAIR) Burlington Resources (Canadian
Hunter)
George Myette Pajak Engineering
Mark Nicklom Bissett Resources
Kim Richardson Marathon Oil
Bob Ross Saskatchewan Labour, OH&S
Division
Brad Rowbotham Roll'n Oilfield Industries Ltd.
Ken Shewan Frontier Engineering
Murray Sunstrum Canadian Petroleum Safety Council
Jack Thacker Husky Oil
Willy Zukiwski PanCanadian

Other Ron Berg Precision Drilling
Contributors: Bob Cunningham Canadian Petroleum Safety
Council
Adel Girgis AEUB
Dave Graber PanCanadian
Garth Gramlich PanCanadian
Wayne Harvey Safety Consultant
Ron Lapp Jade Drilling
John Miller PanCanadian
Ron Miller Consultant
Lorne Polzin Petroleum Industry Training Service
Barry Rock Shell Canada
Jim Shaffer Petroleum Industry Training Service
Bob Stockton Consultant
Jim Storbakken Imperial Oil
Rod Thomas Bonus Resources
Layne Wilk Precision Well Servicing

7.1 Introduction
Drilling, completions and well workovers involve a wide variety

of operations that often require a number of contractors,
technical services and suppliers working together at the wellsite.
These operations must be planned and executed by qualified and
competent people at all levels to ensure the safety of workers and
the public, the protection of the environment and the
conservation of natural resources. The well owner or ‘operator’
conducting these operations has overall responsibility for
achieving these goals. The wellsite supervisor representing the
operator or prime contractor plays a key role by directing and co-
ordinating all employers at the wellsite to implement the planned
work program. The purpose of this IRP is to recommend
minimum standards to ensure that the operator or prime
contractor provides competent supervision at the wellsite.
The impetus for the development of this IRP was a growing need
to improve minimum standards for safety management at the
well site. Therefore, the primary focus during the development
of this IRP was on safety. However, compliance with legislation
and industry standards that relate to environmental protection
and resource conservation is also a goal in these qualification
standards.

7.2 Scope
This IRP deals with well operations that are generally known in the
industry as drilling, completions and workovers. Minor well
servicing on completed wells, which do not require removal of the
wellhead and do not require the installation of temporary blow out
prevention equipment to ensure well control during the operation, is
beyond the scope of this IRP. However, the responsibilities of the
prime contractor, in terms of safety management, are essentially the
same for any operation involving two or more employers at a
wellsite.
The subject of the IRP is supervision at the wellsite by the prime

contractor, which is usually the operator. Each employer or
contractor at the well site must also provide competent supervision
for their employees. Responsibilities of an employer’s supervisor
are discussed relative to the duties of the prime contractor’s
supervisor. Specific qualification requirements for supervisors of
other employers at the wellsite are not part of this IRP.
While the focus of the IRP is the wellsite supervisor, it must be

recognized that the responsibilities are basically those of the
operator and/or the prime contractor. Therefore the operator and/or
prime contractor must have a good understanding of these
requirements and a clear agreement with the wellsite supervisor as
to how these obligations will be met.
These recommendations are based on regulatory compliance and

due diligence. The specific requirements for the work planned in
drilling, completions and workover operations vary widely and part
of the operator’s due diligence is to assign competent supervision
for the specific work being supervised. This IRP does not attempt to
define supervisor competency requirements for every type of job
but does describe the minimum steps the operator or prime
contractor should take in making this determination.

7.3 Definitions
The following basic principals and definitions are used

throughout this IRP. Please refer to the diagram in Appendix A
for further clarification.
Prime Contractor: When workers from more than one

employer are working at a wellsite then one party must have
overall responsibility for safety at that wellsite and co-ordination
of all employers to carry out the planned work. In Alberta this
party is known as the ‘prime contractor’ and this term will be
used throughout this IRP. In other jurisdictions this specific
term may not be used, but the legislation has similar
requirements and responsibilities for this function.
Operator: The owner of the wellsite is the prime contractor

unless he has specifically assigned this responsibility to another
party by written agreement and has taken steps to ensure that the
party is capable of fulfilling all the duties and responsibilities
required of a prime contractor. When a well has more than one
owner, the owner who is assigned as the operator has the
responsibilities of prime contractor. Generally this is the licensee
of the well. The term ‘operator’ will have this meaning
throughout this IRP.

Wellsite Supervisor: The term wellsite supervisor is commonly
used to describe the individual who is representing the operator
or prime contractor at the wellsite and is generally responsible
for directing all employers at the wellsite. The wellsite
supervisor is therefore the representative of the prime contractor
at the wellsite. This is the job function and the meaning of the
term ‘wellsite supervisor’ that is the subject of this IRP. Other
commonly used terms for this person are ‘consultant’, ‘company
man’, and ‘engineer’ (the use of 'engineer' must be avoided
unless the individual is a registered P. Eng.).
Employer: In this document this term means any company that

has one or more employees at the wellsite. This includes ‘drilling
contractors’ and ‘service companies’ or 'sub-contractors'
commonly referred to in the industry. It also includes any small
contractors or businesses that have one or more people doing
work at the wellsite whether they are employees, owner
operators or self employed workers.
Employer’s Supervisor: In OH&S legislation it is a general

requirement that employers provide their workers with adequate
training and supervision. There are various detailed
requirements that help define what constitutes adequate
supervision and a competent supervisor. The term ‘employer’s
supervisor’ in this IRP refers to the person directly responsible
for the supervision of the work and workers of a specific
employer at the wellsite.
Examples of an employer’s supervisor are: rig manager, driller,

truck push, frac crew supervisor, logging supervisor, drill stem
tester, power tong operator, cementing supervisor.

7.4 Roles, Responsibilities and Duties
7.4.1 Operator and Prime Contractor
7.4.1.1 The operator, as owner and licensee of the well and wellsite, has
Regulatory overall responsibility to ensure the safety of workers and the
Compliance public, the protection of the environment and the conservation of
resources related to all activity at the wellsite and in the
wellbore. There are many rules governing the design, planning
and execution of oil and gas operations. These are provided in
various legislated acts, regulations and guides as well as
recognized standards and IRPs. The operator must ensure
compliance with all of these. Responsibility for compliance with
many of the rules may be assigned to people doing the planning,
design and programming of well operations at the office level.
When these programs are implemented in the field, the wellsite
supervisor represents the operator/prime contractor.

7.4.1.2 Safety The prime contractor has overall responsibility for health and
safety at the wellsite. In fulfilling this responsibility, the prime
contractor must ensure that contractors and employers at the
wellsite comply with all applicable legislation. The following
steps are recommended to help achieve this obligation:
• Implement an effective safety program that meets the
requirements for a basic safety program as described in IRP
Volume 9. Ensure all employers on site are aware of and
comply with all requirements of this program that exceed or
supplement their own safety program.
• Use employers at the wellsite that have an effective safety
program in place for their own operations that meets the
requirements for a basic safety program as described above,
including safe work procedures for the work they do. All
independent or self-employed workers who do not have their
own safety program must be included in the safety program
of the prime contractor or another employer on site.
• Co-ordinate the efforts of all employers at the wellsite.
Ensure all employers, supervisors and workers know what
their role and responsibilities are for the work planned.
Ensure all safety procedures are compatible.
• Verify that all employers are providing their workers with
training and supervision that addresses the tasks and hazards
of the work they do at the wellsite.
• It is not the prime contractor’s role to do this training and
supervision directly but only to check that employers do
provide supervision in a manner that meets legislated
requirements as a minimum. However, if a worker is a direct
employee of the prime contractor and reports to the wellsite
supervisor, then the wellsite supervisor is responsible for the
training and supervision as per Section 7.4.3.
Standards for Wellsite Supervision • 10

• Inform all employers of any known hazards related to the
specific wellsite, the planned program or the materials
supplied by the prime contractor. Ensure that procedures are
in place to eliminate or control these hazards.
• Ensure that site-specific emergency response procedures are
in place and that all employers and workers know these
procedures and are prepared to follow them.
• Monitor activity at the site to verify compliance with
applicable legislation and safe work procedures.

7.4.2 Wellsite Supervisor
7.4.2.1 General The wellsite supervisor is generally responsible for directing and
Duties co-ordinating all employers at the wellsite to achieve the goals of
the work planned by the operator and ensure compliance with all
legislation pertaining to that work at the wellsite. The specific
duties will vary considerably depending on the nature of the
work and how the operator assigns certain responsibilities.

7.4.2.2 Safety In terms of safety management, the duties of the wellsite
supervisor, as the representative of the prime contractor, should
include the following:
• Identify themselves at the wellsite and ensure they can be
easily located and contacted at all times. An alternate
competent representative of the prime contractor must also
be identified who can be contacted if the wellsite supervisor
becomes incapacitated or inaccessible for any reason.
• Check that all employers on the wellsite have an effective
safety program and safe work procedures.
• Check that all employers understand and agree to follow all
requirements of the prime contractor's safety program that
are not already met by their own safety program.
• Provide for wellsite orientation of all employers and visitors
on arrival at the wellsite.
• Co-ordinate the efforts of all employers at the wellsite.
Resolve any discrepancies between safe work procedures
before starting the work.
• Identify and document the name of the on-site supervisor for
each employer prior to starting any work.
• Review and clarify the roles and responsibilities of all
employers and on-site supervisors prior to doing any work.
• Check that all employers on site are providing their
employees with the training and supervision described in
Section 7.4.3.
• Ascertain the number of inexperienced workers and review
job execution plans with the employer to ensure these
workers receive adequate supervision.

• Identify hazards related to the specific wellsite, the planned
program or the materials provided by the prime contractor.
Inform all employers of these hazards and ensure proper
controls are in place before the work begins.
• Establish and co-ordinate site-specific emergency response
procedures. Post information, review procedures and conduct
practice drills with all personnel on site.
• Ensure that well control and blowout prevention measures
meet regulations and operator's requirements.
• Monitor the work performed by all employers to verify
compliance with safety legislation as well as safety program
requirements.
• Monitor the wellsite for proper use, handling, storage and
maintenance of personal protective equipment by all
workers.
• Check that the procedures for handling, transportation,
disposal, storage and use of all hazardous substances, follows
applicable regulations and safe practices.
• Implement detection and control of Hydrogen Sulfide and
other hazardous gases to prevent harmful exposure of
workers or the public.
• Implement detection and control of any flammable
substances that may be emitted from the well or surface
facilities, to prevent accidental fire or explosion.
• Direct work to be stopped when an unsafe act or condition is
identified. Resume work only after the hazard is removed or
safe procedures have been established.
• Ensure incidents/accidents or near misses are reported and
investigated.

7.4.3 Employer’s Supervision
Safety legislation requires that employers provide all workers

with instruction, training and supervision by a competent
supervisor to ensure they carry out their work in a safe manner.
It is recommended that all employers provide their workers with
training and supervision that includes the following:
• Provide all workers with a wellsite orientation.
• Inform all workers of the employer's safety program
requirements and ensure these requirements are followed.
• Ensure workers are aware of their rights and responsibilities
under OH&S legislation, including their right and obligation
to refuse to do unsafe work.
• Provide workers with instruction and training on safe work
procedures for the assigned tasks, including rules from
relevant safety legislation.
• Ensure workers new to a position receive direct supervision
by a competent worker until they have demonstrated the
ability to perform the assigned tasks safely.
• Ensure only properly trained workers operate equipment or
machinery.
• Conduct frequent inspections of the wellsite to ensure
workers are following safe work practices and applicable
OH&S regulations.
• Identify hazards, inform all workers and the prime contractor
of the hazards. Establish procedures to remove or avoid the
hazards and ensure these steps are followed.
• Stop work when an unsafe act or condition is identified and
take action to ensure conditions are safe before work is
resumed.

• Ensure all hazardous materials to be used in their work have
been identified and that workers are given instruction as
required by WHMIS legislation.
• Ensure the proper use and maintenance of Personal
Protective Equipment (PPE).
• Ensure that site-specific emergency response procedures are
in place and that all workers are prepared to follow them.
• Report and investigate any accidents or near misses.

7.5 Requirements for Assigning Duties of
Wellsite Supervisor
7.5.1 A Supervisor Must be Assigned
IRP: The prime contractor must provide a competent wellsite

supervisor who has been assigned specific duties and
responsibilities as a representative of the prime contractor.
The prime contractor will determine if the supervisor is

competent based on the job requirements, the duties assigned
and an assessment of the supervisor’s training and work
experience as described in Section 7.7.
7.5.2 Agreement of Duties
IRP: Every wellsite supervisor must have a written description

and agreement of the duties and responsibilities assigned to
him by the prime contractor. As a minimum these duties
must include those listed in Section 7.4.2.2.
This written agreement must be renewed and updated at least

every 2 years, and whenever the assigned duties are changed.

7.5.3 Identify Wellsite Supervisor
IRP: The name of the wellsite supervisor representing the prime

contractor must be documented and posted at the wellsite.
It is also important that the wellsite supervisor can be easily

located and identified by all people at the wellsite.
A sample form for posting the name and basic duties of the
wellsite supervisor as well as the name of an alternate contact for
the prime contractor is given in Appendix B.

7.6 Training Requirements
7.6.1 Wellsite Supervisor
IRP: All wellsite supervisors must have valid certificates for the
training courses shown in the Section 7.6.3.
7.6.2 Operator or Prime Contractor
It is recommended that any individual working for the operator

or prime contractor who directs the work of a wellsite supervisor
should have the training courses shown in Section 7.6.3.

7.6.3 Training Requirements
Person
Renewal* Completions
Drilling Directing
Course Frequency Workover
Supervisor Wellsite
(years) Supervisor
Supervisor
Safety Management and
Regulatory Awareness for 3 Yes Yes Yes
Wellsite Supervision
Second Line Supervisor’s Well Yes
2 Yes No
Control for drilling
Yes
for
Well Service Blowout Prevention 5 No Yes
completions
& servicing
Detection and Control of
3 Optional Yes Optional
Flammable Substances
WHMIS** 3 Yes Yes Yes
Standard First Aid ** 3 Yes Yes Optional
TDG ** 3 Yes Yes Yes
®
H2S Alive 3 Yes Yes Yes
*Note: The requirements for renewal of certification for each

course vary.
Except where denoted by **, the courses recommended were

developed by Enform to meet the standards specified by
industry. Certificates are issued by Enform and accepted by
regulators as proof of “adequate training”. Some Enform
courses can be “franchised” which means that outside instructors
can be certified by Enform so that the course can be taught
outside of Enform, and successful students will receive the
Enform certificate. This process can be used if companies wish
to include Enform courses in their own in house training.

7.6.4 Description of Training Courses
7.6.4.1 Safety The three-day course, Safety Management and Regulatory

Management Awareness for Wellsite Supervision has been designed to ensure
and Regulatory wellsite supervisors and prime contractors are aware of their
Awareness for responsibilities and roles with respect to Health and Safety at the
Wellsite wellsite. Key legislated rules and industry practices for Alberta,
Supervision British Columbia and Saskatchewan are discussed and
summarized so that the wellsite supervisor/prime contractor can
research further details as needed. Responsibilities for health and
safety legislation, health and safety program elements,
supervisor's role, hazard identification, risk assessment and
control, inspections, incident investigation, emergency response,
and leadership skills are covered in the course.
7.6.4.2 Safety This refresher course is designed to ensure wellsite supervisors

Management and prime contactors maintain a high level of awareness of their
and Regulatory responsibilities and roles with respect to safety management and
Awareness for regulatory compliance at the Wellsite. Key legislated rules and
Wellsite industry practices for Alberta, British Columbia, and
Supervision Saskatchewan are discussed and are summarized in an index
(Refresher) with references so that the wellsite supervisor/prime contractor
can research further details as needed. Responsibilities for health
and safety legislation, health and safety program elements,
hazard identification, risk assessment and control, inspections,
incident investigation, emergency response and leadership skills
are reviewed. This refresher will emphasize regulatory changes
and key industry issues from the preceding 3 years.

7.6.4.3 Second This course deals with well control during open hole drilling
Line operations. Participants are required to perform well control
Supervisor’s procedures and demonstrate the proper response to hole and
Well Control equipment problems using test well equipment. The course also
includes wellbore pressure concepts, well control strategies
while on bottom, tripping and while out of the hole, appropriate
techniques for management of people and equipment related to
well control at the wellsite.
7.6.4.4 Well This course covers sources and magnitude of pressures, causes
Service Blowout of kicks, BOP equipment, kick warning signs, crew position and
Prevention duties, well shut-in procedures and well killing procedures for
(BOP) cased-hole operations.
7.6.4.5 This course includes an introduction to flammable substances,

Detection and principles of flammable gas / vapor detection, care and
Control of preparation of combustible gas monitors, interpreting
Flammable combustible gas readings and control methods.
Substance
7.6.4.6 This course covers the basics of WHMIS, providing participants

Workplace with general knowledge and skills to work safely around
Hazardous hazardous materials.
Materials
Information
Systems
(WHMIS)
Training

7.6.4.7 Standard The course provides participants with a basic theoretical and
First Aid practical knowledge of first aid procedures so they can apply
them both on and off the wellsite. This training is not intended to
meet any legislated requirements for first aid at the wellsite.
Specific first aid requirements including training of first aid
attendants at work sites vary between OH&S jurisdictions.
7.6.4.8 Includes training in TDG legislation, classification of materials,

Transportation safety marks, documentation, safe handling requirements,
of Dangerous incident reporting and emergency response.
Goods (TDG)
7.6.4.9 H2S This course covers the physical properties and health hazards of
Alive® H2S, how to protect oneself and basic rescue techniques.
Participants are required to operate self-contained breathing
apparatus, an H2S detector device, and perform rescue breathing
on a mannequin.

7.7 Work Experience Assessment
7.7.1 Requirement for Assessment
In addition to the required training, a wellsite supervisor must

have experience with the type of work planned in order to carry
out the duties assigned in a competent manner. The type and
amount of experience required depends on the complexity of the
work and the specific duties assigned.
IRP: The prime contractor must conduct an assessment of the

supervisor’s work experience and training to ensure he has
the skills and knowledge required to meet the requirements
for the work and duties being assigned. This evaluation must
include the process steps and content described in Section
7.7.3. The evaluation must be documented, signed and kept
on file by the person to whom the supervisor is reporting.

7.7.2 Frequency of Re-Assessment
7.7.2.1 All supervisors must have a current assessment from the prime
Continuous contractor they are working for. If the supervisor continues to
Work Situations work for the same prime contractor, the assessment must be
updated at least every 2 years.
7.7.2.2 Changes When a supervisor is re-assigned to work that is significantly

in Job more complex, then the prime contractor must re-assess his skill
Assignment levels to ensure they are adequate for the new work
requirements. In some cases this may be done by adding an
assessment of the additional skills required to the original
assessment. In any event, the assessment that the operator has
on file must include skill requirements for the major operations
of the actual wellsite work being supervised.

7.7.3 Assessment Process and Content
Requirements
7.7.3.1 Process For each duty assigned, the assessor must determine if the skill
for Assessment level of the candidate meets the requirements to carry out the
of Skill Level task. This determination must be based on the education, training
and work history record plus the skills observed by the
references and the assessor. It is suggested the assessor rate the
candidate as either 'meets or exceeds requirements' or as
'requires additional training or experience' in which case
comments should be included as to what is required.
7.7.3.2 Required Required Information Record of Work History and References

Information
Record of Work • Name, address and phone # of the person being assessed
History and • List of training certificates and dates each was issued
References
• Record of all formal education and year each was completed,
if available
• Record of work experience including:
- relevant wellsite experience other than as wellsite
supervision
- experience as a wellsite supervisor, if not entry level
- other relevant industry experience not at the wellsite

• List of references starting with the last three employers (or
back 5 years) and including:
- name and phone # of reference
- name of the company or employer of the reference
- dates when candidate was employed including month
and year
- was this reference contacted by assessor? If so, on what
date?
• Information about the person who did the assessment
including:
- name
- name of his company or employer
- job title or position
- address and phone #
- date the assessment was completed or updated

7.7.3.3 Minimum The candidate must be assessed as having the skills required in
Skill the following categories, considering the points described and
Assessment the work assigned:
Requirements
• Supervision and Leadership
- Demonstrate safe personal work habits
- Establish and maintain effective working relationships
- Communicate operational and safety requirements
effectively
• Health & Safety
- Implement operator’s safety program at the Wellsite
- Conduct effective safety meetings
- Check that all employers have safe work procedures in
effect
- Check that all employer on-site supervisors are
performing their duties
- Monitor work to ensure safe work procedures and
regulations are followed
- Check that personal protective equipment is being used
as required
- Perform hazard assessments and implement hazard
controls
- Direct the detection and control of H2S, flammable
emissions and other hazardous atmospheric conditions
• Emergency Response
- Establish and co-ordinate site-specific emergency
response procedures

• Environmental Protection
- Carry out operations in accordance with environmental
regulation
- Check that waste disposal practices follow approved
procedures
- Contain and report spills, leaks or other environmental
damage
• Well Control
- Ensure BOPs and other well control equipment meets
regulations
- Ensure inspection, function testing and pressure testing is
carried out
- Ensure kick detection equipment and practices are in place
- Ensure BOP training and certificates of personnel meet
regulations
- Conduct BOP drills as per regulations and operator
requirements
• Operational Skills and Technical Knowledge
- Review and understand well design and program
requirements
- Ensure all operations comply with regulations and industry
standards
- Plan and co-ordinate equipment and services requirements
- Identify hazards associated with the work planned
- Ensure rig and equipment layout and spacing meets
regulations
- Ensure transportation of equipment meets all regulations
and bylaws

7.7.3.4 Specific knowledge and experience requirements for a particular
Additional Job job depends on the type of work planned, the depth and
Specific Skill complexity of the well, the reservoir fluid properties including
Requirements H2S potential, the location of the well and any specific issues
related to public or environmental impact potential. The assessor
must have this knowledge about the job prior to assessing and
assigning an appropriate supervisor. Additional requirements for
the job must be included in the assessment of potential
supervisors based on these factors.
Note: Refer to IRP Volume 1 and ARP Volume 2 for specific

requirements for supervision on wells classified as 'critical sour'.

7.8 Performance Evaluation and Audits
Good management practices require that results achieved must

be compared to the goals and expectations on a regular basis in
order to identify performance gaps and opportunities for
improvement. The performance of wellsite supervisors must be
monitored and evaluated as part of this process. New supervisors
should be evaluated more frequently than supervisors with
proven track records.

7.8.1 Documentation
Good management practices require that results achieved must

be compared to the goals and expectations on a regular basis in
order to identify performance gaps and opportunities for
improvement. The performance of wellsite supervisors must be
monitored and evaluated as part of this process. New supervisors
should be evaluated more frequently than supervisors with
proven track records.

7.8.2 Inspections and Audits
Operators and prime contractors should inspect wellsite

operations on a regular basis. The person directing the wellsite
supervisor should conduct informal audits by visiting the
wellsite at appropriate times to observe operating procedures,
check records kept on location and get feedback from the
employers involved in the work. Operators and prime
contractors should also periodically conduct formal audits of
their safety management system using trained auditors. Refer to
IRP Volume 9 for recommendations on safety program audits.

7.8.3 Government Inspections
Government agencies conduct field inspections and audits of

field operations as necessary to ensure compliance with
regulations. The wellsite supervisor and the prime contractor
must assist the inspectors and support this process in a co-
operative manner.

Appendix “A”:
Levels of Control and Responsibility for Safety Management
Standards for Wellsite Supervision of Appendix “A” • 35

Appendix “B”:
Notice of Wellsite Supervisor (Sample)

Note: Saskatchewan Labour has a sample Generic Form to assist in complying with Section 412 of OH&S
regulations in that province.
TAKE NOTICE that ___________________________________________(operator/prime contractor)

HEREBY APPOINTS _______________________________________________(name of supervisor)
as the wellsite supervisor of the following undertaking: Drilling Completion / Workover
Description of well operations to be carried out:
Located at the following well locations_______________________________________________________
During the time period from: _____day, __________month, ___________year

to: _____day, __________month, ___________year
ALTERNATE CONTACT: representative for the prime contractor if the Wellsite Supervisor becomes incapacitated or
is inaccessible: ____________________________________________________ ( name )
Contact phone #s __________________(work) __________________(cell) ___________________(home)
The Supervisor’s duties and responsibilities include the following matters:

Implement the prime contractor’s safety program at the wellsite.
Check that all employers on the wellsite have a safety program including safe work procedures.
Ensure all employers understand and agree to follow all requirements of the prime contractor’s safety program that
are not already met by their own safety program.
Direct and co-ordinate the efforts of all employers at the wellsite, including:
- review and clarification of roles and responsibilities of all employers and supervisors
- resolution of discrepancies between safe work procedures
- safe transportation, storage, use and disposal all hazardous substances
Identify hazards related to the specific wellsite, the planned program or the materials provided by the prime
contractor. Inform all employers of these hazards and ensure procedures are in place to control these hazards.
Ensure the following site specific hazard controls meet requirements and standards:
- well control and blowout prevention
- detection and control of Hydrogen Sulfide gas emissions
- detection and control of any flammable substances that may be emitted
Establish and direct site-specific emergency response procedures
Monitor work activities of all employers and work activities to verify:

- compliance with safety legislation
- safe work procedures and proper use of PPE are followed
- all employees receive supervision and training from their employer as per IRP Volume 7
The Supervisor is knowledgeable about and experienced in all of the matters listed above.
Assigned By:__________________________________ (representative of operator/ prime contractor)
Contact phone #s:___________________(work)___________________(cell)
Accepted By:__________________________________ (signed by wellsite supervisor )
Contact phone #s:___________________(work)___________________(cell)
Standards for Wellsite Supervision of Appendix “B” • 36

APPENDIX VI
EXERCISE KEYS
Appendix VI: Exercise Keys
(KEY)
1. Calculate the hydrostatic pressures at 1600 metres using the following mud densities.
Mud Density Hydrostatic Pressure
1070 kg/m3 16,794 kPa

1200 kg/m3 18,835 kPa
1450 kg/m3 22,759 kPa
1800 kg/m3 28,253 kPa
2. Calculate the formation pressure using the following information.

Depth = 1265 m
SIDPP = 300 kPa
SICP = 900 kPa
Formation Pressure = Hydrostatic Pressure + SIDPP

= (1265 × 1120 × 0.00981) + 300 kPa
= 14,199 kPa
3. Calculate the gradients of the following mud densities.

Mud Density Gradient
1070 kg/m3 10.5 kPa/m

1300 kg/m3 12.75 kPa/m
1500 kg/m3 14.72 kPa/m
1850 kg/m3 18.15 kPa/m
VII-1 October 2006

4. Calculate the mud density required to overbalance the formation pressure by 400 kPa.
Depth = 750 m
SIDPP = 400 kPa
SICP = 800 kPa
Formation Pressure = (750 m × 1100 kg/m3 × 0.00981) + 400 kPa

= 8093 kPa + 400 kPa
= 8493 kPa
Overbalance = 8493 kPa + 400 kPa (Overbalance)

= 8893 kPa
Mud Density = 8893 kPa ÷ 750 m ÷ 0.00981

= 1209 kg/m3
5. Calculate the ECD or EMD using the following information.

Depth = 1450 m
Annular Pressure Loss = 300 kPa
OPERATION EFFECTIVE BHP ECD or EMD

DRILLING
16,658 1171
PUMP OFF
16,358 1150
TRIPPING OUT
15,958 1121
TRIPPING IN
16,958 1192
VI-2 October 2006

6. Calculate the volume of gas given the following conditions.

Depth = 1650 m
SIDPP = 500 kPa
SICP = 1400 kPa
Pit Gain = 2.5 m3
P1 = (1650 × 1150 × 0.00981) + 500 kPa

= 19,114 kPa
V1 = 2.5 m3
z Gas at 750 metres and the casing pressure is 2200 kPa.
P2 = 2200 kPa + (750 × 1150 × 0.00981)
= 2200 kPa + 8461
= 10,661 kPa
19,114 kPa x 2.5 m3
V2 = = 4.48 m3
10,661 kPa
z Gas at the choke and the casing pressure is 3000 kPa.

19,114 kPa x 2.5 m3
V2 = = 15.9 m3
3,000 kPa
z Gas is at the poor-boy degasser.
19,114 kPa x 2.5 m3

V2 = = 478 m3
100 kPa
VI-3 October 2006

7. Calculate the minimum accumulator size required, according to EUB Regulations, for the
following BOP stack.

Precharge Pressure = 7000 kPa
Annular Preventer 254 mm (21,000 kPa) Hydril GK

Pipe Ram 254 mm (21,000 kPa) Hydril Type V
Blind Ram 254 mm (21,000 kPa) Hydril Type V
HCR Valve 102 mm (21,000 kPa) Shaffer Type DB
Add 50% = 43.16 × 1.5 = 64.74 ℓ
8400 x 64.74 l 21,000 kPa

Size = x
21,000 − 8,400 3,000 kPa
= 43.16 × 3
= 129.48 ℓ
z How many accumulator bottles would be required for the above accumulator (bottle
size is 42 L)?
Useable Fluid = 42 ℓ -3.78 ℓ

= 38.22 ℓ
129.48 l
Number of Bottles =
38.22 l per Bottle
= 3.39 Bottles (4 Bottles)
VI-4 October 2006

(KEY)
information.
Depth = 628 m
MACP = 1400 kPa
SIDPP = 400 kPa
SICP = 1200 kPa
Tank Gain = 4.5 m3
Temperature = -25°C
The mud-mixing pump is down for repairs and another one is being hot shotted out to the
rig. It should be there in about 2 hours.
What well control method will you use? Modified Low Choke
Since SICP is very near MACP, the choice is to use Modified Low Choke.
1. Open choke slowly.
2. Bring pump up to 80% drilling rate
3. Hold CP at MACP.
4. Record DPP.
5. After the gas reaches surface, close the choke to maintain the casing pressure at
maximum allowable.
6. When the DPP increases to #4 above, use DPP and continue to circulate as is done
in Step #1 Driller’s Method.
7. Repeat above, as second influx mean surface and MACP will be exceeded.
VI-5 October 2006

information.
Depth = 1480 m
MACP = 4200 kPa
SIDPP = 400 kPa
SICP = 800 kPa
Tank Gain = 2 m3
90 m3 premix = 1390 kg/m3
What well control method will you use? Wait and Weight
1. Ensure kill mud has been mixed to displace hole.

2. Crack choke/initiate flow.
3. Start pump and adjust to reduced speed.
4. Make choke adjustments as per DPP schedule.
5. When kill mud displaced to the bit, maintain constant DPP until influx is out of hole.
6. Stop pump, bleed off trapped pressure to ensure well is dead.
3. If the following problems occurred during the circulation of a kick, complete the chart
below by indicating what you would expect to observe if you used Step #1 of the
Driller’s Method.
CHOKE FLARE
PROBLEM DPP CP SPM PVT POSITION (IF GTS) OTHER
Plugged Nozzle ↑ ↓ ↓ ↑ almost open
Unplugged
Nozzle ↓ ↑ ↑ ↓ almost closed
Bridge dies or sound in
↑ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↑ almost open decreases manifold
Plugged Choke sound in
↑ ↑ ↓ ↓ almost open dies manifold
Washed Choke ↓ ↓ ↑ ↑ almost closed increases
VI-6 October 2006

If the following problems occurred during the circulation of a kick, complete the chart
below by indicating what you would expect to observe if you observed casing
pressure while circulating as well as drill pipe pressure.
CHOKE
Plugged Nozzle ↓ or
↑ same same normal same pump working harder
Unplugged ↑ or
Nozzle ↓ same same normal same pump not working as hard
Bridge ↑ ↓ ↓ decreases closed pump working harder
Plugged Choke no sound in manifold

↑ ↑ ↓ ↓ open shack
Washed Choke same or choke closed with pump

↓ ↓ same increases closed running
4. State one advantage for using the following well control methods.
METHOD ADVANTAGE
Driller’s Method Simple and straight forward.
Concurrent Circulation time reduced.
Low Choke None. Desperation method.
Modified Low Choke None. Desperation method.
Volumetric Allow gas influx to expand if unable to pump.
Wait and Weight Lower annular pressures.
VI-7 October 2006

5. State the procedure for bleeding-off the excess amount of trapped overkill.
1. Gradually open choke and bleed off excessive overkill.

2. Close choke and record SIDPP and SICP.
3. Open choke, initiate circulation holding SICP (#2 above) constant until DPP
established.
The following pages are sample forms to practice well control calculations.

(Driller’s Method)
DEPTH 1450 m
CASING SEAT 465 m
HOLE SIZE 222 mm
PUMP FULL SPEED/PRESSURE 60 spm/8600 kPa
PUMP REDUCED SPEED/PRESSURE 30 spm/2600 kPa
PIT GAIN 2.5 m3
LEAK-OFF GRADIENT 18 kPa/m
OVERKILL 600 kPa
VI-8 October 2006


Well Total Depth 1,450 m Casing Depth 465 m Date:
PUMP DATA
3 3
Pump Output .01644 m /stroke × 30 SPMReduced = .49 m /min
Drill Pipe 1450 .0074 11 22 660
OH Annulus 985 .0285 28 57 1710
Casing Annulus 465 .0409 19 39 1170
Mud Tanks 90 184 5520
Pre-Mix Tanks
TOTAL 148 302 9060
CALCULATIONS
Fracture Pressure = Depth of Casing 465 m × Leak-Off Gradient 18 kPa/m = 8370 kPa
3
HP = Depth of Casing 465 m × Original Mud 1120 kg/m × 0.00981 = 5109 kPa
MACP = Fracture Pressure 8370 kPa - HP 5109 kPa = 3261 kPa
4250 x Density Increase 21 kg/m 3 89250
4250 − Kill Mud 1141 kg/m 3
3109
Total Barite = Barite Required 29 kg/m3 × Volume 148 m3 = 4292 kg

MR = Number of Sacks 107 sacks ÷ Minutes(R) 302 Minutes = .35 Sacks/min
ICP = RSPP 2600 kPa + SIDPP 300 kPa + OK 600 kPa = 3500 kPa
⎡ RSPP 2600 kPa x Kill Mud 1141 kg/m3 ⎤
FCP = ⎢ ⎥ + OK 600 kPa = 3250 kPa
3
⎣⎢ Original Mud 1120 kg/m ⎥⎦
Fracture Pressure = Depth of casing 465 m × Leak-off Gradient 18 kPa/m = 8370 kPa
HP = Depth of casing 465 m × Kill Mud 1141 kg/m3 × 0.00981 = 5205 kPa
VI-9 October 2006

KICK DATA
3 3
SICP 1600 kPa ORIGINAL MUD 1120 kg/m Overkill 600 kPa Pit Gain m
300 1600 3500 2200 3500 3000 3500 900 900 900 300 300
VI-10
CP = Given
SICP = SIDPP
SIDPP = SIDPP
CP = SICP + OK
SIDPP = 300 kPa

SICP = 1600 kPa
CP = SIDPP + OK
SICP = SIDPP + OK
SIDPP = SIDPP + OK

Tank Gain to Zero
October 2006
KICK DATA
SICP 300 kPa ORIGINAL MUD 1120 kg/m3 Overkill 600 kPa KILL MUD 1141 kg/m3
300 300 3500 900 3250 900 0 300 3250 900 0 0

VI-11
SICP = 0
SIDPP = 0
SIDPP = 0
SICP = SIDPP
SICP = 300 kPa

SIDPP = 300 kPa
CP = SIDPP + OK
CP = SIDPP + OK
CP = SIDPP + OK

Pressure Bled Off
October 2006

DEPTH 2170 m
CASING SEAT 960 m
HOLE SIZE 222 mm
PIT GAIN 2.5 m3
GRADIENT 18 kPa/m
VI-12 October 2006


PUMP DATA
3
Pump Output 0.01644 m /stroke 30 SPMReduced = 0.4932 m3/min
Drill Pipe 2170 0.0074 16 33 977
OH Annulus 1210 0.0285 34.5 70 2098
Casing Annulus 960 0.0409 39.3 79 2388
Mud Tanks 90 182 5474
TOTAL 179.8 364 10,920
CALCULATIONS
Increase this circ. = 3
= 57 kg/m3
(4250 x PO 0.4932 m /min + (40 x MR) 1 sack/min
New Mud Density = OMD 1250 kg/m3 + MDI 57 kg/m3 = 1307 kg/m3
Remaining Density Increase = Density Increase 85 kg/m3 - Increase this circ. 57 kg/m3 = 28 kg/m3
Remaining SIDPP = Remaining Density Increase 28 kg/m3 x Depth 2170 m x 0.00981 = 596 kPa
3
3300 kPa x New Mud Density 1307 kg/m
FCP = + Remaining SIDPP 596 kPa = 4046 kPa
Original Mud Density 1250 kg/m 3

3
HP = Casing Depth 960 m × New Mud 1307 kg/m × 0.00981 = 12,308 kPa
VI-13 October 2006


ICP 5100 kPa
FCP 4046 kPa
VI-14 October 2006

CONCURRENT METHOD
KICK DATA

3 3
1800 3500 5100 3500 4046 4200 596 4200 4046 4200 596 596
CP = SICP
VI-15
CP = Given
CP = Given
SICP = Given
SICP = FP - HP
SIDPP = FP - HP
SICP = 3500 kPa

SIDPP = 1800 kPa
ICP = RSPP + SIDPP
Note: Kill mud density not sufficient to kill well in one circulation
October 2006

DEPTH 2600 m
CASING SEAT 1060 m
HOLE SIZE 222 mm
PIT GAIN 2.5 m3
GRADIENT 18 kPa/m
VI-16 October 2006



PUMP DATA
Pump Bore Diameter 127 mm × Stroke Length 406 mm RSPP 3300 kPa
Pump Output 0.01644 m3/stroke x 30 SPMReduced = 0.4932 m3/min
Drill Pipe 2600 0.0074 19.2 39 1170
OH Annulus 1540 0.0285 43.9 89 2670
Casing Annulus 1060 0.0409 43.4 88 2640
Sub Totals 106.5 216 6480
Mud Tanks 140 283 8515
TOTAL 246.5 499 14995
CALCULATIONS
MACP = Fracture Pressure 19,080 kPa - Hydrostatic Pressure 12,998 kPa = 6082 kPa
Density Increase = SIDPP 1800 kPa ÷ depth 2600 m ÷ 0.00981 = 70 kg/m3
Barite Required = 3
= 102 kg/m3
4250 − Kill Mud 1320 kg/m
Total Barite = Barite Required 102 kg/m3 × Volume 246.5 m3 = 25,143 kg

Number of Sacks = Total Barite 25,143 kg ÷ 40 kg/sack = 628 Sacks
Initial Circulating Pressure = RSPP 3300 kPa + SIDPP 1800 kPa = 5100 kPa
RSPP 3300 kPa x Kill Mud 1320 kg/m 3
Final Circulating Pressure = = 3485 kPa
Original Mud 1250 kg/m 3

Hydrostatic Pressure = Casing Depth 1060 m × Kill Mud 1320 kg/m3 × 0.00981 = 13,726 kPa
VI-17 October 2006

KILL SHEET WAIT & WEIGHT METHOD

Maximum Allowable Casing Pressure With Kill Mud (MACP) 5354 kPa
ICP 5100 kPa
FCP 3485 kPa
VI-18 October 2006

KICK DATA
OVERKILL 0 kPa KILL MUD 1320 kPa ORIGINAL MUD 1250 kg/m3 DEPTH 2600 m
1800 3500 5100 3500 3485 3700 0 3700 3485 3700 0 0

CP
VI-19
CP = given
CP = given
CP = SICP
= given
SICP = FP - HP
SIDPP = FP - HP
SIDPP = 1800 kPa

SICP = 3500 kPa
DPP = FP - HP in DP
DPP = RSPP + SIDPP

October 2006
(KEY)
1. If a kick developed while all the pipe was out of the hole, what string weight would be
required to overcome the surface pressure and the annular preventer friction in the
following situation.
Depth = 1825 m
Drill Pipe = 114 mm, 20.46 kg/m
Drill Collars = 159 mm × 57 mm, 135 kg/m
SICP = 1250 kPa
Friction in Annular Preventer = 3500 daN
Area of DCs = 0.785 × 0.1588 m × 0.1588 m

= 0.0198 m2
Total Force = Pressure × A + Friction Force

= (1250 × 0.0198 m2 × 100) daN + 3500 daN
= 2475 daN + 3500 daN
= 5975 daN
2. Five hundred metres of pipe was tripped out of a 1500 m well when a flowcheck showed
that the well was flowing. By the time the well was shut-in, there was a 3 m3 pit gain.
The driller circulated bottoms-up from bit to surface with the original mud density.
After the circulation, a 15-minute flow check was conducted with no sign of flow from
the wellbore.
Describe the method of getting back to bottom to do a complete bottoms-up.
The unknown is the depth the influx will be penetrated while tripping in (and will result
in rapid tank gain). At that point the influx must either (a) be circulated out in stages or
(b) the pipe can be stripped to bottom and then circulated out.
VI-20 October 2006

3. Calculate the volume of mud to bleed off in order to bring the gas bubble to surface and
still maintain a constant bottom hole pressure with 700 kPa of overkill.
Depth = 1850 m
SIDPP = 1000 kPa
SICP = 1800 kPa
Hole Size = 200 mm
Drill Pipe = 114 mm, 24.71 kg/m, ,630 m
Drill Collars = 165 mm × 64 mm, 215 m
Inter Casing = 244 mm, 53.57 kg/m at 940 m
Pit Gain = 1.0 m3
MACP = 5000 kPa
(a) Find the bleed off volume for the collars in open hole.
1
= × Mud Density × 0.00981
Annular Capacity
1
= × 1260 kg/m × 0.00981
0.008 m3 /m
= 1545 kPa/m3
Therefore for every 700 kPa, bleed off
700 kPa
is 3
= 0.45 m3
1545 kPa/m
(b) Find the bleed off volume for drill pipe in open hole.
1
= × 12.36 kPa/m
0.0212 m3 /m
= 583 kPa/m3
700 kPa
As gas migrates need to bleed off = 1.2 m3
587 kPa/m3
VI-21 October 2006

(c) Find the bleed off volume for drill pipe in casing.
1
= × 12.36 kPa/m
0.03 m3 /m
= 412 kPa/m3
700 kPa
For gas migrating this section needs to bleed off 3
= 1.7 m3
412 kPa/m
VI-22 October 2006

APPENDIX VII
RESOURCES
REGULATORY
AGENCIES WEB SITES
Appendix VII: Resources – Regulatory Agencies Web Sites
RESOURCES
REGULATORY AGENCIES WEB SITES
Alberta
Alberta – Workplace Health & Safety, Alberta Human Resources & Employment
http://www3.gov.ab.ca/hre/whs/
Alberta – Government of Alberta
http://www.gov.ab.ca/home/index.cfm
Alberta – EUB Regulations
http://www.eub.gov.ab.ca/portal/server.pt
British Columbia
British Columbia
http://www.worksafebc.com
British Columbia – Oil and Gas Regulations
http://www.ogc.gov.bc.ca/
VII-1 October 2006

Appendix VII: Resources – Regulatory Agencies Web Sites
Manitoba
Manitoba
http://www.gov.mb.ca/iedm/petroleum/regulations/dap3.html#Posting
Saskatchewan
Saskatchewan – Occupational Health and Safety Regulations
http://www.labour.gov.sk.ca/safety/
Saskatchewan – Industry and Resources
http://www.ir.gov.sk.ca/
VII-2 October 2006

Second Line Well Control Handbook PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Second Line Well Control Handbook PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Program Directed by

Well Control Certification Committee (Drilling - Land) with members from:

Canadian Association of Petroleum Producers (CAPP)

© Copyright 2005 Enform

Revised: October 2006

How and When do Apprentices Register?

Timeline for Trades Training Implementation

How do Qualification Exams Work?

CHAPTER 1 COURSE INFORMATION

CHAPTER 2 ACRONYMS AND LIST OF FORMULAS

SURGE PRESSURE................................................................................................ 3-10

CHAPTER 4 METHODS OF WELL CONTROL

CHAPTER 5 UNUSUAL WELL CONTROL OPERATIONS

CHAPTER 6 UNDERBALANCED AND LATERAL DRILLING

OBJECTIVE THREE .............................................................................................. 6-12

CHAPTER 7 CRITICAL SOUR WELLS

Rockwell Manufacturing Co. (McEvoy)............................................................ 8-33

CHAPTER 9 CASE STUDIES

APPENDIX I CRITICAL SOUR WELLS

APPENDIX II GAUGES AND SENDING UNITS

APPENDIX III LEAK-OFF TESTS

APPENDIX IV CAUSES OF KICKS AND SHUT-IN PROCEDURES

SHUT-IN PROCEDURES (Hard) ........................................................................... IV-8

Candidates for this course are expected to possess the following:

1-1 October 2006

Day One (Core Topics)

¾ Circulation Pressure Losses

¾ Reduced-Speed Pump Pressure

1-2 October 2006

Day Two (Core Topics)

Methods of Well Control

1-3 October 2006

Day Three (Core Topics - A.M.)

Methods of Well Control

Unusual Well Control Operations

1-4 October 2006

Day Three (Optional Topics - P.M.)

¾ Underbalanced and Lateral Drilling

¾ Critical Sour Wells

1-5 October 2006

Days Four & Five

Test Well or Exam

KICK #1 Demonstration kick, 1-2.5 m3, no problems

Plugged Choke Lost Circulation

1-6 October 2006

SECOND LINE SUPERVISOR’S WELL CONTROL CERTIFICATION

2. Second Line Supervisor’s Well Control (Refresher)

1-7 October 2006

1-8 October 2006

First Line Supervisor’s Blowout Prevention (FLSBOP)

1-9 October 2006

ACRONYMS AND LIST OF FORMULAS

2-1 October 2006

GAS EXPANSION FORMULA

2-2 October 2006

WELL CONTROL CALCULATIONS

(NMD is the New Mud Density)

2-3 October 2006

FLUID LEVEL DROP WHILE PULLING DRY AND WET PIPE

Pulling Wet Pipe (m) Length of pipe (m) × Wet Displacement (m 3 / m)

Wet Displacement (m3/m) = Displacement of Pipe (m3/m) + Capacity of Pipe (m3/m)

2-4 October 2006

PILL PUMPING CALCULATION